Episode 211: How To Fill Your Programs Using Guest Speaking – with April Beach and Heather Sager

Heather Sager SweetLife Entpreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Heather’s FREE training: How to Build Authority as a Speaker WITHOUT Second Guessing What You Say

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to get in front of your ideal audience and establish yourself as an expert in your space but you’re not exactly sure how to go about it through the process of speaking. 

Summary:

If you’re an entrepreneur and you’re looking to get in front of your ideal audience, establish yourself as a trusted source and solution, and sell more of your signature programs, services or offers, speaking is a great way to do that. However there are strategic steps that should be followed in order to achieve your ideal outcome, and what we learn in speaking to this week’s guest is that you can actually send clients away by saying the wrong things.
And this week’s show, Heather Seger, strategic speaking advisor, guides you through her four-step Speak for Authority method to fill your programs using speaking. Heather also dives into statistics speakers need to know, how to tell the right story, and expert insights to make sure you are speaking up in the right way, to the right audience, about the right topics. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand the four steps to the “speak for authority method”
  2. Know how to nail your message
  3. And understand quick strategies to choose your signature talk topic

Resources Mentioned:

Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

Episode 210: How To Generate Leads With Pinterest Stories, Videos and Hashtags – with Laura Rike

Laura Rike SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Laura’s Pinterest Toolkit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

Pinterest could be the sleeper tool you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. Pinterest is not a social media platform but a powerful tool that can increase website visits and bring you great new clients. But, few companies know how to use Pinterest. This episode covers the 101 of how to use Pinterest stories, videos, hashtags and more.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand how to use Pinterest stories 
  2. Have a starting plan to use Pinterest
  3. Understand the 101 of how to get started

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey everybody. Welcome back to episode number 210 on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Thanks so much for tuning in today. Happy January, 2021. We obviously just finished commitment week 2021 for entrepreneurs and small business owners.

 

And we had our fourth podcast anniversary birthday last week. So first of all, great way to kick off 2021. Thank you so much for being a listener of this show for the last four years and keeping us a top of the charts for business development online for entrepreneurs. We love you guys. If you haven’t had a chance to yet, please cruise over and leave us a review on Apple podcasts,

 

or just simply share this podcast from your Spotify up to your Instagram stories, or share this on LinkedIn. We appreciate you spreading the word about this show and just honestly how awesome you guys are as listeners. I get direct messages from many of you on Instagram and on LinkedIn, and just appreciate them so much. So we’re kicking off our fourth year with more proven business trainings that you can take to the bank.

 

We are known for giving you business steps and strategies that coaches charge thousands of dollars for. And it’s all totally proven. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs for 24 years and the guests that also come on the show are proven experts in their space. So I’m so glad to turn you over to another guest expert on today’s show. We’re talking about how to generate leads with Pinterest stories,

 

videos, and hashtags. And let me give you a quick little backstory. I don’t do Pinterest. I’m not the Pinterest kind of girl whatsoever from a business strategy standpoint though. I definitely want to be where our clients are in where it’s a great place for our company to be, which is called the sweet life company for people to access our resources in the content that we distribute here on the podcast.

 

And so last year we got on Pinterest. We recorded a show about Pinterest with a guest expert, and my team quickly got to work implementing all those steps in our Pinterest engagement grew by something crazy. It was like 813%, which could be two things. Number one, it could show you how terrible we were at Pinterest before. So, you know,

 

there’s only way only one way to go is up or the strategies once are implemented with Pinterest. You can see almost instant results when you’re using Pinterest correctly. But with that being said full transparency, I still am not great at Pinterest. I’m grateful to have a team that does Pinterest. I’m not really on Pinterest. And so as an entrepreneur, I had a lot of questions for our expert today on,

 

you know, really who should be on Pinterest? What can you do on there? And especially all the new Pinterest stories feature. So on today’s show, we are talking to you guys about the fact that Pinterest could be that sleeper tool that you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. It’s not a social media platform. We’ll talk about that in today’s show,

 

but it’s really a great way to get eyes on your business and have people land on your website and increase your website, traffic and therefore generating leads. But honestly not a lot of companies are still leveraging Pinterest really well. So inter today’s expert, Laura rag is in the house today and she’s at Pinterest powerhouse who helps high performing business owners, content, creators,

 

and influencers grow profitability the right way with sustainable systems using Pinterest. She’s helped clients and students bring in over $50,000 in monthly revenue with her strategies. I mean, she’s really rad. You guys are gonna love her. And she’s been featured as a guest on podcasts like tailwind, ultimate marketer, twin cities, collective, and small business revival. And Laura lives in Minnesota with her family.

 

And she can be found@laurareich.com and we’ll of course, make sure all the links and everything we’re talking about in today’s show are going to be available for you guys in the show notes. If you’re new here then just so you know, you can find all the show notes and all the bonuses that we deliver with this podcast, by going to Sweetlife co.com, simply click on podcast,

 

and then you can click on the podcast number, or you can just type in the number of the podcast in our search bar. This is episode number 210. So welcome here to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. And just a little bit of housekeeping before we dive into today’s show, if you haven’t yet held your seat or joined the early registration waitlist for my,

 

your signature offer masterclass, that is coming in February. So now is the time to get on that wait list. It’s a two half day intensive, so not two and a half days, but it’s two half day intensive that I’m going to be teaching in the middle of February. And this is going to teach you how to extract your own intellectual property.

 

Take a look at all the assets and all the great things you’ve created, and we are going to together build your signature program. Course mastermind, membership, whatever the business model of that is, we’re going to help you extract it all and create it into a signature offer. That’s perfect. Should give you the results that you want. Make sure that you’re joining that early registration list by cruising over to signature offer.com.

 

Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast training.<inaudible> I’m super excited to be here with Laura Reich. And I will say that we did reschedule this episode because we’re both moms and that is what happens in our life. And Laura, you guys have to see this behind the scenes, this video, make sure you go to our YouTube channel and to our Pinterest,

 

there’ll be videos on there because she is glowing because she is beautifully eight months pregnant. And we had to make sure we recorded this show before baby, right. Number three, arrived. So we’re, we’re getting this out of here for you, Laura, welcome to the show. Thanks so much to everybody. A little bit about yourself. Yeah, for sure.

 

I thank you so much for having me. I am a mom of two boys with a girl on the way. So we are so super excited over here in this neck of the woods. And I am a VA gone rogue is what I call myself. So I used to try to do all the things and with a family that doesn’t work. So I picked one thing I love,

 

which happens to be Pinterest and design. And I have been going hard at that ever since and just love it. That’s awesome. Okay. And what is your URL? So people can find you, even though we’ll put all this in the show notes for you. Yeah, of course. It’s just Laura wrike.com. So it’s L a U R a R I K e.com.

 

Awesome. Okay. So today on the show I have a million Pinterest questions. So we had Melanie fountain on the show a while ago, almost a year ago, really diving into Pinterest Pinterest marketing. It was a great episode. I will say, as a case study, we took those like Pinterest one Oh one steps, and we tried them. And as a company,

 

we had crazy results. It was like we went from being nowhere on Pinterest, having random pins to, you know, having thousands and thousands of impressions. And it was like an 813% increase with applying some basic steps. And so I am a believer in Pinterest now, but I will also say I am completely still Pinterest illiterate because my, my team does it.

 

And I get questions all the time from business owners about, you know, still, should I be using this? What is this look like? What can Pinterest really do? And so today’s show is all about kind of dissecting some of those high-level business questions. So our listeners can, first of all, determine whether or not they should be in Pinterest.

 

So number one is this worth your time, number two, how to get started and you have a toolkit for people to get started, which I wish that we had had in the beginning, I will say for sure, you know, really what is this toolkit? How do we get started with this? But there’s so many things kind of spinning around with Pinterest.

 

So let’s kind of start, I would say, spinning around in my head with Pinterest. So let’s go ahead and just start with question number one. How does Pinterest rack up and compare to other social media outlets such as Instagram or LinkedIn? Yeah, for sure. Really the biggest difference is it’s not a social media platform like Instagram or LinkedIn. LinkedIn is been known for the more professional type connections and Instagram.

 

You have conversations and the comments and things like that. Pinterest really does not focus there. They really focus on you putting in the conversation into the copy and making sure that you have the keywords there so that people can find you when they find you. Then they read that conversation and they click through to the destination, which is where you can take it from there.

 

So it’s more search based and it’s more top of funnel based because you can utilize Pinterest to send it where those conversations are happening right now and bring in a wider audience over there. Okay, fascinating. So it’s SEO, it’s search engine. It’s a way to take a conversation and become the top of that question for you. Is Pinterest owned by Google or is it a Google product or something of that sort?

 

It is not, no, it’s separate. It actually plays off of Google’s domain authority and their own domain authority. So when you have your website and then you have a Pinterest profile or business account, right, you’re going to get more domain authority with your profile on Pinterest than you are your own website. Unless, I mean, you’re some super big wig,

 

but it has been around forever. Right? But like my website is not going to have as much domain authority as Pinterest. And so I really use that and play off of their authority to be able to bring people to my website. Very cool. Okay. So what businesses should be there. And so let me rephrase that question. You know, obviously who should be on Pinterest,

 

but as a business strategist, my brain works the other way, what buyers are on Pinterest, like who is actually looking for content to increase maybe their performance, their profit, their business ability or whatever it is. You know, we have a lot of marketing coaches, brand new coaches, video coaches, health coaches, a lot of physicians, a lot of attorneys and even a lot of CPAs that listened to our podcast are their buyers.

 

Absolutely. So there’s kind of two different ways that I tackle that for people. One, I am a Pinterest junkie, right. It’s my jam. So I’m always going to tell you, yes, there are buyers there to give you kind of an unbiased opinion. I tell everybody to go to the platform type in something that your buyers would be searching for,

 

right? Like what is the problem or the pain point that they are having and how would they find you? Other places on Google, on Facebook? Like what are they looking for? And if what pulls up underneath that search is offering or information or education that you can provide to them because you know how to do that as well. Then 1000000%, that’s where you should be listed because you’re missing that opportunity.

 

The other thing that I like to talk to people about is really when you’re thinking about buyers, like where are they? Right. Cause everybody has a different stage. And so we talked about this for a second too. Like, it might not be that they’re a startup or they’re established or whatever, but where do they aspire to be? So if they are someone who is earning three figures right now,

 

they’re not going to be looking for how to earn three figures on Pinterest. They’re going to be looking at things like how to grow your email list to earn five figure months. And that’s because they aspire to be in that position. So that’s also something that you need to kind of reverse engineer and think, okay, is my buyer talking to where they’re at right now?

 

Are they aspiring to be a five figure person? Are they aspiring to maybe lead a life where it’s freedom, right? And so they have more time in their day or their moms or whatever. And that’s really how you want to address it too, when you’re going about it that way too. So smart. Yes. And you know, there are always,

 

people want to hang out just you and I do too. We want to hang out with people that are just slightly ahead of where we are. Right? Those are, those are the best people that are going to hold our hand and grab us to the next level. And that totally makes sense that that’s the same thing people will be looking for on Pinterest as well.

 

How often should people post let’s actually talk about the content that should be posted on Pinterest? What is like the baseline, if you’re going to get started, this is how often you post. This is what it really looks like. Yeah. So it used to be an everything that I’m going to tell you guys here is how I handle it, right?

 

So I am not saying this is the end all be all. I’m not saying this is a hard and fast rule. You have to do it this way. This is what I’ve implemented for myself and my clients and my course members and things like that, where they see the results. So one of the things that I really tell people is it used to be pin 20 to 30 to 40 different times a day,

 

and you would pin your stuff and other people’s stuff. And really that’s not necessarily required anymore. What I teach is that you need to be consistent on the platform. So if you’re someone that’s just starting out and maybe you don’t have a ton of content out there, which I can try to prove you wrong, because there are multiple places that I can find content you have already posted online that can work for this.

 

But if you’re thinking content in terms of like landing page or sales page or blog posts, and you’re feeling like you don’t have a ton, then start at one or two pins a day, right? Even if it’s a time constraint, like how do I create all these pin designs? Start at one to two pins a day, then start to work your way up.

 

If you’re someone that’s been blogging or you have tons of an audience, and you’re looking to really expand on that and you know that you have tons of content, then start hire. We did a case study actually on my website. It showed, even though they had a smaller audience and the other account had a larger audience, one pinned, I think it was like seven times a day.

 

And the other one pin 21 times a day, they still saw the same incremental increases on their own accounts because they were being consistent. And it was the quality over how often they were posting that gave them that feedback to know that that was beneficial. Wow. That’s so awesome. That’s super encouraging. I know because our listeners are like thinking like, Oh shit,

 

20 times a day. Like, how am I going to ever do that? Like that is not ever going to happen. And so that that’s super cool to look at the case study and the stats and, and really just the incremental growth that’s happening with. What’s being posted now, little tangent, what software do you recommend that people use to manage their Pinterest?

 

So I go back and forth on this. I personally use tailwind. I love them dearly because they have tailwind tribes. And that’s really like a community-based where you’re sharing ideas together. And then, I mean, sharing other people’s ideas and really having that community type feel like you would on social media. The problem with me only telling you to pick one platform that I see though,

 

is it’s not a good fit for everybody all the time. So if you’re out there and you’re like, I’ve tried tailwind, it doesn’t work for me. I apologize that it didn’t work for you. I love them. They are amazing. But what I urge you to do is go to Pinterest and make sure that the scheduler you’re using, whether it’s ladder,

 

whether it’s meet Edgar or whatever is a Pinterest approved platform. Because if it’s not, you set yourself up for possibly getting marked as spam or even shut down because they might not be following Pinterest best practices. Wow. Okay. I know that is such a fear. I’m so glad you said that because people would never know, know to even look, they’ll just think,

 

Oh, well, because this platform offers it does works. Great. I’ll just take this one, but it is so important with not just Pinterest, all the different social media platforms that whatever schedule are you using does it does abide by their regulations. So thank you for that. And we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave some resources so that you guys can find Laura.

 

And then also to some of the software tools in the show notes of this show. So we’re not going to totally leave you all hanging out there with that. So this week I was on Pinterest and I have a confession to make. I am never on Pinterest. I’m not a Pinterest girl. I’m just not okay. And so this week I thought,

 

okay, I’m going to go ahead and post a video. I think I had posted something to a LinkedIn story downloaded, like the little five second video. And then I, you know, distributed it or long all of our, you know, Instagram and LinkedIn story channels. And then I’m like, well just sitting there on this little five second video,

 

why don’t I just try to put it on Pinterest? And so I went on there, not knowing even that Pinterest had stories, I was just going to post it like as a little video on there and, you know, boom, I’m sure everybody who’s listening to. This is like, yeah, duh, April Pinterest is had stories for a while.

 

You know, but to me that was, I was like, what, it’s another thing with this story. So what are Pinterest stories? What should be posted there? What is the purpose of a Pinterest story and how can they be leveraged in the business? Yeah, for sure. So it’s actually not something that’s entirely like completely past you, right?

 

So it is new. So don’t worry about that. Some people have had it around for a little while, but it has now opened up to more people. And so a lot of people are seeing the get early access symbol when they’re locking in, there are two sides of it, which is awesome. One side is the, I really feel like Pinterest is stepping up their game in terms of providing an opportunity for content creators,

 

to be able to tell a story better, to be able to educate more. Because when you think about it, you only have one graphic and you can only have so much on that one image to try to tell that story and capture their attention. So the purpose of stories right now is to be able to have multiple images so that they can kind of tap through.

 

And it’s kind of like a slideshow. I teach people to do more of like step-by-step, or this is what I’m working through or behind the scenes, or like more of that conversation visually in those stories. The only downfall to stories that I see currently, which I’m hoping they open up in the future is it’s not clickable to an actual landing page. So you wouldn’t use it like you do a static image because you can’t get them to use that referral traffic in our research that we’ve done in the past few months,

 

though, it really does help increase the brand awareness and authority on your account. So you will see that if you are using it, to teach people things and to educate them and to provide more information for them at the end, Pinterest puts on a follow button so they can start following you on Pinterest. And it’s really bringing in that authority from that platform.

 

And then we’ve also seen the link clicks and the traffic and the leads increase on the other things that we’ve been consistently putting out there because of the help with the stories. Okay. Totally makes sense. And leads me to, first of all, say, that means I really failed on my first story. Cause I just uploaded that one video and I was like,

 

wow, they want me to share more. I don’t have any more right now. All right. What the hell? I’m just going to upload this one video. So first of all, how people find your stories if they’re not already following you, does Pinterest use hashtags? Yeah. So Pinterest uses hashtags. This is one of those controversial type things though.

 

Pinterest, a while ago said no hashtags. Then they said, yes, hashtags. Now they’re saying don’t use them a ton. So my philosophy has always been when they’re, when they opened up hashtags, don’t use them to keyword stuff. Use them within a sentence that you have put into the description, like use up your entire 500 character limit. And then if you have room and you can’t put on a whole,

 

a full another sentence in there, but there’s a hashtag or a phrase that still is relevant to what you’re sharing, then use it as a hashtag. Right. And just kind of take it that way. I’ve never done more than like three on a pin at most. So I don’t really see it being a problem. As long as you use it,

 

that way, those that have gone gung ho or followed the ups and downs of the hashtag or no hashtag I think are starting to not see the best results. The hashtags are still searchable, so you can still find them in search. So it really just depends on, on what placement you have for them in the description. So if your pin is about how to create a content marketing strategy,

 

and it’s like a download of a calendar or graphic, you’re not going to use a hashtag girl boss. I hate that hashtag by the way, every girl listening to the show is going to hate me for saying that I can’t stand that term. Yeah, no, it’s too general. Yeah. Right, right. You know what I mean? You’re going to put like content marketing or content calendar or a social media calendar or something.

 

Yeah. So two that don’t do the girl boss. I’m not a huge fan of that either. I like the terms that actually are like leading me somewhere. Right. Like that seems anyway. So I would say if you’re talking about content marketing though, in the description, don’t waste your hashtag on hashtag content marketing, maybe do calendar download or calendar template or something like that.

 

So it’s still relevant, but it’s playing off of a different type of search that someone would do. Maybe they don’t know about the content marketing calendar, but they’re looking for calendar templates or some sort of business template or something like that. That way. Then you have the conversation, it still flows. You’ve got the keywords in the description. And then you just add in a couple of those hashtags that are still keywords,

 

people would search for, but you couldn’t put it into the sentence flow that you were creating. All right. I got you girl. That totally makes sense. So with our stories, can you add hashtags? I kind of went back to that question. How did, how do people find my stories if they aren’t following me? Stories are still there like a collaboration of pins.

 

So you get to put three or five or however many you want in there and you still get a description on each one. So it’s still going to be searchable. You still can put a couple of hashtags in there if they’re not already following you and they search for something, it’s going to show up in the feed, just like any of the other static pins or video pins.

 

So in terms of your video, you could have uploaded it just as a pin instead of a story. And it works the same way as a static pin. You do get a little bit more tagging capability in terms of topic, tagging for videos. Then you do a static pen. So you can also use the tags for keywords that you want to be found for.

 

And that increases the searchability as well. Okay. So let me make sure I understood this correctly. The stories are basically a collection of pins related to the same things, is that right? Yep. So if I have a static pain, can I like Instagram? When you have something in your feed, that’s a post, can I push that to story?

 

Like, can I push a static pin to story or is it a separate, complete way to post that It’s a separate, complete way to post that you can repost it? The only problem that I see by doing that though is Pinterest is very heavily encouraging people to do fresh content. So they will see that same static pin posted. And then again on your stories and they’ll consider that as like a spam duper kit.

 

Got it. Okay. I lied that. Wasn’t the last question before. Thank you listeners for bearing with me. I hope I’m not asking like questions that you all know the answers to. I really include this in this area. And so it was, I’m so glad to have you here, Laura. And so how long the stories stay in a story?

 

How long are they shown for So completely different than social media? They stay on there just like a Pinterest pin, unless you go and delete them, they will be on your profile. Awesome. Okay. That makes me really happy. Nothing bothers me more than posting a really great Instagram story that people only get to see for 24 hours. So that’s super awesome.

 

Thank you. I’m super excited about stories. Like I said, Kelly and JC on my team really create our Pinterest content and post that. So thank you. By the way, to those of you guys who have been following us on Pinterest it’s, it’s cool to see that and those interactions and things, but I’m totally personally Pinterest illiterate. So I’ve just have so many questions that I am not able to answer for our clients.

 

So I’m very excited about all this. Okay. So let’s chat a little bit about video pins. Now, what is the parameter around video pins? Are they all vertical? How long can they be? And are they clickable? Yeah, so they Do not all have to be vertical. I still suggest it because then you’re taking up more real estate on the feed.

 

I personally don’t want to go more than a minute to a minute and a half. I believe you can go longer. I think it’s like two or three minutes that you can go up to. I’m not a hundred percent positive because I stick on the lower end. And then what was your other question? That was my other question. Oh, it’s are they clickable?

 

Oh yeah. So they are not clickable unless they’re used for ads. They have been clickable in the past. Again, I’m not sure if that’s something that’s changing or updating because there have been a lot of changes in the past, like four to six months on the platform, but they really do help with that growth of the account as well. When we’ve seen a lot of people come to us and say,

 

you know, I had a huge spike in October and now it’s December and everything’s dropping and I don’t know what to do. They post a couple video pins, they do a story pin and they’re back up again. Right. And they’re doing that consistently. I’m not going out there and telling everybody to post one and you’re going to be like woo through the roof and like,

 

awesome. But like, if you keep doing that, you’re going to keep seeing the results go up and back in the direction that you want them to go. Love that. Love that. Thank you so much. I have my million of Pinterest notes here and, and Laura, the couple of things. So for our listeners who want to get started with Pinterest,

 

I will say in full transparency, even though I’m not the one that does it, I’m really grateful for an amazing team that manages our Pinterest there. We really have seen amazing results and growth from using Pinterest as a platform with our audience. So I will say that from what I I’ll just say, if you guys are considering using Pinterest, definitely have a strategy behind it.

 

And really what I would like is to direct people towards some steps to get started. Nobody wants to recreate the wheel and you have a Pinterest like toolbox a toolkit it’s really cheap. It’s like 37 bucks or something that people can get started with what is inside that toolkit and what can people expect with that? Yeah, for sure. So the toolkit is really put together for anybody that needs that simple strategy,

 

right? That’s actually gonna help them convert on the platform. And so it’s easy. We provide different templates for them, whether they’re static, pen templates, video template, story templates. I have an awesome keyword swipe file in there too. So I’ve gone through over 700 different type of niche, specific keywords and hashtags in this swipe file. And the cool thing is,

 

is we constantly update that. So the swipe file for fun stats has actually brought in over $33,000 for clients and toolkit. So That’s been super fun. Yeah, That’d be good work. That’s so good. Talk about an ROI. Yeah. Tons of other stuff too. Like we have a call to action, swipe file a branding blueprint to help them really understand how to brand their pin images.

 

And then there’s some bonuses of course, like a custom dashboard for Google analytics and how to track and make sure you’re getting the ROI and stuff like that too. So Yeah, I mean, when we, when we got started and we started implementing what I was saying is so true, like if we had had a toolkit like this, we would have grabbed it in the second.

 

And so based on our listeners in our show, if you guys are thinking you want to get started with Pinterest, we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave a link to grab this toolkit in the show notes for this episode. So make sure you guys go over and grab this. I would recommend those of you guys that are listening to get started here.

 

It’s a low investment and it saves probably months and months of time and years of learning because you’re getting Laura’s wisdom for only $37. That’s crazy for those of you guys that are scaling your business. So for those of our listeners, you’re scaling your business. You have a team like me that you really just, you want to delegate this, you know,

 

you, you probably want to be on the platform. Maybe your team doesn’t know Pinterest. They aren’t experts. Then I am going to point them towards you, Laura, we’ll go ahead and make sure that we put these show notes and I would really consider like hiring Laura’s team out to manage your Pinterest for you or something like that. At least chatting with Laura on the phone.

 

I know she has a bunch of other stuff for you guys. So based on our listeners, I always try to give recommendations. So if you guys have ever gone through and taken our quiz to figure out what phase of business you’re in, I’m going to tell you exactly who needs to buy kind of what here, if you want to do this, if you’re in phase one or two,

 

then I would go with the toolkit. If you’re in phase three, four or five, then I would go with one of Laura’s other done for you services. If you don’t know what phase of business you’re in, go to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to get a whole rundown based on where you are of your phase of business development,

 

and then we’ll direct you there. But for those of our listeners, most of our faithful listeners already know what phase of, of our start to scale up system they’re in. And so they know, so phase one or two, you guys are the toolkit people three, four or five, then really done for you services near you’re ready to scale. Thank you so much.

 

Yay. Love everything that you shared. My, my Pinterest entrepreneur IQ, just like totally leveled up three levels. I feel like awesome. And I can’t wait to, you know, for our team to like start implementing some of the stuff that we talked about on the show as well. So super appreciate your time. Congratulations on your new baby. When this airs he’ll be here and I’m so excited for you and we’ll make sure we leave all the show notes for everybody to get their hands on these things.

 

I will say you guys, honestly, Pinterest has been a real nice pleasant surprise. We’re not on Tech-Talk or anything. We’re not on Twitter. And Pinterest has been really awesome and powerful for us to grow our audience. So thanks for being on this show. Yeah. I love hearing that. And I mean, honestly, it is such a great platform.

 

I’m so glad that your team can help you with that. That’s absolutely amazing. And thank you so much for having me. Of course. Yes, of course. Thanks for being here. I’ll talk to you soon. Thanks. Awesome. Some show. Thank you so much for tuning in and sticking with me here with Laura at the time that we recorded this,

 

Laura was expecting, and now she is probably listening to this episode, holding her beautiful baby girl in her arms. And so we just really appreciate Laura’s time and making sure we were able to record this episode for you guys before she gave birth and went on her maternity leave in such great information, follow us. If you aren’t yet on Pinterest, you can find us at Sweetlife podcast and you can see some of the things that our team has been doing over the last year.

 

You can even see how our, even our branding and our usage of Pinterest tablets has evolved how we’re using Pinterest stories and how we’re using video. We’d love to connect with you there and follow you back. All right, you guys have an awesome day. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number two.

Episode 209: How To Get Started On Clubhouse: For Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet! Follow me on Clubhouse @aprilbeach
By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers and mentors.

Summary:

Clubhouse is a new social media networking opportunity for entrepreneurs. It truly takes the box it’s placed around you from other platforms and allows you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert, learn, gift, and grow. But you may just be hearing about Clubhouse or be on the app and not exactly sure how to use it. Though we are not clubhouse experts This short episode gives you the 101 on how to get started on clubhouse what to expect and great opportunities for entrepreneurs using this app. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the first three things to do when you get on Clubhouse
  2. Understand why Clubhouse is so special
  3. Start to strategize your clubhouse funnel and company growth

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet!
  • By Email: www.sweetlifeco.com/clubhouse 
  • By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880
Direct Links to Join My Upcoming Clubhouse Rooms 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys Welcome to the Sweetlife life entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, and I am super excited about this episode for a couple of different reasons. First and foremost, it is our fourth podcast birthday.

 

So thank you so much. You’ve been tuning in for the last four years. We have dropped an episode faithfully every week. And those of you guys who’ve been longtime listeners. I mean, those are you guys around the podcast launch team. I appreciate you so much for being part of this show, making this show what it is today and sharing it with your friends.

 

Thank you. Thank you. Thank you. If you’re new to listening, it’s so great to meet you. This is a show where we are known for dropping some serious gems. Sometimes those that other companies and coaches charge thousands for a lot of our episodes come with bonuses that are so good. Like you can’t even believe they’re free. So cruise over to Sweetlife co.com,

 

click on the podcast to get all the goods. If you have never ever been there before today is a special episode. Not only because it’s our birthday. As a matter of fact, a little behind the scenes, I was going to do a real special birthday episode and you know, we’re going to do this whole shindig and it was going to be great,

 

but there’s something way more exciting than our fourth podcast birthday that I absolutely had to scrap the schedule. And that’s what we’re talking about today. Today, we are diving into all things, clubhouse the new clubhouse app, especially for entrepreneurs. And I’m going to share seven steps to get started on clubhouse. Before I do this, I need to have a little disclaimer here.

 

I am not a clubhouse expert. As a matter of fact, there’s probably somebody, many people who can speak to this way better than I’m going to do. But I have taken the time to lay out seven steps based on my experience or the last couple of weeks inside the clubhouse app, things that I have learned by following other people and just really things that I’ve gathered about being on this app.

 

So I’m sharing with you my experience and what I’ve learned, and guess what you know, what’s so cool about the new clubhouse app. Honestly, there aren’t any experts yet everybody is new, and that’s why I’m so excited to share today’s Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast episode so that you can get on clubhouse. You can be a drop of a big bucket that this app I believe is going to make.

 

So let’s go ahead and start with the fundamentals here. So, you know, whether or not you’re in the right place and you should continue hanging out and listening to this episode with me, number one, who is, is episode four, this is for, and all phases of my start to scale up system. So if you don’t know what business phase you’re in,

 

you can very quickly go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to receive a segmentation based on your business phase and very specific, customized recommendations to grow and scale your business to the next level. This particular episode is for entrepreneurs in all phases of my system. Just if you’re a new listener, the reason why I did note that is because some of our episodes are just based on a specific phase in business.

 

And I note that phase in the beginning of every single podcast episode. So frankly, you don’t waste your time. If you’re hanging out here with me, I want to make sure that this is a valuable use of your time. And so I tag every episode based on the phase of business that that episode applies to this one, however, is for all phases.

 

So let’s go ahead and move to the next thing, who is this episode? Great for this episode is great for entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers, and mentors. If that is you keep listening. Now let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit here. Clubhouse is a new social media networking app and opportunity for entrepreneurs. It really truly takes the box out from around you that other social media platforms have created the limitations.

 

The restrictions in clubhouse enables you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert. It also allows you to learn, gift other people with your knowledge and grow, but you may just be hearing about clubhouse and you’re not really sure if it’s exactly, you know, what you should be on or how to use it. And so in this short episode,

 

I’m going to give you the one-on-one on clubhouse, based on my experience, those experience of my colleagues and the people that I am following. So my mentors, so that you can get started on clubhouse fast and in the right way. And we’re going to also talk about actually how to get into the app as well. At the end of this episode,

 

you’ll know the first three things to do when you get on the app, but I’m actually giving you seven steps to actually onboard yourself onto the app. You’ll understand why clubhouse is so, so special. And you’re going to be able to start strategizing your clubhouse processes, what you’re doing on clubhouse personally. And of course professionally, because I’m a business coach and that’s what I talk about.

 

All right. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into the seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs.<inaudible> Okay. So welcome to call the house. We help. That basically means that I know that not everybody’s on there yet. You may be listening to this show being like, what the heck, April? This is so not fair.

 

I am not on this app. So here are a couple, just one. Oh, about getting on the app. First of all, currently at the recording of this, something can change literally the next hour with this app. You guys, but at the recording of this, which is only a week before the show drops, I did, this is close to the time of the show dropping as I could.

 

It’s only available to iOS users. Those you guys that are on Android, you’re going to have to wait a little bit longer. I have zero details on that, but I just wanted to let you know that it’s only available to iOS users. If you are an iOS user, you can go and we have it in the show notes here, you can go download the clubhouse app and let’s go ahead and dive into step number one.

 

The very first thing that you do even before you’re on the app is you should create and save your username. Now, here are some tips that I have seen. And from what I’m learning about your clubhouse username, unlike on some other platforms where you would take it, the name of your brand or your business clubhouse is like a real deal, real relationship app.

 

So it’s best to make your username, your real name, or as close as you can get to it. So that’s step number one. When you reserve your username, you’re going to be put on a waiting list to get in the app. Some people are waiting weeks, maybe even months to get into this app. And I understand that it’s frustrate.

 

Keep listening, hang in there with me, listen to the rest of the show. Cause I’m going to tell you exactly what, what to do. Once you get on the app, you can cut to the front of the line and we do this by getting a sponsor. That is also, what’s so cool about the clubhouse app, but you kind of have to know somebody that knows somebody to get in there.

 

They have to have your phone number literally saved in their phone. So you don’t just kind of know them. You actually have to really know him. So I was waived to the front of the line. My experience was I went downloaded the clubhouse app, reserved my name. I am at April beach on clubhouse. They Kevin’s my name. I was really excited about that.

 

And I was immediately waved in by my sponsor. Brian Fanzo you guys might know him as I social fans on Instagram brands also been a guest here on the podcast and he’s one of my mentors that helps me to increase my speaking career. And so Brian immediately got an alert that I was trying to get in the app and he waved me to the front of the line.

 

He endorsed me in. So what happens now on my profile, his endorsement of me is always on the bottom of my profile in my bio, which is really, really cool. And that can lead to a whole nother conversation about who you should endorse, maybe who you should not endorse on clubhouse, but that’s just my story of how I got it.

 

Otherwise you can be invited in and skip the wait list. When somebody, you know, on the app is a member of a group, which we’ll talk about groups and clubs are clubs on the app and they can nominate you. So those are a couple of ways that you can actually cut to the front of the line and get on the app. Otherwise just keep waiting.

 

You’ll get on there soon enough and believe me, it is worth the wait. So step number one is creating your username. Make it your real name. Again. This is like a real deal app. Step number two is creating your bio. There are clubhouse rooms on how to create great clubhouse bios. You are welcome. If you’re already on clubhouse,

 

cruise over, check out my bio at April beach, say it’s perfect. I’m not a clubhouse bio expert, but it’s been working for me to connect with the people that I really want to connect with. So you’re welcome to steal what I’ve done there. Now, overall in your bio. I want you to know that clubhouse is very, very generous.

 

It gives you a great deal of space in writing room to really bullet point, what you do and be very intentional about who you can help and who you want to connect with. So in your bio, you should make it really clear what you do to the problem you solve in really your intent tensions. Why are you on clubhouse? What’s your intention for being there?

 

You might also want to share something unique and funny, maybe a little something like behind the scenes. Like you love to ride horses or like Brian Fanzo my sponsor has that. He’s like a pager wearing millennial. I mean, that’s funny like who even wears a Pedro at all anymore. Right? And so you might want to include some of those things.

 

It’s in the bio. One of the things that I understand is that your bio is also searchable. And so within the app, the first few lines in your bio carry a lot of weight. So currently if you search online business strategist, I will come up as the top of that search in clubhouse. That’s because in my bio, the very first three words,

 

bio our online business strategist. So that’s step number two, creating your bio step. Number three of getting started on clubhouse is connecting really, really. So the first version you should connect with is your sponsor. You should follow your sponsor back, okay. This is really keeping it raw. I cut somebody right to the front of the line, who I’ve known in business for a really long time.

 

And this person is not following me back. It’s just a courtesy, right? So follow your sponsor back now, with that being said, you can learn a lot from your sponsor. So follow your sponsor. And there’s a little bell next year sponsors name you’re going to want to turn on. That means you get a notification whenever your sponsor is talking,

 

go in and listen to those rooms that your sponsor is in. Go and listen and learn and be a sponge. The first part of connecting on club house is just sitting back kind of watching the flow of how it goes. It’s a really amazing way too. Honestly, you’re dive in head first into this. It’s not even like a Cannonball. If there was like an upside down Cannonball and that’s what happens.

 

You just are in here. And all of a sudden you’re in these places and people are talking, it’s like a whirlwind. So just chill, just sit there and just absorb and take as long as you need to, to do that. Bet, we’re going to talk about not taking too long and jumping in right away. The next thing you want to do is when you’re listening to somebody speak,

 

and I’m going to share with you exactly the breakdown of how you find those places, where people are speaking here in a sec. But when you’re listening to somebody who, somebody who is speaking, when you’re in a room is what it’s called. Look to the people, to your right, and look to the people to your left. What you going to see is people literally hanging out,

 

standing next to you in a room, listening to somebody, speak on stage. Now this is all on an app. It’s all on a screen. So the speakers are going to be at the top of your screen. The people that the speakers follow are going to be the next section down, and then the rest of the audience is going to be underneath that clubhouse.

 

We’ll probably change that up in some capacity in some way, I’ve heard some thoughts of other people on that, but currently the recording of this that’s the way it is. So look at the people standing next to you on your right and your left tap on their bio. Maybe give them a follow. If it’s something that really aligns with, you know,

 

what you want to connect with. And then the next step is connecting off the app. Clubhouse does not have any hyperlinks, your bio, your neighbor’s bio, nobody gets hyperlinks except for there’s two places that clubhouse currently links to you. And that is Twitter and Instagram. And this is a really powerful thing I will say in my 10 days, maybe 14 days now being on clubhouse,

 

my Instagram following has tripled because my clubhouse account is connected to my Instagram account. And so how people connect with you is through DMS is through relationships on Twitter and Instagram, because there really isn’t a way to connect except for within talking within the rooms in the clubhouse app itself. So just so you know, that’s how you connect with people off the app.

 

There’s a lot of strategy behind that. As far as building funnels, can’t get into in this episode, this is just your seven steps to get started, but I’m sure your wheels are spinning. Okay. So that’s step number three. Step number four is search and find. So in clubhouse just a few days ago, they just released the ability to search by topic.

 

They’ve done a really good job with this. And so you can actually search and get notifications on rooms. So discussion rooms that fall under those topics here is the only downfall that I see of that. So far, the only rooms or discussions that you’ll get notified of are currently those that are hosted by clubs. We’re going to talk about clubs here in a minute.

 

So if you search entrepreneurship where you search parenting or you search gardening or whatever, you’re only going to get notification of the discussions under those topics that are hosted by a club, not all the rooms. So if I were to launch a room on gardening, because I don’t yet have a clubhouse club, you would never get notification of that. So just part of being part of an app,

 

that’s in the beta process, but you can still search by topics that you want to learn from. Also, I would recommend that you search by topics that you want to lend to. So this is getting into a little bit of business strategy. If you are an expert, if you are an expert funnel builder, or you’re a Facebook ad strategist, or you’re a graphic designer search for the rooms,

 

obviously in your area of expertise, so that you may be able to lend some information to the host of that room, the moderators of that room and the listeners of that room, or frankly, just so you can up your skills and be even better at what you do. And then the next tip I have for you under search and find is search for totally random rooms too.

 

One of the cool things about clubhouse is there are starting to be rooms on everything. I came across an amazing room. It was an 80 HD room and it’s just for people like me that have trouble focusing. And the room is hosted where they work in sprints and everybody’s sitting there in the room together and the host puts on music and then everybody goes to work for a period of time.

 

And then everybody together like takes a break and has their distraction moment. It’s a great way to increase productivity. So those are some cool rooms happening inside clubhouse that are totally not business-related at all. In addition to that, I will tell you if you are a faith person, if you’re a believer, there are some amazing rooms. This morning, I was in a room hosted by Myron golden business building like kingdom business building.

 

There’s amazing prayer rooms, Bible study rooms, really for all religions. Those are just the ones that I’m in. And so very cool things that you can search that are totally not business-related at all. Like if you need prayer and you don’t want to go to your neighbor or your sister, you can go on clubhouse and you can raise your hand and say,

 

will you please pray for me? I mean, how amazing, Oh my gosh. Like the power of this is just so unbelievable. Okay. Sorry. I’ll get back on track. Step number five, navigating. This is kind of just a one about how to navigate the app. The very first resource I have for you, that is a place that you should be tapping into is clubhouse guide.com.

 

We have put a resource to that in the link of the show notes here, please make sure you go to clubhouse guide. It’s how to get started on clubhouse clubhouse. One Oh one clubhouse best practices, a lot of the black and white and the meat and potatoes of what I’m explaining here on the show. Although I’m just sharing it with you from my personal experience so far,

 

that’s where I want to direct you to. That’s always going to be updated on, you know, the really the one-on-one and navigating the platform. It’s clubhouse guide.com. So let’s talk about nag navigating the platform and some of the terminology. The first thing you need to know is that there is what’s called a hallway. You have your own unique curated hallway and the hallway is showing you rooms,

 

discussion rooms based on the topics of interest that the app determines you may want. Now, again, what determines what you want are the topics that you follow, but also the people that you follow. So when you get on the app, you’re going to see a hallway. It’s like a list of conversations happening right now. All you have to do is tap on any of those rooms.

 

You’re immediately put into the audience and you can listen and see if you want to stay. When you enter a room, you’re put on mute. So you don’t have to worry about it. You can just tap on there, do the dishes, you know, drive your kids in the car or be at the gym, whatever. So the first thing you need to know is a hallway.

 

The second navigation point is the events tab. The events tab is in the top of the app. It looks like a little calendar, and you’re going to see a couple of different options for you. First of all, they’re suggested events for you, all events. And then the third tab is your events. And we’re going to talk about those in a minute.

 

So clubhouse will suggest events and scheduled rooms. Events are rooms that are, prescheduled both rooms that are prescheduled by clubs and individuals that you may want to attend. You’re also going to receive notification. So anybody you follow when they start a room, or when they’re speaking on stage in a room, if you have notifications turned on for that person, clubhouse will notify you.

 

And they’ll say like, Hey, so if I’m speaking in a room and you follow me, clubhouse would be like, Hey, April’s talking over here on this room on blah, blah, blah. And you can immediately tap that notification and enter the room and start chatting with me. How cool is that? Step number three is following clubs. So clubhouse enables people to create clubs.

 

Now we’re going to be doing many podcasts on this. I’m sure this is a very, very new app. Again, it’s in beta testing. I am not a club owner, so I can’t speak to that yet. But what I can share with you is that you can apply to have your own club. It’s going to be like the new Facebook group.

 

Many of you listened to this podcast, you know, how much I load Facebook groups. So I’m really looking forward to an opportunity to create community on a different platform. So just clubhouse, you can apply to start your own club. The application process currently is very backed up, but when you get approval for your club, then you can invite club members.

 

And when you have club members, they’re going to get notified every time your club hosts a room or an event. And so many other things, they can nominate other members to your club. I mean, it’s really an amazing way to grow your community. So one of the tips for you is if you want to start a club from what it is right now,

 

the way I understand is you need to host and schedule some individual rooms so that the app sees it. You’re not just like a flash in the pan that you’re really here. You’re really committed to build a longterm club with this app. You need to prove it to them. And how cool is that? It’s not like anybody can just start a group,

 

right? You have to be in it to give and to serve and to win it. And so you have to apply for a club and you have to prove to the app that you are worthy of being there and hosting that club on their app. Now you can follow clubs as well at the bottom of each person’s bio. If you go to the bottom of my bio,

 

I follow a ton of clubs. And I’m, I’m a member of really a great deal of clubs, maybe too many. Cause I got club happy and in applied, cause I was so excited just to talk to all these people. But if you go to the bottom of my app, you can see the clubs that I am a member of or that I follow.

 

Honestly, I’m not really sure that delineation between that. I think they’re the ones, I’m the member of in the bottom again, see, I’m learning here and you can click on that club and you can follow the club. Once you followed the club, the club hosts can have an opportunity to invite you to join the club. So you can follow a club and you can join a club.

 

So two different ways to connect with clubs. And then again, we talked about creating your own club, go to clubhouse guide.com for more information on creating your own club, but you’ve got to prove it, that you’re worthy of that. And you’re, you’re ready to be a leader on this app in order to get approved. For that, I promise this is going to be a quick episode and dang,

 

I have more to say than I thought I’m just clearly. So like a kid in a candy store, excited about this app. Number six be you. Okay. So when you join a room, if you have a question, raise your hand and ask the question, the host or the moderator will bring you to the stage. When you get on the stage currently in the app,

 

you are un-muted. So please, please mute yourself because you’re basically going to be disrupting the whole conversation when you get on stage and maybe they’re not ready to have you speak just yet. So be patient when you get on stage, mute yourself, listen, wait for the moderator to say, Hey so-and-so did you have a question or something that you’d like to say?

 

And here is a second thing. It’s okay to be nervous. It is crazy. Some of the really big influencers and leaders that I’ve seen get onto the stage for the first time and their voice is a little shaky or frankly, they’re just like, I’m nervous. And why somebody said it really well. I forget who said this, otherwise I would so credit them.

 

Literally. It’s very true. Somebody said, it’s not that you’re nervous to speak, but I think that we all understand the gravity of what this app could do for our relationships and our business. I think that’s where the nerves come from. It’s having an opportunity to speak to people that you would probably otherwise not have a chance to connect with. As an example,

 

I have been honored to be on the stage and to invite influencers to my stage, such as Myron golden and so many others. And I would never be able to connect with these leaders. Otherwise I send them an email. Obviously I can’t get a cell phone number, you know, and these are people that I highly value and I want to learn from in clubhouse.

 

It’s okay to be nervous when you go on the stage, just ask your question. And one of the other tips I want to leave with you is don’t ask to speak unless you have something really valuable to say, you know, those people who like raise their hand because they just want to speak because they like to hear themselves talk. Don’t be that person on clubhouse.

 

Seriously. If you want, if you have something genuine that you want to contribute, if the host says, Hey, does anybody want to contribute or ask a question, do it, don’t hesitate, jump up there and do it, but definitely make sure that you’re being respectful of both the hosts and the moderators and everybody in the audience time based on what you’re going to say and just don’t be that weird fan person just be respectful.

 

So if you are invited on a stage or if you’re in a room, you’re going to look around, you’re going to see some really big name people in this space. They’re just people too. They’re just, they’re listening and talking and sharing in the conversation. And it is absolutely a beautiful place just to be authentic, build relationships, learn, give,

 

grow, and create amazing networking with other companies. And then the last tip I’ll leave you with step number seven is starting your own room. Dive in, create a room. I have literally been buried in Instagram DMS about people asking me questions about clubhouse or companies who want to work with me based on the rooms that I’ve hosted. And now what they know my area of specialty is from clubhouse.

 

Literally my calendar is totally full. Okay. That is because I dove in and I started a room. I didn’t know what I was doing. And I was like, Hey, you know what? This is my first room I started. It was about the podcast episode of the week. I was like, okay, Hey, cool. I already know that I’m talking about this on the podcast this week.

 

How cool would it be to start a room? That’s a conversation about the podcast. And so I started a room and it was just talking about five areas of focus for the upcoming year in your business. And that room grew and grew and grew and grew. And I invited people to the stage and I made people moderators with me. And there’s other strategies behind that and why I did that.

 

We can talk about it another episode. But the reality is, is that just start a room. You know, I was speaking to somebody of course, again and Instagram DMS, and she is starting a business in an area where, you know, she just needs to do a lot more market research. And so I suggested to her, start a room,

 

asking a question, asking, are there any XYZ experts out there or are there any people with this experience out there, come join my room and let’s talk about it. So she didn’t even have to be the expert of that room just because you hosted doesn’t mean you’re the expert, a great colleague of mine, Heather and Haven would we host a lot of rooms together.

 

Now started a room a week ago, week and a half ago on how to monetize virtual events. Very simply because she wanted to know how and that room grew to the largest room. We have coasted on clubhouse so far with amazing virtual event and speaking influencers coming to our stage. The whole experience frankly, is blowing my mind. As you can probably hear in my recording of this show.

 

So you don’t even have to be an expert. Just ask a question. You might say, Hey, does somebody want to co-work with me right now? Hey, is anybody else having trouble potty training their kid? I mean, it can be about anything. Dive in, start a room, get started on this app, building authentic relationships. Okay.

 

So I don’t think I was succinct as I wanted to be. I apologize for that. Let me recap. The seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs. Number one, go get your username. Hopefully you won’t have to wait too long to get in. Number two, create your bio number three. Connect that’s following your sponsors and intentionally connecting with people and making other networking connections on the app.

 

Number four, search and find the right topics, the right rooms, and totally random rooms. Just to see how they’re doing things. Number five, navigate the hallway. So make sure that you know how to tap into rooms, how to leave rooms quietly in how to follow clubs, be part of clubs and get more of the topics that you’re interested in listening to in your hallway.

 

Number six, be you. It’s cool. Just be you. You can show up in your pajamas. Nobody cares be you and number seven, dive on in. Okay. So in the show notes of this episode, which you can find by visiting sweet life podcast.com forward slash two zero nine, I have a ton of links for you. You are going to find obviously the link to download the clubhouse app.

 

You’re going to find the link to clubhouse guide.com and you are also going to get an opportunity to get notifications from me. Now, clubhouse gives a lot of notifications, so we kind of to create a work around for this. So if you want to know, when I’m chatting in a room, join me in a room to chat. And then all of the other amazing entrepreneurs that I moderate and cohost rooms with,

 

you can very simply go to sweet life co.com forward slash flub house. Let me say that again. Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. If you are not on clubhouse, go there. And I send a periodic notes about the rooms that we are in highlights from rooms, in other things that we have seen and experienced just being in this app in the early phases.

 

So if you want updates, room notes, highlights, amazing quotes. I have about 20 pages of just blow your mind quotes. And then you can get those things by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse, or you can text them word clubhouse to the number (805) 254-0880. All of those things are in the show notes. Also in the show notes, I have provided direct links to join my upcoming rooms.

 

So if you’re already on clubhouse, you can go to the show notes for this episode and you can click on the direct link to join my show. I hosted a show, not a show room. And so used to saying show with podcasts. I host weekly room every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And they are business strategy sessions for entrepreneurs.

 

Very similar to the things we talk about here on the podcast, but you and I get to talk about about it and I get to help you and help you strategize and answer your immediate questions about the topics January 13th. If you’re listening to this show live, I am. Co-hosting a room on license in your content. So how to scale your business by licensing your content.

 

I’m co-hosting that room with a few different, amazing attorneys that are copyright attorneys, IP attorneys definitely join that room. If you’re thinking about scaling your business by licensing your content courses and other strategies, or frankly, you’re just wondering about it, January 20th, I’m hosting how to grow your six figure coaching business with podcast and PR and January 27th. I am hosting a room on how to create your methodology,

 

your process, and turn it into your signature offer. Those are all on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock Eastern time. I would love to chat with you in any of my rooms and literally there’s so many other awesome rooms. I can’t wait for you to jump in and join this app when you do make sure you follow me at April beach. And if you aren’t yet,

 

you can DM me on Instagram. I am at April beach life on Instagram, and I will send you a link, a direct link from IgG on how to get all hard clubhouse, insider notes, and links to join me in all these rooms. Ooh, as longer than I thought it was going to be so much for hanging out with me guys,

 

I got to get back to clubhouse. Yep. That’s pretty much what it’s like. I’m hosting a room tonight, a female entrepreneurs round table, and so excited to jump in and learn from some of these amazing men and women leaders. And I can’t wait to talk to you in there too. Again, the direct show notes for this episode can be found@sweetlife.com

 

Forward slash two zero nine. All right. Talk to you guys soon.

Episode 208: How Be A Peak Performer In Health, Wealth, and Relationships in 2021 – with Eric Partaker

208 Eric Partaker SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

The 3 Alarms, Free Digital Book and Training

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and leaders in all phases of business who feel like you just can’t catch up, and you know there’s a better way to live. Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

To kick off the new year, I’ve brought Peak Performance Coach, Eric Partaker, on the show to help you get started on the right foot and make 2021 the year you become the most productive version of yourself in multiple areas of your life and business. Eric has worked with and led high-performing teams at McKinsey & Company, Skype, and Chilango. He is one of 300 people worldwide certified as a High Performance Coach, by the High Performance Institute. Over the last 20 years he has studied and modeled the traits and habits of the world’s most successful people, in order to help his teams and clients break through their barriers and reach their highest potential, in both their work and life.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. No longer waste time
  2. Have a strategy to root your identity in who you want to be (even before you get there)
  3. Stop being an amateur and become a pro

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
Email Eric Partaker | eric@ericpartaker.com
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to 2021. The first show, and we are starting out with a major bang that is going to be a game-changer for you. I’m so excited to dive in and help you understand how to be a peak performer in your health,

 

wealth, and relationships this year and beyond with our guest expert, Eric partaker. So let’s chat about what we’re doing here and why this show is so special. You know, as entrepreneurs, as leaders, as human beings, we all want to operate at our highest level. We all want to be that person that we envisioned we would be right. But what happens is we get burned out.

 

We get stretched thin, and there are some things that just don’t balance out to equal the vision that you might’ve had for what you wanted your life and your company to look like. And so we’re going to dive into that and we’re going to start out with a powerful plan and strategies to really be a peak performer in your health, your wealth and your relationships in 2021.

 

And let me just tell you, this is not another piece of content or some other podcasts on how to become productive or how to set goals. No, no, no. Our guests today shared strategies that I have never ever heard before. These aren’t the same old, same old things. These things are game changers. You guys, if you watch our video episode of this,

 

it is totally me behind the scenes taking massive notes. The things that he was saying was just gold. And so this is an episode that is definitely not to miss for those of you that really want to operate at your highest level in 2021. And, and frankly take back control of your health, wealth, and relationships, which are all things that we have left behind struggling with this last year.

 

We all hope and pray. So let’s talk about, you know, really what you can expect out of this episode. In this episode, we’re talking with Eric and I’m going to give you a bio on him. This guy is super duper awesome. So we’re talking with Eric, who’s a peak performance coach and author of the bestselling book, the three alarms,

 

a simple system to transform your health, wealth, and relationships forever. And the information on this show, like I said, it’s not going to be the same old, same old. You’re going to discover powerful new ways to increase your productivity, deep root your identity in who you’re supposed to be. And you’re also going to understand how to become even stronger with each challenge that comes your way.

 

It’s really, really good stuff. You guys. So at the end of this episode, if you apply the strategies in here and the bonus, that’s going to be given to you here with this show, you’ll no longer waste time. You’ll have a, to root your identity and who you want to be, even if you’re not that person yet. And you’ll stop being an amateur and become a pro.

 

Now let’s introduce you to Eric partaker. Eric’s a CEO coach and mentor, author, and peak performance expert. He was named the CEO of the year in 2019 business excellence awards. One of the top 30 entrepreneurs in UK 35 and under by startups magazine and among Britain’s most disruptive entrepreneurs by the Telegraph, he’s advised fortune 50 CEOs while at McKinsey helped build Skype’s multi-billion dollar success story and has founded several businesses of his own.

 

He’s a certified peak performance coach and has also completed a coaching certification and apprenticeship with professor BJ Fogg who leads Stanford university’s behavior design lab told you this guys it’s just super rockstar. He continues research evidence-based studies in psychology, neuroscience, habit, change leadership and peak performance. And he is giving you a totally free digital copy of his book. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com.

 

This is episode number 208, and a link to download his book will be found in the show notes. So if you are really ready to make a change that is going to stick and your business and your work and your relationships so good. You guys let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Alrighty. You guys, I’m so happy to be joined by Eric partaker here today,

 

and we’re talking to all about peak performance, peak performance, usually in the past, have you been listening to the show for a long time? We talk about peak performance with extreme and adventure sports. And as that relates to the company you’re building basically. So you can have more time to take off and play with your extreme inexpensive venture sports. But today we’re really talking about peak performance that comes before that something that is not discussed often enough in the entrepreneur space.

 

And that’s about really performing at your highest level all the way across the board, so that you have an opportunity to reap all those benefits and rewards. And Eric is in the house today, talking all about his new book and how you guys can get to this state of becoming a peak performer and doing this in your business. You can do it in your life.

 

Eric. Welcome. Thank you so much for taking the time to join us here on the Sweetlife podcast. Super glad to have you tell everybody a little bit about yourself. Yeah, thanks April. And thanks everyone for taking the time to listen. Yeah, I’ve, I’ve been obsessed with peak performance for over two decades, but well, first, definitely in the wrong way.

 

And then in a, in a much better way. So about 10 years ago, it was all, you know, work. It was hustle mentality, and that’s how I was for the whole first half of my career. You know, so a hundred plus hour work weeks at McKinsey and company and helping build up Skype before we sold it to eBay,

 

few of my own businesses. And you know, I’m on a plane. Start to feel unwell, Dr. On-board rushes over, takes my vital signs and says, we need to land the plane immediately. I think he’s having a heart attack 10 years ago, playing emergency lens, where to a small town in France, the runway shut down. They take me off into a waiting ambulance where they administer nitrates to open up the arteries and increase the blood flow to the heart.

 

And as the ambulance sped off to the local hospital, I looked up to the eyes of the French paramedic looking down at me and I said, please don’t let me die. I have a five-year-old son. I didn’t say, please don’t let me die. I need to clear my inbox. And you know, my point there is that as entrepreneurs we’re so into the hustle,

 

we’re so into, you know, what, what do we got to do next? And, and it can all go at any moment at any time. And what I said in that moment, it really truly changed my life because the next morning I woke up and I thought, you know, all of my success to date at that point had come at the price of my health and relationships.

 

I almost lost my life. And then the very first words out of my mouth had nothing to do even with my own life. But, you know, with my boy at the time, right, my two boys now, but at the time, my, my only son and then that just struck me as, okay, that’s the three legged stool.

 

That’s what peak performance means. You know, we need to perform at a peak level across our health, our wealth, our work as a wealth driver and our relationships. And when I say peak performance, I’m not meaning turning. Yeah, I don’t, I don’t mean like in a turn a person into a Ferrari, you know, I mean, close the gap between your current and best self across all the areas of life that matter most,

 

you know, on the health, you know, work and home front. That’s the mission that I’m on now that I’ve been on for the last 10 years. And my book, the three alarms is, is about that mission. And it’s about how I’ve, codafide it as if you want to reach your best on the health, wealth and relationship fronts,

 

you need to do it through IPA, like the beer, but better for you and the IPA standing for identity productivity and antifragility. Yeah. And thank you so much for sharing your story. You guys watch the videos of these, you know, any sort of story like that. I’m here, like tearing up behind the scenes, but I understand that there are so many people that are on their way to hit that point without what you’re talking about in this book and,

 

you know, praise God, you were able to come back and figure it out and, you know, share it with the rest of us and really be able to leverage this to the next level and come in here and step in and help entrepreneurs. And so this is a perfect episode before we were recording. I was thinking, I wonder, are we going to air this?

 

And this is a perfect one to kick off 2021, because some of the things that you’re talking about, you know, we all want 20, 21 to be different than 2020. And it wouldn’t be nice if we just woke up and the whole entire world that was glittering on January 1st and everything was perfect again. And, and, and it’s okay to want those things.

 

But what we know is that we need to have a plan regardless of what comes about. And that’s what you talk about here in your book. And I love that now you have worked with really high level executives and entrepreneurs and your work in the past and getting people results in this. And it has really been extraordinary. And so I’m super excited to dig into what we’re talking about on today’s show.

 

So you say how to become a peak performer with IPA identity productivity, and antifragility, let’s go ahead. Can you dive in a little bit, and let’s kind of dissect each one of these things. So our listeners have an idea of some immediate actions and some areas in their life that they can, you know, rebalance or correct, or take a look at and,

 

and make some adjustments. Can we dive into IPA and the identity first? Yeah, let’s do it all. Talk about each and a practical tool. And the book of, I give loads of practical tools, but we just give like one quick win takeaway for each, each section. And let’s go ahead and say this too. If I can just interrupt.

 

You also said, all of our listeners are going to get a free digital copy of your book and we will make sure that is a huge gift you guys, and we’ll make sure that the link to that is in the show notes for this show@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero eight. So yeah. So let’s go ahead and dive in. Yeah. Cool. And,

 

and I just want to step back just super quickly once again, and say, you know, 20, 20, it was a challenging year. And part of what I’m trying to do with getting the message out around this book is to have it perfectly timed with making 20, 21, a rebound year making 20, 21 the year where you stepped back up to the plate,

 

right? Where you take things back up a level and you kind of dust things off and you say, all right, let’s go again. And IPA is the path forward. And, and one other thing to remember, my definition of peak performance is not turning you into a Ferrari. None of this is about achieving perfection. This is just about you showing up as your best self in the areas of life that matter most.

 

This is about you kind of gaining entry to what Abraham Maslow estimated was the 2% of people in the world who realize their full potential. So IPA for me is about gaining entry to that 2% club. So identity, identity, why don’t we start with identity? So the why here is because we cannot become a better version of ourselves now and going forward,

 

if we continue to be the person that we’ve always been, that doesn’t line up. So what got you here? Won’t get you there. You need to make a change. And entrepreneurs leaders, CEOs are very intentional when it comes to work, they get it. They know that I need to have envisioned. I need to model myself after that vision,

 

but they don’t bring that same intentionality often to their health and home, or you know, their, their health and relationships. So what I talk about in the book, the three alarms is how I decided, okay, what is the best version of me look like on each of those fronts? And that’s what I’d like everyone listening to do right now.

 

Just ha have a thing. If you were to give the best version of you, you at your best, a name on the health front, what would it be if you were to give the best version of you, a name or a phrase or a persona on the work front, what would it be? And if you were to do the same on the relationship or the home front,

 

what would it be? So I gave an example of what I’ve done with myself. So on the health front, it’s not me who goes to the gym in the morning, I’m a world fitness champion. That’s who goes to the gym in the morning. That’s the person who walks through the door. And when I’m in on, in a particular exercise and I get to the eighth rep,

 

and I’m not sure if I’m going to get to the 10th, a little voice goes off in my head and says, of course you will, because you’re a world fitness champion. And that’s all being driven by identity because behavior follows identity. When I take a Spider-Man costume and I put it on my seven-year-old Leo, I do not need to teach Leo what to do next.

 

He doesn’t need to go through Spider-Man training camp. I put the Spider-Man costume on and he starts shooting webs from his wrist, jumping around, making funny noises. Right? So what it really, all I’m trying to do here is to get everyone listening to, you know, remember that you’ve already done this. You did it as a kid. You picked an identity,

 

maybe when you were playing, you changed into that and it changed your behavior. Same concept. You’re just remembering back to something you used to do. Every time I go to the gym now I’m wonder woman, perfect world fitness champion. Now I have that on my phone as an alarm at 6:30 AM, I’ve changed the name of the alarm. And it says world fitness champion to prompt that intentionality.

 

Okay, because I’ve segmented my day into three parts and I’ve chosen basically a best self identity that will power each of the segments. And so 6:30 AM world fitness champion goes off. The next alarm on my phone goes off at 9:00 AM and it says, world’s best coach, am I the world’s best at all of these things? Of course not. But that’s the version of me.

 

That’s going to start the Workday. How does that version of me show up and behave in the world? You know, how decisive inspiring and reliable will I be for my clients? If I’m coming from the vantage point of the world’s best coach versus just Eric and at 6:30 PM, the game-changing alarm for me, we’re all different for me. This is a game changer.

 

It goes off and it says world’s best husband and father to prompt the, how would the world’s best husband and father walked through that door right now? That’s the power of intentionality, right? So I’ve chosen, what does best look like on the three areas of life that matter? Most, I queue it at a particular time of day, that would most benefit from being powered by that best self identity.

 

And I get three massive benefits. It brings intentionality into the day. It brings wise counsel, you know, into a moment, you know, okay, what should I say in response to this person? What should I do next? Well, what would the world’s best husband and father do? And number three, it prompts, reflection, because if I do lose my cool with my seven year old,

 

for example, I’m not perfect then because I had something so high to measure against, I feel like a real jerk afterwards. Right. And that’s good because that’s making the gap painfully obvious and it means that I get better and better at closing it. So that’s the identity piece I’m taking course millions of notes here. I’ve already named all of my different sections of my day and who I am.

 

So I just I’m appreciating this and eating it up. I’m a sponge here, loving this information. I love that identity too. And it’s so true. Like when along the lines did we forget who we believe that we are rather than, you know, what the world tells us. And so, and I, and I love that. And you’re so right about the fact that as entrepreneurs,

 

we are so apt to believe that before in our business, but maybe not so much in our health and our personal lives, those things for sure are not the same. Maybe it’s because money doesn’t drive it. And it’s not because they aren’t as important to us. Well, maybe the health at first, you know, so I think this is super awesome.

 

Loving this so far. So let’s talk about productivity, the identities, EEI, and in IPA, what do you do and what do you recommend as far as productivity and how does that, why did you choose productivity as part of your methodology for obtaining people? Yeah. Great question. So, okay. So context then, you know, setting. So first we start with,

 

well, who is it that we want to be? That’s the identity piece. So now we’re operating from the vantage point of our best self and the three areas of life that matter most. So what do we do now to make progress? Because we’re just awesome, but we’re standing still, right? And we need to progress. We need to climb the mountain now.

 

Right? And so we do that through action. So that’s why we talk about productivity because knowledge isn’t power anymore. These days I can Google anything and be knowledgeable about it. Within seconds. Knowledge is not where the game is played. It’s about taking consistent persistent deliberate action. That’s where the game is played. And that’s why we need to optimize ourselves for productivity,

 

because we don’t want to just be taking any action. We want to take the right action and most efficiently, so smart. So there’s loads I go into in the book and productivity. I actually, it’s a big thing that, although the IPA acronym is it’s only three letters I had to do productivity planning and productivity execution, because it’s about, you know,

 

plan, execute, plan execute. Right. Right. And I think before you go into it, you’re an expert in this. Did you realize that I know a lot of entrepreneurs that have the best laid plans, but then zero ability to execute. Is that why in your experience of dealing this, you know, entrepreneurs, we can think of these,

 

Oh, this is going to be the plan. We can even set the plan, lay the plan out the steps of the plan, reverse engineer, the plan, Gantt chart, the plan, whatever it is, but then actually doing it tends to be a lot harder. So is that because we all struggle in this? Yeah. Yeah. Well,

 

I was a chronic over planner. I would just plan, plan, plan, plan, plan. The other thing though, too, that I noticed with myself was that I was also a world-class procrastinator and may have something to do with the entrepreneurial mindset because of our tendency to dream and to, you know, think about, you know, big opportunities and the next big thing,

 

it’s almost like this, you know, proneness for distraction, right. Or at least it was for me. And so I had to transform myself from a chronic procrastinator to a super producer. And, you know, we won’t have time to go into all the productivity tools, but I want to drive home. One in particular that I think is mind blowing.

 

So the average person loses and this, this data, I first picked up, by the way from the book, the one thing, the average person under observation loses 28% of their Workday to multitasking and effectiveness. So the person thinks that they’re multitasking in an efficient way, but what they’re really doing is they’re doing what’s called task switching, going from one thing to the next,

 

very, very rapidly. And that leads to a 28% loss in the day, because rather than sticking with one thing, they’re jumping around. So when they get back to the thing that they originally intended to work on, they’ve lost their place. They have to retrace their steps at the regain, their momentum, all of this leads to lost time, 28% loss of a day.

 

Now the book just leaves the stat right there. And I thought, hang on a second. This is like not doing that stat justice. So I took that number and I said, well, let’s generously take off six weeks for vacation in a year. So let’s do 28% loss against 46 work weeks. That means that the average person is losing 13 weeks a year,

 

which is an entire calendar quarter. So of course you don’t feel productive. Of course you don’t feel like there’s not enough time for everything you’ve lost a whole quarter every year Because you aren’t productive. And because you would have lost all that time. I mean, you’re playing a game of basketball and you’re going against the competition. You get to the end of the third quarter and then news to you.

 

Somebody says, Oh, by the way, we’ve got to tell you, but you and the rest of your team had to sit out the fourth quarter. You’re like, huh. And you’re like, well, how do we even have a chance of winning then? And they’re like, Oh we don’t. Yeah. It’s. So if we extrapolate that across a 40 year career,

 

that means that the average person loses an entire decade. What could you do with an extra decade? That’s like two more careers potentially. Wow. So what’s the problem here? The problem is people just jumping around too much throughout the day that in their phone disturbed their, their focus and the concentration, having too many browser tabs, open notifications coming in left,

 

right and center all of these lures to kind of guide us off our path for peak performance, our path for realizing our full potential that’s the issue. And so what we have to combat all of that with is developing the power of single tasking, which is a bit of a lost art, especially nowadays with smartphones angle tasking is nothing more than making sure you stick with what you’re working on for a good chunk of time.

 

At least 30 minutes provided there’s 30 minutes of work to do. I like to shoot for, you know, 30 minute chunks throughout my day. And then I take a break after 30 minutes. And the way you can develop the habit of single tasking is by becoming a lawyer for a few weeks. And what I mean, what I read is that lawyers timesheet their days because otherwise they don’t know where to assign the client time.

 

And when I thought about that, I thought, well, if a lawyer can do this every single day as part of their career, then I could certainly should be able to manage it for like, you know, few weeks. So all I did was I had four columns activity start time, end time, total minutes. And I literally recorded every single task I did from the time I woke up to the time I went to bed kind of before and after work,

 

I was more like grouping stuff together. You know, it’s like getting ready for example. But once I started the Workday, it was everything. So working on presentation nine to nine, 13, nine, 13 to nine 17, LinkedIn nine and 17 to nine 20, you know, Google search nine 20 to nine 23, reheated coffee and check Twitter.

 

And the alarming thing that it revealed was just how much task switching was going on. On the first day that I did this, I had 77 entries in my Workday. Wow. As I was bouncing around unknowingly from one thing to the next. So when you do this, it does two things. One, it raises an unprecedented level of awareness in you in terms of where is my time actually going and how often,

 

you know, am I switching and bouncing around? And then two, it starts to become kind of painful when you have two for the third time, for example, on a day, right. Facebook 20. Right, Right, right. It’s really eye-opening. And I could see how that would be incredibly. Eye-opening really, really fast. And gosh,

 

I mean, I just think that there is so much last time, by the way, the one thing is one of my favorite books of all time. And we’ll make sure that the notes to that book as well are in the show notes for this show. And I think that one of the things that you’re saying here was really, really interesting, the art of single tasking.

 

So when we single task and chunk our time and block calendar, a block and tackle and do those things, how fast and how much more of an increased you see in productivity in your clients that you have do that. I mean, is that like instant results that they’re seeing when they actually change these are, what are your case studies working with clients who have,

 

who’ve really tried to apply this. Yeah, that’s a great question. So we’re not machines, we’re not robots. And so what that means is that we can’t actually reclaim the entire 28% and then that may lead you to believe that, okay. So then I can’t actually get the full quarter back. That’s actually not true because when you start to develop your ability to focus,

 

it also speeds up your output for the 72%. That wasn’t an issue anyway. Right. So what I see is, well, beyond then the 28% capture, it’s almost like people are becoming twice as productive as they previously were and that’s life changing, right? Because you’re producing more with the time you have. And that suddenly gives you the time that you are yearning for when it comes to your health and your relationships.

 

And yeah, it’s been life-changing for me to personally, because I just work, you know, with an extreme sense of focus I’m intensely on and then intensely off. And there’s no real anxiety during my Workday. There’s so much to be said to this. Like you were saying, I mean, it’s, you guys are just going to be super excited when you get a chance to experience Eric’s book with that being said again,

 

there’s so many things we could talk about, but moving on to the anti-fragility, let’s talk about that and why that is so important. We were talking about it a little bit behind the scenes before we started recording. What exactly is that to our listeners who are just wondering, I don’t even know how to define that necessarily in my life. Yeah. Okay.

 

So let’s play a game. Let’s say that you are a shipping container, you know, and my question would be, well, what does the container or the crate, you know, say on the side, if you’re that crate, what’s your label, is it fragile? And then that means you get hit a couple of times you break. And then my question to you would be,

 

well, what’s the opposite of being fragile. And then you’ll say probably something like robust, you know, or strong, robust, and strong synonyms, you know? So that just means that, okay, I can kick you a few more times and eventually you break and then you might say, no, no, no, no, no, no,

 

no, no, no. I’m resilient. Okay. Well, by definition, that means that we can keep hitting you and you’ll absorb the shock and you’ll stay the same. It’s like, Oh, okay, well that’s pretty good. Enter antifragile. The more we kick you, the stronger the crate becomes, wow. That’s where we want to be.

 

Now people, when they first hear this say, okay, wishful thinking, that’s like, you know something in a Marvel movie, that’s, that’s not reality, but then you’re dead wrong because every single person, your body is a perfect temple for anti-fragility. You stress a muscle and it causes it to grow. You expose the body to germs and bacteria.

 

It builds the immune system. You expose tissues to, you know, small doses of, you know, ultra by light. And it actually generates vitamin D you’re already, anti-fragile physiologically your body’s already doing it without you even realizing it. So it’s hard coded in your DNA. You just need to get what’s happening in your body, up into your head.

 

And so anti-fragility is about realizing that the gym, where you go and you train doesn’t need to just be there in the gym. You can turn life into one massive training camp. So every moment of adversity, challenge, frustration, disappointment thing, that doesn’t go your way. It’s nothing more than a personal trainer in the gym of life, walking up to you and saying,

 

Hey, here’s a Dumbo. Do you want to curl it? And you can either grab the dumbbell, curl it, complete the repetition and grow stronger as a result. Or you can wimp out and walk out of the gym. So it’s up to you. And the antifragile mentality says, yeah, I’ll take that dumbbell. Yeah. And if you’re in an argument with somebody,

 

for example, and now they escalate the argument, all that’s happening there is that they’re saying here here’s a heavier Dumbo and you could walk away or you could stay there and you can curl it with your best self. So loads of different ways of building this mentally, you know, anti-fragility, you know, that I cover in the book, but probably the most powerful,

 

I mean, there’s so I have so many favorites, so hard to choose. Okay, I’ll go with this one. If you can embrace this, just this, if you forget everything else I’ve just said, and if you just embrace this one thing, even if you forget to pick up the free digital copy of the book, that’s fine, but just don’t miss this point.

 

And that’s in 2021. Do you want to remain amateur in life or do you want to turn pro let’s start with an amateur. So the first half of my career, I let an amateur existence by that I made feeling for me, preceded action. I needed feel like doing things in order to do them. So feeling generated action. That’s how an amateur lives their life.

 

And the amateur will get amateur. Results a pro knows that it’s action that generates feeling the equation is literally flipped, which means they don’t need to feel like doing something in order to take action. They take action, whether they feel like it or not. And in fact, when you really upgrade this kind of way of being or mentality, the less you feel like doing something,

 

the more discomfort it presents you, the more you step into it, the more you say it’s there for in that direction. I must step, you know, it’s sorta like elite warriors are trained to run towards the sound of gunfire, not a way. Right? And so turning pro versus remaining an amateur, what do you want 20, 21 to be?

 

And where have you been an amateur in life? And where can you develop a professional mentality and know that action generates feelings, not the other way around. Wow. Eric, I’ve never heard it explained as well as you just explained that there, thank you so much. I mean, that was just, I mean, the anti-fragility part in one of the things you said,

 

let me look back at my notes here. So I have it, is that the resilience you bounce off and stay the same. And so many you hear that talked about so often like, Oh my gosh, well, you need to be resilient and just bounce around and just pop off this. But what we’re talking about is, yeah, resilience keeps you exactly where you were before you don’t go forward.

 

You don’t go backwards. You just bounce off and you remain the same in the way that you’ve just explained that with actually changing with actually becoming stronger from each one of the blows, the pushes, the drops, whatever it is super amazing. And I love everything that you said, and I know our listeners are just really going to get a ton out of this.

 

Not only that that’s so generous of you to give away a digital copy of your book and for your time here on the show, this is the perfect show. So Jeff Goins introduced us. Thank you, Jeff, for bringing Eric here on the show. Jeff was a guest on the show. Oh my gosh. Like almost four years ago now in the very beginning,

 

when we first launched and he was right on about you being perfect for our audience and your message that you wanted to share. And I’m so glad that you’re here and this is exactly what we were looking for for honestly, for me personally, to kick off 2021, you know, we have guests on the show. I learned so much from you and really wanting to find somebody that was saying exactly what I selfishly personally needed to hear right now is an entrepreneur and a mother and a leader.

 

And what I would consider was a peak performer up until 2020. And now I just feel like I have been resilient and I have not necessarily gotten stronger through this. And so I will look at myself very, very closely after today’s episode. And I’m super excited to dive in more to the work that you’re doing and really appreciate your time on this show.

 

And so tell everybody how they find you. I’m really into reading print copies. I love holding a book in my hands, how they can experience your work, where you hang out when you are being incredibly focused and hanging out online, not all the time and how they can work with you when they’re ready to really take their business and their life to the next level.

 

Yeah. I just have to say April that, you know, when you say, wow, I really needed this personally. Hey, me too. You know, the reason that I’ve done all of this is not because I wasn’t born thinking this way. I had to become an expert about all this stuff because I really needed it. I needed to become anti-fragile.

 

I needed to become more productive. I needed to start living more intentionally. So we’re all on the same boat on that. So I just wanted to say that. So, okay. The book, if you like print copies of the book, please head over to Amazon, amazon.com, amazon.co.uk. I’m based here in the, in London, in the United Kingdom,

 

but either Amazon will have the book. If you head over to my website at Erik, Erik with a C Eric partaker, just like it sounds partaker.com got a free digital copy of the book waiting for you there. And I have some free three-part video training with worksheets as well, waiting for you there that will help you further embed some of the concepts in the book I’m coming out with an entire video course that I’m filming actually this week,

 

like over 40 different modules, all about IPA, which will be available on the website by the time this airs. And then if you’re listening and you’re like, look, I think I benefit from even just a chat, a single kind of peak performance insight session, which, which I run, you know, on a free basis with people, or if you’re like,

 

I need a coach or any of that, then just get in touch via the website. And, you know, we can have a chat, basically. I’m looking after, at the moment, 24 CEOs, entrepreneurs, other coaches, and they’re running everything from billion dollar businesses down to pre-revenue, you know, they’re just getting their funds raised to start their business,

 

but they all share the same quest. They want to close the gap between their current and best self. They want to reach their full potential and they want to do it. Multidimensionally and then, you know, my email, Eric, Eric partaker.com. So there you go, Thank you so much and we’ll make sure all those links are in the show notes.

 

And thank you so much for your time. I am super stoked to kick off 2021 with you, Eric and great to be connected with you. Thank you.<inaudible> Right. And that is a wrap for episode number 208 here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. You can find all of the show notes and the digital copy of the book that Eric’s promised you here on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

simply click on podcast. And this is episode number 208. And for those of you guys that are really ready to kick off this year with a bang, make sure to join us for commitment week 2021. It is coming up on January the 11th, totally free to join, and we are going to be covering five different aspects to reset and refocus your business for 2021.

 

It’ll take less than seven minutes a day. You guys it’s insane. We’ll go ahead and leave the link to join commitment week 2021, as well as the link to download Eric’s book in the show notes, or you can also just simply join commitment week by visiting Sweetlife coat.com forward slash commitment dash week dash 2021. Right? You guys be awesome. Can’t wait to talk to you next week.

 

Bye bye. For now

Episode 207: Plan Your 2021 Business Strategy In These 5 Key Areas – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join Commitment Week 2021 – free – download the action planner and join the livestreams. Massive results in only 15 minutes per day. 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

Entrepreneurs, Experts and small business owners who want a plan, need to nail it and value focused support to make it happen. In this quick episode I’m sharing the 5 key areas you’ll want to create a strategic plan for in 2021 plus share easy steps to reverse-engineer your plan to make it happen.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Start to get hyper-focused in 5 key areas for 2021
  2. Have a clearer picture of what areas may need more work
  3. Have a proven plan to reverse engineer your goals

Resources Mentioned:

Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate guys on welcome to episode number 207 here on the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, founder of the suite life company and host here at the Sweetlife podcast. So many exciting things are happening,

 

but first of all, happy new year to you. Thanks for tuning in and hanging out with me here. I appreciate you so much, you know, four years of podcasting and delivering business trainings and strategies that you guys can take to the bank. And we just appreciate so much you sharing the show, continuing to hit subscribe on your downloads on your app,

 

and just really being a part of what has shaped the growth of this show. And we’ll continue to do that as we move into 2021 and beyond if you are new and we haven’t hung out before, again, I’m April. It’s super great to meet you. My DMS are always open. I love connecting with new listeners. You can connect with me directly and join one of our new chat rooms over on clubhouse.

 

Very excited to be there. A lot of really awesome things we have planned for you in 2021 that are going to be happening on clubhouse. If you have the new clubhouse social media app, follow me at April beach, otherwise connect with me over on Instagram at April beach life. And of course at Sweetlife podcast and just shoot me a DM. Let me know if your first time tuning into the show and definitely start a conversation,

 

chat with you and hear more about your business. So on today’s episode, like I said, this is number 207. We’re talking about how to plan and focus your 2021 business strategy. And this show goes hand in hand with our fifth annual entrepreneur commitment week commitment week is coming January 11th. It’s five days of taking action, doing some live streams together real quick in the morning.

 

It only takes about 12 minutes a day, but we’re going to be diving in together in live streams on how to take action on the topics, even in more depth than we can cover on today’s show. So if you want to join commitment week, if you want to download the planner, it is so much fun. It is like a reset challenge,

 

almost like a detox power up challenge for your business. And again, it’s only five days. You can join us free and download the action planner by visiting Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 207. All of the show notes are found in there. And of course I’ll be going live in our chat rooms, both on clubhouse and LinkedIn live to talk about commitment week as well.

 

I would love to have you pipe in and share your expertise with the community and really just how you’re resetting your business and focusing it for the year. So certainly a lot of opportunities for you to reset your own business and pour into others and help them do the same when you join our live stream. So thanks so much for tuning in and hanging out with me.

 

I can’t wait to talk to you on today’s show. This is what you can expect. At the end of this episode, you are going to start getting hyper-focused and the five key areas that you need to have a plan of action and reverse engineer it for your business for 2021. You’re also going to have a clearer picture of what areas definitely might need more work.

 

So we’re going to go through them. And if you weren’t aware already, it’s really going to help you figure out what stands out like a sore thumb. That’s going to be a bottleneck that if you don’t have this area fixed, then it’s going to affect everything else. And I’m going to give you with the downloadable action planner. That is the free bonus with this episode,

 

the ability to reverse engineer your goals, and actually ask you strategic questions. If you have, maybe you’re too close to some of the core areas and you can’t really step away and create your own action plan. Well, that’s what I’m here for. So you are going to have a proven plan to reverse engineer your goals. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode.<inaudible> Anyways.

 

So it’s a new year, so let’s get focused on the key areas for 2021 that will make or break your business. And big goals are super awesome, but action happens when we chunk goals into bite pieces. And then by doing this, it allows you to get implementation in place clarity and take focused action and where really, really counts. And so today we are talking about the five core areas to make a plan for in 2021,

 

we’re talking high level year, but I am going to give you some tips and strategies in order to actually implement this and really see clearer. And so every year when we do this commitment, we usually pick the five core areas that are going to be trending, or the biggest problem for businesses that we have seen over the past year. This year, it’s really important to pay attention to the order of the areas we’re focusing on because each one affects the other.

 

So the five core areas that we are focusing on are number one, your overall business strategy and plan. Number two, your offer strategy in plan, number three, your business model, number four, your marketing and number five, your money. So let’s go ahead and dive into each one. And I’m just going to jam on each one for a minute here,

 

have your wheels spinning and then help you get a plan to reverse engineer each. So the very first step to do with any type of plan in each one of these areas is to actually reverse engineer the goals that you would like to see. So let’s just first talk about the steps to reverse engender goals. The first one is to actually, this is really piece of paper and a pen.

 

It’s all in this action planner I have here for you, but I want to talk you through it as well. If you’re in the car, cooking dinner, making holiday cookies or whatever it is. So the first thing is to actually write today’s date on the top line on a piece of paper. And then at the very bottom, that piece of paper,

 

you want to write down the date in which you want to accomplish a specific focus. Again, we’re talking about five different focus areas on today’s show. So at the top, you write down today’s date on the bottom line on this paper, you say, okay, I want this goal or this plan in action or place by this date. And then what you do is you literally reverse engineer it starting from the bottom.

 

You say, okay, in order to accomplish this, this what needs to happen first. And then that becomes a line above the bottom line. And then in order for that, to what happened, what has to happen next? And that becomes a line. And so you’re actually moving along the paper from the bottom to the, once you identify the steps that need to be happen in sequential order,

 

and you might need to move some around. You’re not going to nail it the first time as your brain is processing through. But once you identify the steps and you can go ahead and tag dates to those steps and there you have your implementation plan for each one of the core areas we’re talking about. So the very first one let’s go and dive into together.

 

The first core area that you need to set a strategic plan for in 2021 is your overall business plan. So answer these questions for yourself. What is your biggest business goal this year? What do you want that to look like? What is this overall business model going to look like? And your business model is again, your suite of offers, how you work with people,

 

how you serve people, how you make money. So want you to actually lay out exactly what do I want to be launching selling? What is the collage? If you will of offers that my company is going to be delivering in 2021, and we’re going to step into each one of those specifically here. When we talk about step number two, but this is just step number one,

 

without creating the full entire plan. You’re not going to have clarity on how you need to reverse engineer to get there. So for example, if you plan to monetize your speaking career by fall of 2021, and you also want to perhaps work with clients one-on-one, and maybe you want to launch an online course, that is your sweet spot offers. So the first area that you should be setting a plan for and focusing in 2021 is that big overall business model,

 

that big overall business picture, without it, nothing else matters. Even if you’re sitting here thinking to yourself, Oh my gosh, this is like, not really sure. You know, so pie in the sky guy, you’re never going to get there. Even if you are only a fraction of the way, unless you map out where there is. So step number one,

 

focus area, number one, which also happens be day. Number one of our live streams commitment week, starting in January 11th. I want you to really think about what is my overall business model. What is my overall business plan? What are my suite of offers? What do I want that to look like? And just from one business owner to another,

 

and frankly, one mother to another parent, if you guys have kids, if you’re listening, how you serve clients and your business model will affect your life. So, as you’re thinking about this also strategically, think about what you want your lifestyle to look like in 2021, what you want your week to week to look like in 2021, how much time you want to just spending with clients and really what that overall picture looks like.

 

All right, core focus area. And number two, you should be focusing on is your signature offer or program I geek out on signature offers. It’s one of my zone of genius areas is teaching you guys how to extract all of your ideas and expertise and assets out of your beautiful, fabulous mind and business and turning it into a signature offer. So we talk about signature offers a lot here on this show.

 

Your signature offer can be a course. It can be a high level coaching package. It can be a hybrid business model, which most signature offers we are working with businesses to develop. Now our custom hybrid business models. It could be a mastermind. It could be a membership community. There are so many different types of signature offers and what I want you to know,

 

and I’m not going to go out a whole signature for a tangent on this show. We are going to jam about it on the live streams and commitment week though. But I want you to know that a signature offer doesn’t necessarily mean you just slap a ribbon on it and say, well, this is our signature offer. A signature offer is actually a way that you highlight your expertise,

 

your methodology, and it’s one that you can count on to get people amazing, insane, predictable transformational results. Your signature offers basically what you want to be known for. And so your company might have, like we talked about in step number one, a suite of offers, meaning a variety of different ways that you serve clients, different services or digital products and even in-person services.

 

But what is the one thing that you want to be known for in what does that look like as far as creating that offer? So step number two is really figuring out what your primary 2021 signature offer will be. And what are you committing to launch or build or sell in the first 90 to 120, 120 days of 2021. And the next thing that you want to make sure of is will this signature offer hit your profit goal that you have for the year?

 

And we’re going to talk about money here in just a minute, but right now in step number two, I want you to focus in on really, what is that signature offer? What do you want to be known for? And how does that align with your overall suite of offers? All right. Okay. Let’s keep going again. Shoot me a DM anytime or join our live rooms on clubhouse or on LinkedIn.

 

If you have any questions about this, please make sure you join me in commitment week. Because again, it’s so much fun and I’m in there live answering your questions about these, helping you make this plan. So step number three is your actual business model. So your business model is now we’re taking that signature offer and we’re, we’re honing it in even more.

 

If it is a high-end coaching package, how often are you going to be in a meeting with people? How frequently do you actually deliver those meetings? What does it look like? Are you doing them a zoom? Are they in person? Do you have a local business? Which hopefully things will really start opening up here in 2021 or is it all online?

 

So how does that really look like when you work with clients and when you deliver them your services? So step number three is making these strategic plan to nail your business model for your signature offer in 2021. And then here’s some challenge questions I have for you. First of all, does your business model give you the life you want in 2021 will be that also be the life you want possibly beyond 2021.

 

And then when do you plan to actually watch this type of business model? Again, it’s examples of business models are courses, membership, communities, one-on-one coaching, one-on-one service done for you services done with you services, you know, really high end consulting, strategies, groups, masterminds, business model, his business model, his business model. It basically means you pick what works for you and what is an of course,

 

going to give your clients really incredible results. So for the third step, you need to create a strategic plan to nail your business model. It could be just sitting down in one day and figuring out what you want that to look great. If that’s how fast it is, get it done. All right, step number four is actually going through now and creating your influencer marketing plan.

 

And this is really important. This is not implementing the marketing. This is focusing in on creating what this plan will look like for you. Now, the difference between just a regular marketing plan and what we’re focusing on this year and influencer marketing plan, first of all, it doesn’t mean you need to have hundreds of thousands of followers. The coolest people I know on Instagram have like 800 followers.

 

So don’t let that fool you. That is such a lie. And most people actually buy their followers. So influencer does not mean a massive amount of people. It means there are groups of people that trust you for your advice, for your expertise and your opinion, your leadership influences them. And the reason why it’s important to create an influencer marketing plan is because those are the people that you really want.

 

You don’t want the masses following your business. You want people that know like, and trust you. And that value what you have to say, and that are willing to take the time to connect with you, learn about your business and share your company with others. And so in order to do that, creating an influencer marketing plan really starts with building relationships.

 

So the first thing in this step, number four, or what will be day, number four in our live commitment we challenge we’re doing is to decide what level of influence you want and need to have in your particular niche to achieve your business vision. So how much influence do you need to have? How frequently do you need to connect with people? You know,

 

what does that really look like to develop those authentic relationships that you want people to have an associate with your brand and creating the influencer marketing strategy around making that happen? So day four, step number four is building your influencer marketing strategy. And then of course, the last day we are talking about money. We always want to talk about money. Entrepreneurs tend to,

 

we tend to be creatives and we love creating things and not actually being the manager type person and crunching the numbers. And it’s really important that you pay yourself. It’s really important that you’re on top of your money when you’re bringing in money, that you’re rewarding yourself for your hard work and your expertise in your investing, reinvesting in the right places of your company,

 

whether it’s teams or personal development, whatever that may look like for you, it’s time to get your money ducks in a row in 2021, if they haven’t been before. So things that you should be honing in on when you’re focusing on day five or step five of this focus and reset plan is how much money do you want your business to make in 2021?

 

How much do you want to make? And then how much do you want to pay yourself in 2021? And the next step is by reverse engineering. This, when do you want to reach this financial goal by, and technically speaking, you need to answer the money question in hand. That’s why we do it all together in this resetting and refocusing plan,

 

because you need to answer this question in hand with looking at your signature offers, which was the second step that we did. And looking at your overall plan. If you want to pay yourself $200,000, or let’s just say $100,000, if you’re a new business starting out, which is really the bottom line, that’s the first benchmark we really want to get you to in your new business,

 

ask yourself these questions. Do my offers, dictate that I am going to deliver those great of results that are going to be able to pay myself for this. So do my offers equal the value that I want to charge for them does my business model enable me to serve enough people to scale my company, to reach these financial benchmarks does my overall business plan.

 

So my suite of offers come together cumulatively to reach these financial benchmarks. If you get to the money day and you realize that what you’re offering, the combination of offers and the suite of offers, can’t get you to that goal. You need to go back and fix your offers. You need to go back and change your business plan. I will say,

 

just as a caution, many people get into a business model because you think you can scale and sell it to a lot of people. First, we need to also focus on building that audience for you. So there’s quite a few strategic things that I would love to dive into more and jam on and support you on again in our live streams and commitment week.

 

This is what we do together. You are welcome to join us for free. Just cruise over to the show notes. For this episode, you can go to sweet life podcast.com forward slash two zero seven in order to get the show notes and joint commitment week for free, or just really simply follow me on clubhouse at April beach, or follow me on LinkedIn.

 

If we aren’t already connected yet, and we’ll be posting the downloads and doing live streams on all of these. All right. So here is a quick recap today. We talked about resetting and refocusing your business for 2021. We talked about the five core areas that you should have a strategic plan for. Number one is your overall business plan. Number two is your offer or your signature offering.

 

Three is your business model four is your influencer marketing, and five is your money. And you can find all of the resources for this to implement it by again, visiting Sweetlife podcasts.com forward slash two zero seven. All of the resources we have for you also can be found@sweetlifeco.com. And thank you so much for tuning in with me. We nailed it. Now let’s go ahead and get you off to 2021.

 

I can’t wait to work with you. I can’t wait to continue to support you. We have some amazing guests coming on the show tomorrow. Next week, we have Eric partaker coming on the show and talk about resetting and refocusing and becoming like insanely productive. This guy is going to blow your socks off the things that he talks about on this show. I frankly have never heard another expert say before.

 

So definitely some revolutionary stuff that will rock your world. Make sure you’re tuning into episode two Oh eight with us next week. And again, shoot me a DM. Anytime if you have any questions at April beach life on Instagram or at April beach on clubhouse, and I will look forward to Happy new year. Bye bye guys.

Episode 206: 3 Tips To Put Family First As An Entrepreneur & Create More Time Freedom – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
 
Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 

Summary:

Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
 
In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time
  2. Know the power of messy days, how to schedule them and why you’ll love them
  3. Know more creative ways you can connect with your #1 team (family)

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 206 of the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, and Merry Christmas to those of you who are listening to this live and happy holidays to everybody, regardless of what you celebrate here,

 

we are celebrating family, and I just hope that this show reaches you and that you’re blessed by what we talk about today. Thank you so much for tuning in with us over the holidays. We’ve never missed an episode so far. And this year with all that’s happened in 2020 is no exception. And so today we are talking about three simple ways to put family first as an entrepreneur and create more time.

 

So whether you’re listening to this live and it is Christmas week here in 2020, or you’re listening to this down the road, everything we’re talking about is a proven business strategy that you’re going to be able to take to the bank and create more time in your life, whatever you want your life to look like. I know that many of you who’ve listened to this show for years.

 

You know, that half of the time my teenage boys are walking in and out of the door. On the other side of, of my office recording here, you know, with their friends or to the skate park, you know, wherever it is that you are doing life, we need to create a business model, a lifestyle around enabling that. And so this show fits really well into what we’re talking about right now with the holidays,

 

with, you know, really cherishing life. I think the one thing that for us, it was just such a hidden blessing that came out of 2020 is just really loving being together at home and cherishing time. The one thing that money can’t buy is a second of time. And so a lot of things we’re talking about here on the show we’ve been talking about for years,

 

but in this episode is all strategies to control time into a create as much time so that you are enabling family first in your business. This episode is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my start to scale up system. And so that’s phase one through five, whether you’re just thinking about starting a business, or you are a seasoned entrepreneur,

 

that’s making a huge impact this show. And what we’re talking about here applies to all of you guys who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. Because the reality is, is a growing a company and raising a family is a lot of work. And oftentimes we as entrepreneurs feel super maxed out right in that song, cats in the cradle,

 

I’d sing it to you, but I’ve a really terrible voice that song comes on and it’s like heartbreaking. And, and I was actually just listening to it last week with my boys. And one of my kids asked guys, you know, I love song, but what does it actually mean? And I was like, ah, you know, it’s about this dad that worked so hard that he never had time for his kid and he regretted it.

 

And it was like, Oh, that through the gut, I know we feel that as entrepreneurs. So that’s how we were talking about some strategies here on the show. At the end of this episode, this is what you’re going to know. So you are going to see how you can tweak your current business model right now to create more time like instantly right now,

 

as you’re listening to the show, we are going to talk about the power of messy days, how you can schedule them and why you will love messy days. And I’m going to share with you some behind the scenes about how I schedule these types of things. And you are going to know more creative ways that you can connect with your number one team,

 

which is your family. And if you don’t have kids in your listening to this show, this family, your family is your support system, your network, whatever that looks like to you, all of our lives are beautifully different. And so whatever that looks like to you, you’re going to be able to take the strategies that we talk about here on this episode and apply them right away to your business and for all the show notes and the resources we mentioned here in the show,

 

cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. Again, that Sweetlife co.com click on podcast. And this is episode number two, zero six. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s strategies. It’s going to be a real quick show cause it’s a holiday week, but really powerful. So stick with me.<inaudible> Step number one, in order to create more time in your business for family and lifestyle freedom,

 

we need to look at your business model. So your business model can either bury you or save you. So the first thing I want you to look at is really how you’re serving clients. How much of that time does that of your time, does that take within a week and understand the demands of delivering certain projects or services places on your time, energy and your ability to focus.

 

First of all, what do you do? Take a look at what you do. Just kind of picture your, your week and how you’re working with clients. Do you work with people? One-on-one do you work with people, one on group? How does that really look in your life? And right now I want you to assess that. And I want you to understand the time that’s required,

 

that you are spending currently working with your clients and take a look at this current business model that you have. What does that look like? How do you work with people? Is it one-on-one? Is it one on group? How frequently in the first thing you want to do is you want to ask yourself, you know, Hey, is this working for me or is the actual amount of time that I’m spending with my clients taking away time from family?

 

Now one might say, well, wow, isn’t that great? You know, you’re, you’re so busy. Your business is so busy. You have so many clients. Yes, that is true, but busy doesn’t equal. Good. So we’re going to give you some tips here to take a look at turning busy-ness into profit and time. And so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to ask yourself,

 

what can I change right now? So that would be, are you seeing clients five days a week? You and these are just some suggestions for you. Can you block and tackle your client days as an example, I only work with clients privately on Thursdays and Fridays. And I’ve shared this with you guys on the show before, and I’ll share with you again,

 

because I just get great feedback from this time. Number one, I think, I think best when I consolidate my work. So if I know that Thursdays and Fridays are, or my business coaching days, when I work with entrepreneurs and small businesses, then I get in that mindset and I know what I’m doing. I also then can look at my business model and I can say,

 

okay, all of these businesses are in this same type of need, this same type of area. And so now I’m going to create groups and I actually scale my business model and I always do this again, reassess it. So I have, if I have five clients that are in the same place and need the same things, I actually will offer a group strategy call for those clients.

 

It’s great for me, it’s great for them to network with other people and everybody gets the same results. So I want you to look at your business right now and ask yourself, can I number one block and tackle my days. And then within those days, what sort of smart scaling can I do for my business model? So can you create group offers?

 

Can you create some on-demand content that your clients or your customers might want to absorb, instead of saying the same thing to different people? One-on-one can you create maybe an online resource center for your clients to tap into some of your more, more frequently asked questions to help save some of that time or even create a course or an actual program for them to go through online.

 

Other strategies for you are creating maybe a membership committee, unity, or an online forum this year can be done with Slack or something easily with boxer, where you create a group of people that you want to connect with and you want to help them Connect with each other, but you don’t want to launch a full-blown membership site because that might not really work with your actual business model.

 

So those are some suggestions of things that you can look at right now in your business, so that you can say, Hey, listen, what can I actually change immediately? What can I actually group together to save my time? And what are the dates phase where I would like to serve my clients? Another reason I haven’t mentioned it here, but why I serve clients on Thursdays and Fridays is because of the entire beginning of my week is on business building content creation and actual strategy.

 

And so I take care of the business building inside in the beginning of my week, when my mind is fresh. For example, I’m recording this podcast episode on a Monday, usually record on Mondays or Tuesdays. When I know that I can put really powerful, highly impacting content. And then I take care of serving my clients because once I go in and I start immersing myself in my client’s businesses,

 

it fully takes over all my thought processes. So that’s one of the reasons why I serve clients towards the end of the week. And then I have that weekend break in between. So action item. Number one is take a look at your current business model. Can you group together the days that you serve your customers, serve your clients, and can you make some changes to how you’re serving your clients?

 

Creating group offers a membership community, or even just an online forum and really take a look at controlling instead of spreading yourself out throughout the week, consolidating your work into different types of work that you were doing at a time. That’s really strategy. Number one, within that same strategy. We talked about this a few episodes ago on the show within that same strategy,

 

you should be planning your year in advance. So planning what you’re selling when you’re selling it. So, you know, we have a big macro plan and then we have a micro plan week by week. So you really should be taking a look at what’s happening for the year to come. Regardless of when you’re listening to this episode, you can do this at any point in time and really know what you’re selling when you’re selling it and what demands that’s going to put on your life and your family,

 

okay. Strategy, or I should say, tip number two is my favorite. And I call it for the love of messy days. This is what a messy day is. A messy day is a day that I have scheduled in the middle of my week. My messy day is always Wednesday. And that day is a break between my strategy and my content creation at the beginning of the week.

 

And my client service at the end of the week, messy days are totally to be spontaneous. And this is an amazing thing. It’s especially amazing if you have teenagers like I do. So on my messy days, I really don’t schedule any client meetings, but this is the day I schedule like the kids’ teeth cleaning, or if I need to stop by the grocery store or any appointments like I would have for myself,

 

like going to get my eyelashes glued on or a haircut, all of those things are always scheduled on a Wednesday. This is also the day where I am completely able to be spontaneous with my kids. Do I have to get work done? Yes. I still work on messy days. So Wednesday is my favorite day to be this day. But it’s also the day that,

 

you know, if my kids just want to sit down and, and have a cup of coffee and hang out where I always don’t have somewhere to be, I always can make sure that that is in that day. And they literally throw the plan out the window again. Do you have a list of things you have to get done on messages? Yes.

 

Are they so regimented and scheduled? Not at all is one of the things I love doing with my kids on messy days is we have this taco wagon down the street and it’s just this amazing Mexican food that’s here in Lafayette, Colorado love taco wagon, and the kids will just be hungry. I’ll say, Hey, let’s, let’s go to taco wagon and grab some tacos and it’s super spontaneous and they love it.

 

We listen to music. We play music messy days are the days where I can just stop and walk out of my office and share songs with the kids and listening to what they’re listening to, or watch YouTube videos or sit down and play call of duty, which by the way I suck at on Xbox. But I try, you know, those are the things we do on messy days.

 

And so messy days are a day sometime in your week, if you can’t fit it in every single week, maybe plan and schedule a messy day every two weeks. And again, this is the time for you to know this is when you can fit in your haircuts teeth, cleaning, having to run an errand, maybe go to the post office. But it’s also the day where you can totally stop and have a cup of coffee with a friend who just might really need you call your aunt on the phone,

 

who you haven’t talked to in forever. And all those things that get scheduled out because the schedule is too regimented. Messy days is totally to not be regimented, but you will love it because you’ll actually get more work done in the other days. When you know, you have your messy day, wherever that may land in your week. And then the third tip I have for you is to really over communicate with your family over communicate with your team.

 

Again, whoever that is, it can be, you know, young, old, it can be your dog. You know, I used to communicate with my toddlers, my boys, when I was working from home and say, okay, you know, mommy really has a lot of work to do for the next two hours. But after that, we’ll sit down and we’ll watch Mickey mouse together or whatever.

 

And so as long as you’re over communicating, what’s about to happen with your team. Then everybody is going into that with open eyes and they understand how they can support you in that process. Again, it doesn’t matter if they’re three or if they’re 35, they all understand that. So some suggestions on how to over communicate with everybody, but in a way,

 

that’s not going to take you too much time because that’s would be against the point of this whole entire episode is number one. Every single Sunday night, just have a quick weekly powwow. We do this all the time. We go through the week, we look at our calendars, see what’s coming up and everybody’s just on the same page. It literally takes five minutes and that’s for a family of five to do,

 

but it helps to just communicate and what’s to come. It also helps us all mentally prepare for the week ahead and how we want to show up in that week. We also have a nightly pregame. And so a nightly pregame again, literally takes like one minute saying, okay, this is what the morning is going to look like. This is what I have today.

 

This is what you know, you have going on this next day. This is what this looks like for our family. Let’s again, have everybody be on the same page. It’s also the place where I can take a minute. If my kids need to talk about school or things they’re struggling with and help them strategize a plan to, you know, maybe make up some schoolwork,

 

which frankly has been a lot since everybody’s doing online school and it’s a freaking mess. I won’t go down that rabbit hole, but it’s a time for me to really connect with my boys and hear like, yeah, I just have this, I have this math test tomorrow. I have no clue what I’m doing and really be able to focus in on them.

 

And I know that they really appreciate this nightly pre-game as well. Couple of things we also do and we’ve done for years and years and years is we calendar share. We’ve also taught our boys how to add things to our family calendar. So we have one Gmail address where we manage all of our kid and family things. And so anytime one of our kids has something they want to do.

 

They want to ride to the skate park or they want to go sleep over with a friend or whatever it may be. My boys can add that event and share it to our family calendar. So without even talking, we all know what everybody wants and needs over a period of time. And so everybody’s on the same page without taking any time whatsoever. And you might be asking like,

 

okay, how do I do this? My kids are five. Well, of course this is age appropriate, but I will say that we started teaching our boys to add things to our family, shared Gmail calendar when they were as young as nine years old. So these kids can do anything with tech, right? So you would be very surprised at the wishes we receive on our family calendar.

 

And it’s really cool. That’s how our kids get to do things because it’s planned in a way that works for everybody. And then the last suggestion that I would have for you is a family chat or a family WhatsApp channel or family Voxer. If you’ve never tried any of that, those are all awesome places to create a group chat where everybody’s on the same page.

 

And you as the business owner can even just shoot, instead of calling this person and telling this person to pick up that person, you can just get on your boxer and just say, okay, you know, I’m running 10 minutes late from this meeting. We’re having chicken for dinner. I’ll see you soon, whatever it is that you need to say,

 

you can, you can put in a box or chat to your family. And it’s a really efficient way to actually create more time. Again, if your family is, is a roommate, if your family is, you know, your other business team, or if it’s friends, whoever your people are, these are three simple ways to put those people,

 

to put your family first as an entrepreneur and create more time in your business. And so here’s what we talked about today. We talked about how does your current business model and know how to group your days together and what you can tweak and scale and your business model right now, in order to create more time each week, we also talked about messy days,

 

why you need messy days, why you’ll love them, why your family will love your messy days and really why it just frankly, it’s going to make you think, wow, I’m so glad I’m an entrepreneur instead of wow, crap. This is way harder than I thought it would be. Is there ever going to be a light at the end of this,

 

you know, constant tunnel of demands, messy days, fix that, like in an instant. So if any of these things I can say, I love my messy days the most. And then the third thing is think of more creative ways to connect with your family, whether it’s calendar share or Voxer and different ways to communicate, whether it’s a weekly powwow or a nightly powwow.

 

We talked about that as well. I hope you found some of these suggestions helpful to you and your team, your people, all the people that love you. And you know what it’s really special to have people in your life that love you so much. They just want more of you and they need more of you. That’s a gift. And you know,

 

I know we’re also grateful for that. So it’s really important as small business owners that we take strategies like this business model, calendar share and more practical lifestyle strategies in order to create this time and in life freedom, I’m here to help. I’m here to support you. It’s what I do here on the show. I’m a business strategist, but I’ve built multiple companies with kids.

 

I think I launched my first business when my youngest was six weeks old. So I totally get it. Whatever phase you’re in of parenting. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, happy holidays. Happy new year, let’s kick 2020, like to the curb behind us. And I’m so excited to start 2021 with you. We have a lot of amazing things coming up on the show,

 

including commitment week 20, 21, five days. I’m only 10 minutes a day to completely lay out your entire 20, 21 business plan coming up here next week. And so I dive into commitment week 2021 with us next week’s episode number 207. All right, you guys, I will talk to you soon. Have an awesome day.

Episode 205: How To Scale With Systems and Grow Your Team – with Ravi Abuvala

Ruvi Abuvala SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Access Ravi Abuvala’s Free Course: The Exact Steps We Took To Scale 2 Companies To 7-Figures In 18 Months!

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and small businesses who want to scale by hiring Virtual Assistants but you don’t have the time to look for staff, the expertise to find the best help internationally or the systems in place to onboard your team to scale faster. 
 
This show is ideal for entrepreneurs in Phases 2-4 of my “Start To Scale Up System” – Take the quiz to learn your current business status

Summary:

It’s time to grow your business and you need help. But how do you find the right team members when you don’t have time (or knowledge) to onboard them? In this show, we’ve covering how to hire international help, how to onboard them correctly, and how to do this by using an outside agency. Ruvi Abuvala, founder of scalingwithsystem.com is on the show dishing the powerful secrets his company uses to help other businesses grow and scale with team, systems and “The Ramping Bible”, and how to leverage these in your business right away. 
 
We’re answering these questions about Hiring/Working With Virtual Assistants
  • When is the right time to hire your first virtual assistant?
  • Should everyone hire one? When would you not want to?
  • Where do you hire your virtual assistants from? What are the pros and cons of those areas?
  • How do you know what to take off your plate (delegate) first?
  • How do you make sure there is strong communication and reliability?
  • Should you hire one virtual assistant for everything or multiple virtual assistants for each task?

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Understand the exponential scaleability of teams
  2. Be aware of the need for (or update of) onboarding systems 
  3. Know which onboarding systems to create first
  4. Have all the answers to the questions posed above

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
For help building offers, courses or programs that Scale visit www.signatureoffer.com
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, your host, and I’m super glad That you’re here today is a heavy heading show. And you’re going to get a lot of powerful,

 

valuable information. I can’t wait to introduce you to our guest, but if you’re a new listener here to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, I just wanted to say, hello. I’m April beach, the host of this show and founder of the Sweetlife company. And we help experts, entrepreneurs and small businesses scale online, develop your signature offers and become the undisputed leader in your space by providing business consulting and services to service-based entrepreneurs and companies looking to grow and scale with online services,

 

programs, and digital products in everything that we do here on the show. This is our outreach. This is where we deliver proven business trainings from decades of business coaching that you would pay thousands of dollars to get this business strategy. We deliver to you here on the show, totally free. So thank you so much for tuning in, and I can’t wait to dive into today’s show today.

 

We’re talking about how to scale with systems and grow your team. This is episode number 205, which means all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweet life co.com click on podcast and episode two Oh five on today’s show. We’re specifically talking to those of you guys who want to scale your business by hiring virtual assistants, but you don’t have the time to look for the staff yourself.

 

You might not have the expertise in the areas you’re looking to hire. And so it’s hard for you to sort actually who’s the right candidate because you yourself may not know or be a master in a certain area, and you need systems in place to scale your business faster. This show is ideal for those of you guys who are in phases, two, three or four of my start to scale up system.

 

If you aren’t sure your current business status, cruise over to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz, you can just pause this episode for a second and you can just answer six questions. You’ll get your exact business status and a checklist of things you should be focusing on to grow and scale your company faster. So it’s time to grow your business and you need help,

 

but you need to find the right team members. Today’s cast is absolutely insane. You’re going to love this guy in the very best way. He is the founder of scaling with systems. And on this show, we are dishing out powerful secrets that he uses in his company to scale his business faster. And these are the questions that you are going to know the answers to at the end of this episode,

 

when is the right time to hire your first virtual assistant? Should everybody hire a VA when you not want to hire a VA, where do you hire your virtual assistants from what are the pros and cons of those areas? So US-based versus internationally. How do you know what to take off your plate and delegate first? So at the end of this show,

 

you are going to have a list of the most common roles first fulfilled by virtual assistants, by companies looking to scale, how do you make sure there is a strong communication and reliability when you hire out internationally and should you hire one virtual assistant for everything or multiple virtual assistants for each task? Today’s guest expert is rubby of Evolla. And he’s the founder of scale with systems and business accelerator that works to bootstrap and scale their client’s businesses leveraging paid advertising sales funnels,

 

and fully trained overseas VAs, which is the area we’re focusing on today. And the past 14 months, not 14 years in the past 14 months, he has scaled to seven figure businesses with less than a thousand dollars of his own capital in four commission-based employees. Today, he’s worked with over 500 firms around the world and place 300, excuse me, 630 virtual assistants.

 

And he’s spoken on some of the largest stages into the industry, including being featured by Fox news, Forbes and entrepreneur. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast episode. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number two, zero five<inaudible> Are you guys well, I am joined by Ravi ABA Vala here on the show because it’s time for us to talk about how to scale your business with teams.

 

And this is not something that comes naturally to most entrepreneurial leaders. You know, we’re really good at our area of genius. You know, our zone of genius, what we do the ways in which we give people Results, but when it comes to scaling, there’s a couple of bottlenecks. One is usually business model and the second one is growing teams.

 

And this is something that I have really struggled with as a leader of both of my own companies as well. And it’s not something that comes naturally to me. And so I was super stoked that Ravi wanted to be on this show. And today we’re diving into really how to scale your business, not only by initially growing teams, but growing teams and then sub teams,

 

and really how to scale the actual teams themselves. Some things that I don’t think we talk about enough as entrepreneurs and experts as leaders. So Robbie, thank you so much and welcome to the show April. Thanks so much for having me here. I am super excited, listen to the podcast for a little bit as well. And I know that majority of it is just pure value.

 

So that is exactly what I aim to give everybody that’s listening to this today. So thank you guys for your time and you as well, April. So thanks for having me here. Yeah, I’m super stoked. Okay. So today we’re Going to dive into a couple of different areas. First of all, remote teams, internationally based remote teams. We’re going to talk about,

 

we’re also going to talk about your expert process of growing remote teams, how you onboard people, and then we’re going to dive into how to scale your teams within your teams. So I think one of the first questions that we need to tackle for our listeners here is just breezing by this, because they’ll have all your resources and where to find this more,

 

but just as a foundation, you know, how do people really find expert remote, highly qualified individuals, really outside of the U S to work for them? Yeah, that’s an awesome question. And it’s one that we obviously hear all the time, and I think with anything in life, you have two kind of ways of doing it. It’s like,

 

you’re going to roll up your sleeves. You’re going to figure it out. You’re going to do it yourself, which is awesome. Especially if you’re just starting and you have like the training and everything to go along with it. And you want to take them from just like an anybody to the expert of their fields. That’s one way to do it. And the other way to do it as essentially,

 

you know, working with some kind of third-party company or working with a recruiter, to finding somebody who already has a lot of the skills and qualifications of the tasks that you’re looking to get completed, and then pretty much transplanting them into your team at that point. And then you’re pretty much only selling them on your culture and your vision. So you have two different avenues.

 

You can kind of go down. I see people going through both. We do both, depending on what we’re going, if it’s like a hyper specialized expert in a certain field that like, I don’t even know how to deliver that result. Like, as you grow in scale, if you’re listening to this, everyone’s like go only delegate to people. What,

 

you know how to do it. Well, then you’re locked in this like sphere of like knowledge. And instead you’re gonna get to the point where it’s like, I don’t know how to do this, but I want to do this. And so, you know, I need to hire someone that already knows it. So there’s that aspect of him, which is a little scary,

 

but it was almost like, we’ll talk about later, you communicate KPIs. I think it’s okay. And then like on the other side is like, Hey, I already know how to do this. So maybe I don’t have to go find somebody else that knows how to do this. I can just teach this person to myself, but then you kind of create those systems and that ramping Bible that I’m sure we’ll talk about here in a little bit,

 

that helps them kind of grow along that process. Okay. So this is a really good opportunity. I want people to know, how did you get into this? Like you didn’t, you didn’t start this, did you say I’m going to be a scale expert and help people build teams? So share a little bit of your background in, in why this is now your Ninja skill.

 

Yeah, so I keep it really short because I want to stay on the value. But very long story short was going to go to law school, graduated college. My dad was diagnosed with stage four lung cancer. I had to go take care of him. Instead of law school, I finally got into law school, decided it wasn’t for me. I dropped out sort of my first company prospect social was an advertising agency and knew nothing about systems.

 

You don’t think about process. Like I was just like, I’m going to come at this just with pure hard work, like pure grinding hustle mode. And for the first eight months I gained about 50 pounds. I was like losing hair. I was getting gray hairs and I made $3,000. The first six, eight months of business, $3,000 as a screenshot on my website.

 

You can see it. And I almost thought that I made the wrong decision. Then I hired my first coach or consultants. I went to a mastermind. I hired my first coaching consultant. He showed me really the powers of virtual assistants, the powers of systems, the power of sales funnels. I know a lot of the stuff that you guys cover as well.

 

I implemented that stuff. Next month, we did $30,000. Within six months, we had done a hundred thousand dollars in one month and now that’s a multi seven figure business. And just from that moment that I hit the map by having that first month to a, you know, a few months later when people started seeing me living abroad and traveling the world,

 

I just had a bunch of people reaching out to me. How did you do this? You know, we were in the same Facebook group and at the same level and all of a sudden you’re shot up here. And so I just pretty much was like, yeah, that’s pretty much just like the sales funnels and these virtual assistants. And here’s how you do it.

 

And long story short, you know, I think a lot of great businesses if you know, like Slack or a few others, like it’s never really, the intention for that main business was ever to start it, but you just have people like banging on your door. Like, you know, you’re trying to sell one thing and they’re like, I want this other thing.

 

And so that was kind of the Genesis of scaling with systems. Yeah. I love it. I love it. And we’ll make sure there’s a link to your company and how to work with you as well to do this. So we have these first hires and it is, it’s such a big problem for business owners. You know, we have these first hires,

 

but they’re on board, but let’s talk about actually how to interview them. You have a really special onboarding process this too. I know from talking to so many companies and I personally know within my own business that developing the onboarding process is a ton of work to do it right in. Sometimes, you know, you really fail in a way that you’re not going to get the end result for that new person.

 

So talk to us about your it’s. You call it the ramping Bible and really how to do this, how to bring people, team members on board. Yeah. It’s super interesting. It’s like, you know, anytime you just sit down and I know you work with a lot of like people that are creating their intellectual property on coursework or whatever it is.

 

And so, you know, I don’t know about anybody else, but when I’m doing it, it’s like, I’m not getting paid for that necessarily yet. And so it’s really hard to like, take that time, carve it out and do it. It’s it’s just like, there’s like leverage data and you’re like, I’m going to get paid later for this.

 

But right now this is really difficult. And the onboarding process is something super similar. And so a lot of people, they don’t have any kind of onboarding process. They don’t have any kind of training. And so instead what they’ll do is just hire someone and they’re like, okay, go do this thing. Or then they’re trying to spend all this time training them and that’ll work with their first hire and maybe for the hire after that.

 

But if you’re smart enough, you know how to, which I wasn’t smart enough with just so everyone here knows I had to learn the hard way, but now we help our clients avoid it. You can create this kind of onboarding training process. We call the ramping Bible inside of scaling, which systems is 35 pages long. It’s a Google document. And it literally starts out like we have one for our commission-based sales position literally starts out with just like,

 

Hey, this is why we’re hiring you. And this is the importance of this position. These are the KPIs. And then these are also the<inaudible>. These are the goals. If you do this, you’re going to make this money. If you do this, you’re going to make this. So there’s no like end of the year bonus, there’s no like,

 

you know, you’re going to get promoted at Rockefeller. And it’s just like, here’s how you will make more money and graduate in our company. And we lay it out from everything into Z. And then after that, I’m telling them because a lot of people mistake this and they don’t even have this systemized, but why should you work for scaling systems?

 

Why should you work for this company? Like, what’s the vision here? What’s the dream here? What are our past clients? Like you have to sell your employees on working with you. And if you don’t and they’re going to leave the first opportunity that they get. And so then we have a few pages on like who we are, what my bad,

 

that story. I just told you a second ago, like about my dad, the lung cancer, the drop out of school. And then we get into kind of the hard skill stuff, which is like, Hey, here’s how you send cold emails. Usually you scrape leads. Here’s how you send LinkedIn messages. Here’s how you do demo calls. There’s do qualifying calls.

 

I mean, it took me probably two months to get the whole thing together. But now, you know, between the 1800 virtual assistants that we’ve hired in the past two years, and then, you know, I personally have onboarded 35 different team members inside of our company. All I literally do is, and I’ll tell you guys a little hack, which we don’t have to get into,

 

but our salespeople pay us $1,500 to come work for our company and make us money because we give them a pretty much a done for you course almost. That’s like, here’s how you make money online. These are you doing. And we just have our service as a thing that they deliver for. And so we’re teaching them to be like top 1% salespeople,

 

you know, top 1% lead generators. And so some of my sales guys, I have a guy in Canada he’s 17 years old and making like close to $10,000 a month at 17 years old selling our stuff. And so if you can have something that comprehensive from a to Z, then you can get a 17 year old in Canada to sell for you.

 

You can get someone in the Philippines to do ads for you or client fulfillment or whatever, the backend stuff for us, but it kind of all lays on and falls on that foundational ramping Bible or whatever you want to call it. That someone gets whenever they join your company. Okay, that’s genius. I’m sold. I want your ramping Bible. And I want my own ramping Bible for the Sweetlife company.

 

Absolutely. You know, I thought our brand introduction onboarding process was cool. Well, definitely no where doesn’t even hold a candle to this. So if you guys are listening, clearly this is the gold standard. This is what needs to be done that alone. We could end this podcast episode on, well, you could just do that. You’re going to scale exponentially just by doing that,

 

this ramping Bible, you have it for your own company and your own systems, but then do you also help other companies develop their own ramping Bible based on what you have established there? Let’s talk about that a little bit. Yeah. A hundred percent. So like if I was to just get people, the Randy Bible straight as we haven’t and probably overwhelmed a lot of people,

 

right? Unless they like have multiple team members already and they have people to work on and consume the content. It’s like people would lose their minds. So instead we’re kind of build pieces of the ramping Bible together. So they get to see ours, they get understand what is involved in ours. We help them build it. But instead of being like,

 

Hey, do this for every position in your company, usually cause we place these virtual assistants for our, we start there and we’re like, okay, this is what they need to be trained on. And we actually train them for our clients. So we do, they do a 60 day bootcamp and we do all the work for them. So they’re kind of getting the done for you,

 

virtual assistant, but then it’s like, Hey, you know, what do you need to, we teach them how to great, obviously SOP standard operating procedures. So, you know, what do you need to reference back to what happens if you make another hire, right? What happens this virtual assistant leaves, whatever it is. And so we help them build this ramping Bible with them.

 

And we usually start in the lead generation side because that is an, our experience where a lot of people are lacking in their business is just like, you don’t have enough appointments or people in their calendar. And then once we get past that, then we can start talking about ramping Bibles for sales or ramping Bibles for our account management or ramping Bibles for chief operating officers or any one of those other positions.

 

Yeah. So we kind of help our clients create that after they joined scaling with systems and then we’ll give them the virtual assistant, who’s going to go through it already, fully trained. Right. Oh my gosh. What an amazing outline, what amazing program you guys have. Okay. So this brings us to the next area that I really want to talk about.

 

So the majority of the listeners to this show are established small businesses, but if you really, they call us micro businesses. You know, if you look at a small business, it’s still, you know, a hundred people. So we’re talking, you know, businesses that have anywhere from eight to 20 team members or businesses that are listening to this show that might only have three team members right now,

 

but they need to get to 12 in order to fulfill all the roles within their company. This brings in so many other growing pains as far as from a management and scaling standpoint. So talk to us about your expertise, what you can pour into our listeners when it’s time to actually scale the team itself. What are the primary roles? We talked about a little bit behind the scenes before recording,

 

but what are the primary jobs that most companies seem to fill first when they’re starting to delegate and grow their team? And how do you recommend companies go about managing that scaling process within the team itself? Yeah. So there’s a great concept called a scorecard. I didn’t create it myself. It was from the gentleman who created HubSpot. They wrote a great book called inbound marketing,

 

and they’re talking about the scorecard inside of there. And the idea of it is like, you know, every day as a CEO, other team members should be reporting on their scorecard to you the 10, 12, 15 most important statistics in that company. So, you know, number of leads generated number of appointments, you know, number of cash collected yesterday.

 

You compare that to last week, whatever it is. So the first thing you have to do before you even talked about scaling a team and making the hires is like, are you systemized? And then once, you know, you’re systemized, if someone was going to take this role, what is the expected KPIs? Where’s this expected goals I would want them to do.

 

And a lot of people’s like, I don’t know, but let’s just say, have you focused solely on email? And you knew that you could send out 300 emails a day and you could probably get five people. That’d be interested in what you’re doing. Then, you know, that’s while you’re still trying to juggle 15 other things at the same time.

 

So if you hire one person to do this, full-time they could probably get eight to 10 leads day. That’s a, probably an average or a conservative number to use. And so then you hire the person who said, Hey, I’m expecting eight to 10 positive responses, leads, booked appointments in my calendar. If you do this every single day, they say,

 

yes, you go great. Then what you’ll do is you’ll try a bunch of things out, LinkedIn, email, Facebook, Instagram, or whatever kind of department that you’re in. Obviously whatever’s relevant to that. And then you’ll see what’s working and you’ll see what’s not working. And a lot of times it’s like one thing is blaring obvious that it’s working.

 

And a lot of other things aren’t. And the biggest mistake, I see people doing whatever their scaling teams is. They keep everyone focused on this like kind of general level where like, everyone’s just doing everything instead of being like, okay, majority of our booked appointments are coming from email, but I keep on trying to do Facebook messages or LinkedIn messages or whatever it is instead of okay,

 

email works. I’m gonna put you full time on email and they’re going to hire another person to do full-time on email as well, but that’s doubling our efforts. So the first thing that I’ll usually say is like, you figure out what’s working through your KPIs and your scorecard. And then you can double down on that as long as it’s something that you want to double down on such as sales or lead generation,

 

right? The typical flow that I see people doing in a business, especially higher ticket service based businesses, which is kind of what our wheelhouse is, is virtual assistants for lead generation is mostly the number one thing that you do then what’ll happen is pretty soon you’ll get so many leads that you literally can’t do. The sales calls. You’re like, you know,

 

dizzy from doing eight to 10 sales calls every single day. So the second hire that we used see is sales. And at this point you have kind of the front end of your business taken care of. You’re waking up, you’re out, you’re having the BA generate leads, a sales person closed deals. And now you have the back end you’ve got to work on.

 

And I know you work with a lot of hyper scalable or you help people become hyper scalable through like courses or kind of intellectual property. Exactly. So then we start working on that. How do we kind of make your offer a little more hyper scalable? So before we even hire somebody, you know, you don’t want to hire someone in to do something that’s inefficient because then you’re just spending money to do something that’s inefficient.

 

So how can we streamline your backend process a little bit more, your offering your coursework, whatever it is, working with one niche. And then you’ll usually hire a virtual assistant of a bill for you or some other specialized person. Then it’s an account manager to handle everything that’s going on. And at this point you’re pretty much just operations, right? You got someone generating leads,

 

you’ve got someone closing leads, you’ve got someone onboarding clients, you got someone delivering for you. And that’s honestly all really low cost because you’re using virtual assistants and commission only salespeople. And then you kind of have room to do the next hire, which is a little more higher level, but just like chief operating officer, essentially, this is the person that is now managing all these people.

 

And they’re the ones that look at the KPIs and everything else. And now you’re pretty much free to do what, like I’m doing. A lot of my other clients are doing which like podcasts and play with ads and do content and grow a YouTube channel and work on your products onto the backend stuff, which is a dream state for me personally, I had to make sure that the whole company is growing and scaling month over month.

 

Right. And, and you’re the only one that can do those things. Nobody else can do those, but you, you know, it’s your genius. And I, and I absolutely love that. And so what we’ve done is a company is, you know, we grow really, we have grown from the top down and I say this the time on this podcast.

 

So my listeners know that I really suck at management. I don’t mean to be, I’m really nice, but I’m just not a great person to work for because I’m super entrepreneur creator, not, you know, not a great systems person, but then Kevin’s, I have those systems people to do that. But you know, we’ve really grown it from that CEO position that,

 

you know, CMO position and then down. But I love this idea. Granted, we started growing 16 years ago, but I love this idea about really filling this in. So are companies that come to us and the people that listen to the show, I mean, everybody knows the power of scaling. They just don’t know how to go about it.

 

And there’s budget different ways. We’ve talked about scaling, you know, scaling your offers, you know, to figuring out your systems, how your, your business model, which is all the stuff that I geek out on this scaling through teams is absolutely seems the first foremost, everything you should be thinking about those you guys who are listening, whether you’re just getting started or you’re just at that tipping point where it’s time to scale.

 

For sure. I want you to process what re what Ravi is saying here, because it’s incredibly important and I totally see this. Okay. So let me ask you some questions here. As I’m getting through to kind of thinking about some questions that our listeners would be asking. So we talked about finding the right people and whether you outsource or, you know,

 

you’re, you’re kind of going through the process of finding them on your own finding the right people is, is a big, heavy lifting job. And so that is something that your company takes care of. And we’ll make sure that our listeners know how to find you this ramping Bible, again, huge project, huge project. And so based on where our listeners are in this love the value of taking your expertise in your template and creating their own from that.

 

And one of the things you said that was really important that I just want to hit on is having our team members find themselves in our mission is a big thing. I know for me personally, we just got back from our 20, 21 planning retreat in Florida. We were in Florida last week. And one of the biggest things for each one of my team members has been like,

 

okay, what is your vision? And how can you find your vision within my company? You know, how is this great for you in addition to being really awesome for me too. And so I love it. That’s something that you guys hit on and there, do you feel like we can do that as well with international teams as we can growing US-based teams?

 

And how do you create that culture within your team? I did not tee you up for this. You did not know I was going to ask this, but how do we create that sort of team culture when your team is spread out all over? So I’m super happy you asked it. And, and it’s funny, cause like culture is kind of like one of those little buzz words that people just say,

 

you know, on an Instagram video or whatever it is. But if you have a team, you understand that like culture is the difference. If like when COVID happens and you’re a business campaign payroll that they’re still working, right? Like that’s a difference in culture. And obviously, luckily we didn’t have that problem because we’re online. But like my brother had that issue cause he had restaurants.

 

And so culture is a difference in like, you know, you not being able to make salary next month, culture difference. And like you having to ask someone to work later when it’s, you know, it’s supposed to be their night out with their girlfriend, whatever it is. And they are like, no problem, I totally get it. And like finding those people,

 

it’s a great book, good to great. By Jim Collins, he talks about, you know, getting them on the bus and it’s like finding those people is super, super important. And to do that, you have to develop the right culture and that really starts with, and I’ll be really honest. I will listen. I was really great at this in the beginning.

 

Then we went from six employees to 36 in a matter of three months. And like, I really lost myself and I lost that kind of culture. Like the address was delegating. Like you didn’t do the culture, you do the culture, whatever it is. And what I’ll tell everyone here is why I brought it back from me and what it was in the beginning was like every 90 days we have performance reviews with our employees and I delegated those out for a little bit time.

 

Cause I was just so busy, but we care about personal financial and professional goals. So we would say, Hey, you know, what’s been going great the past 90 days, what do we need to work on? You know, this is both of us, everyone get the feedback. They can knock the CEO. They want to, I think it says,

 

awesome. Let’s talk about goals here. So in the next 90 days, and then even further and beyond what are your professional personal and financial goals. And so some of our team members it’s, I want to lose weight. So when I go back home from Thanksgiving or I go home for Christmas, you know, I look better or maybe it’s like,

 

I want to be able to buy a house, but my credit is for whatever it is and what you’ll realize. A lot of times it doesn’t have to do with money. Like these are not money goals here just like access to certain things or knowledge or information. And so what you can do as a company is help them reach those goals. If they help you reach your goals.

 

So Hey, if you hit these numbers that we send this many outbound messages. If we get this many books appointments, then I will pay for a credit repair service. So you can start getting your application for your home, whatever it is. And I was doing that really well in the beginning. But then, like I said, I lost touch.

 

And recently, literally about a week ago, right in the middle of the move from California to Florida, I’m doing 36 performance reviews in three days. And I’m just like 12 a day, pretty much. I’m like, Oh my God, I’m going crazy. But in that timeframe, I actually was able to like finally go back down and touch every single person and just like hear how much our company has impacted them.

 

And then like what their future goals are and what, and at the end of every single call, they’re like Ravi, I can’t believe you took the time out of your day to do this call with. And I’m thinking in my head, like, I’m grateful for you. Like, please don’t leave me. Like you’re in the big part of this.

 

I’m not, this is nothing like you’ve done everything up to this point. And so I guess that’s the point of building that culture has to really do with like asking your employees what they want, including overseas virtual assistants. The ones that were the most honest with me were the ones in the Philippines. And they were telling me like, they want to have kids,

 

but it’s a little difficult for them to have kids because of like biological reasons. And so we’re talking about adoption and like all these other things that like the other people, you never would hear anybody in the us or someone else talk about what their employer for multiple reasons. But yeah, it sounds cheesy, but figuring it out, writing down what they want,

 

holding them accountable, I’ve been helping them reach it. If they help you reach your goals on your business, I think is a great way to keep a high performance culture inside of a company, but also have that kind of caring. Like I’ll take care of you. Don’t worry about it. Kind of thing. I love that. Oh my gosh,

 

love that. Appreciate all of that. And all of you sharing and the transparency and just really all about that. And I think that’s as important as everything else we talked about today. All right. So businesses are ready to scale and they need help. How can they find you? Yeah, of course, the easiest way. And then I had told you the beginning of this and I’m sure you can confirm it.

 

I talk very fast and I like breeze over topics that people are like, Ravi. I want to learn more about that. And so what I did is I put together a free course. It’s about five and a half hours of totally free content and overs, like where to find the virtual assistants, what kind of lead generation scripts you should be using,

 

you know, how to kind of build that ramping Bible yourself. And if you want to get access to it, you just go to scaling which isn’t dot com slash sweet dash life. And I know April set, you’ll link it down below, but she actually attaches to the podcast. So that way you guys can make it easier for you to remember,

 

but yeah, scaling with systems.com/sweet-life. And you guys get instant free access to that course. Yeah. Highly, highly recommend in your company, scaling with systems. We’ll make sure that we have links to where people can find you in addition to not only the course, but across social media as well. You thank you so much for your time. Thanks for talking fast.

 

Totally love it. We covered so much information and I know that our listeners got a ton of value out of this, especially those that are really at that place where it’s time to scale. They’re serious about it and they want to do it right. So really appreciate your time on this. Yeah, of course. April was an absolute pleasure. Thanks so much for having me on here.

 

Keep up the great work with all the incredible content and for everyone that’s at home or driving, whatever you’re doing, working out and listening, I do appreciate your guys’ time and I hope you got some value out of it, For sure they did. For sure. All right. Thanks Robbie.<inaudible> What a great show. I appreciate rubby so much for being on here.

 

And I like you when we have these guests in here, I’m taking notes like a crazy woman. If you’ve seen us behind the scenes or if you haven’t yet checked out our YouTube channel and you can actually see the full interview on video with me and Ruby and see me taking notes here through this process. Again, you can find the course, which is an amazing bonus.

 

We have, you know, no, no profit stake in this whatsoever. And Ravi doesn’t either. This is a completely free training that he’s given you simply by visiting scale with systems.com forward slash sweet dash life. And you can get access to this complete training that he has for you learn more about that onboarding Bible, the ramping up Bible, and how to create your own.

 

We are here to make sure you have systems in place to grow and scale your business online faster. And we appreciate you listening to the show. If you haven’t yet, please take a second and leave us a review on Apple or you listen to podcasts and connect with us and follow us at Sweetlife company on LinkedIn. Thanks so much. You guys I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 204: How To Hire The Perfect Business Coach – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

26 Business Coach Interview Questions – free download

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs who are considering hiring a private business consultant and need to be sure their investment is well spent. This is best for businesses in Phases 2-4 of my Start to Scale Up System™. Visit www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz to learn where your company stands. 

Summary:

You know what got you here is not going to get you to the next level. But, hiring a business coach may feel risky. How do you know if you’ll get the results you need? How do you know if you can trust this person? Will their style meet your needs? Are they legit? In this episode you’ll get massive clarity on how how to hire the right business coach for you, what questions to ask a potential coach and how to weed out the rookies coaches for the best.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Know if you’re ready to hire a business coach 
  2. Be equipped to ask the right questions when interviewing business coaches
  3. Have a ton of clarity on how to find your perfect fit coach

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there. And welcome back to the show. I’m April beach, your host and founder of the sweet life company. And we are here to help all of you experts, entrepreneurs, and small business owners scale online,

develop your signature offer and become the undisputed leader. How we do this here on the show and in the suite life company is by providing an experienced, proven business consulting firm over a decade of working with entrepreneurs, just like you and helping you grow and scale your business with online services, programs, digital products and programs on today’s show. We’re talking about how to hire the perfect business coach.

This is episode number 204, and this is what you can expect. First of all, should you tune in, should it hang out here for me, with me for another 20 minutes? So this show is for those of you guys that are considering hiring a private business consultants, but you need to make sure your money is well spent and you want to make sure that you’re going to the next level.

Here’s the deal. You know, that what got you here to this point is not going to be the same strategy, or maybe even the same self-teaching that can get you to the next level in your business. But hiring a business coach can feel really risky, especially now that everybody under the sun is calling themselves a business coach. Most of them who haven’t even built and scaled their own companies.

And so there are some things that you really need to be careful for. You know, if you’re thinking, how am I going to get results? How do I know if I can trust this person? How’s this person’s style going to meet my needs? Is this person really legit in this episode, we’re diving in to give you massive clarity on how you can hire the right person for you and you know,

the right questions to ask, to make sure that potential coach is going to be the one that delivers you, the results that you’re looking for at the end of the show, you’re going to know, first of all, whether or not you actually need or are ready for a private business coach. And you’re going to be equipped with the right questions to ask when interviewing a business coach.

And of course give you a ton of clarity to find that perfect fit coach for you. Along with this show, we have a download for you. They are 26 business coach interview questions, and you can go grab that, download it totally free. Just visit the show notes@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero four. And you can totally grab that it’s a free download and really important questions.

I want to make sure we’re not only giving you the strategies and talking about the important things here on the show, but I’m actually giving you two pages of questions. You can sit down during your interview with the coach and just ask them in, go ahead and make sure that you are getting the results that you’re looking for even in the pre-interview time. So if you’re ready for that,

let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show<inaudible>. So we’re going to break this show up into two parts, cause I want to make sure I’m giving you exactly what you’re looking for in the answers you need. First of all, again, we’re talking about how to hire the perfect business coach for you and the perfect coach for you is different than the perfect coach for me,

everybody is different. And so it’s really important that you have your own strategies to figure out who that perfect fit is going to be for you. The first one we need to do is talk about whether or not you actually need to be investing in a private business coach. And if your company is actually ready for that. And then in the second half of the show,

I’m going to help, you know, the questions to ask, to find the perfect fit coach for you. So let’s go ahead and dive in again. You can grab the download for the 26 interview questions to ask a business coach by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash two, a four, or you can download it instantly with no opt-in when you join our free community,

you can join our community over@sweetlifecommunity.com and all of our podcasts downloads have no opt in there to really give you speed and efficiency. Okay? So here we go. First of all, are you ready for a private business coach? Just because we all want to individual attention doesn’t necessarily mean that your business is at the point where you’re really ready for that level of coaching.

So let’s go ahead and talk about that together and make sure it’s a good investment for you. First things. First, number one, if you feel like you’ve been trying everything on your own, trying a bunch of different things and failing that them, or if you’ve been self-taught with little games, it may be time for a business coach for you. Although here’s the deal.

I am a huge advocate for failing. Failing is part of what makes you smarter and increases your entrepreneur IQ and helps you find confidence in yourself as a business leader. So when it comes to business growth, failing is part of the process, but we also need to help you make money faster and smarter. We don’t want you to failing forever all the way through.

If you’ve tried something on your own, you can’t get through, you can’t push past a barrier or you don’t understand something, or you like me value not recreating the wheel from scratch. Then private business coach is probably what you’re ready for. Number two, instead of being confident and proactive in your business, you’re starting to follow and copy other people’s success.

So maybe you’re confident in the beginning, but now you’re, you’re starting to kind of copy cat what other people are doing. And that’s never a good thing because even though it might look good on the outside for you, somebody else’s business model might seem like it’s perfect, but it doesn’t necessarily mean it’s the right pathway. And it’s going to get you the same results.

So if you find yourself starting to copycat what other people are doing and you’re lost, then certainly a private business strategist is something that’s going to be wise for you to get wisdom. So if you’ve been trying to do this on your own for a long time, you see other influencers and you see other businesses, and you’re trying to duplicate what they’re doing without any strategic wisdom of your own.

And that’s not working. Then it’s time for a private business coach. So really consider hiring a consultant and somebody who will roll up their sleeves with you, dive into your business with you and really hear what your struggles are. Your areas of expertise, how much money you bring to the table. What you’ve already tried. It’s really important that you don’t hire somebody.

That’s just going to teach you things you’ve already done. And this person should help you come up with a customized plan. That’s going to work for you. And here’s some things that I want you to consider. If you’re building a six to seven figure business and it’s not a side hobby, then it’s probably time. If you’ve met the previous criteria, we’ve just talked about to invest in a business coach,

business coaches are worth their weight in gold. They can absolutely change and transform your business. Literally, almost overnight. Now, no, there are no overnight fixes, but your understanding of your plan and your strategy can go from completely murky to very, very clear, almost instantly with the right coach. There’s nothing that feels better than that. Now you still have to go and implement it,

but that Mindshift alone can truly lift a million pounds off your shoulders and give you the clarity and focus you need. Now let’s talk about what you should invest or expect to invest with a business coach. And the first question starts with you. What can you afford? There are a lot of business coaches out there. I’m a said there are a lot of bitches out there.

There are a lot of bitches out there too, but there’s business coaches out there. I’m laughing. Cause I know my producer is going to leave this in here and you can have an hourly rate with a consultant anywhere from $50 an hour, $500 an hour, up to $5,000 an hour and really beyond. I don’t even know who those coaches are, but I know that they exist.

And I’m hoping this podcast episode can help you sort, the great coaches from those that are truly a sham. This is also why I’ve included the 26 questions to ask a business coach, download with this podcast to help you guide your conversations in interviewing a new coach to help make sure you aren’t getting taken to the cleaners. Okay? And so the deal is,

make sure your investment aligns with the money you have projected to make in your business and make sure it aligns with the value of your offers, your courses, your services, your programs, and what you can expect to recuperate what your ROI is. So the reality is is if you’re selling something for $200, it’s hard to recuperate an ROI. If you invest in a business consultant,

that’s going to cost you 30,000. How long is that going to take you? The amount of investment in my opinion should be relative to your ability to recuperate with an ROI. And that really starts with your offer. How valuable is your offer? You might be hiring a business coach to help you develop your offer, but you generally know the value of what you’re going for the target audience that you want to reach.

And so make sure that the value of what you’re selling is going to help you recuperate in a reasonable amount of time, your investment with a business coach. Now, just aside plug, if you need help developing your signature offer or program, or course consider joining my next upcoming masterclass called your signature offer, and you can add your name to the interest list for that by visiting signature offer.com

will really help you build something that’s highly valuable. And I say this because honestly I’ve heard a lot of people who have invested a lot of money to work with coaches and they put everything on the line and they lose their ass. Some of them have quit their jobs. They can’t pay their mortgage. I don’t want to see that anymore. I don’t want to see that heartbreak.

I don’t want to have any more phone calls with entrepreneurs saying I have nothing left. I spent $20,000 on this coach on this mastermind and I have nothing to show for it. I don’t want that to be you. And so be smart about what you’re investing and make sure that you’re working with the coach. That’s going to deliver the results that you’re looking for.

So if you have money to invest in mentorship, I highly recommend that you do it. The ROI is there. As long as you find the right coach, that can get you the results. And so one of the things to look at is how many trainings are you currently sitting on? If you’ve collected a ton of business courses, if you’re sitting on business downloads and listening to tons of podcasts,

you’ve been in a bunch of different masterminds, but you still don’t have any Results then certainly it’s probably time for a private business mentor for you. Although, as I’m saying this out loud and I’m as I’m recording this, I do know that very few coaches offer private one-on-one. So I would start there if you’re feeling already like, gosh, I really want to work with somebody and I want to get close to them.

Definitely start looking for coaches that even have that as an option. Everybody’s so into scale, scale scale, there are very few coaches that will give you their one-on-one time anymore. And frankly, that’s just a shame. And in that process, you want to ask yourself, how close do I want to be to this coach? If it’s important to you to have a personal relationship with the professional relationship,

with a business coach that knows your story, they know your profit plan. You know, you want them to know what’s on the line for you. You want them to know then, you know, you have the names of your kids and where your dream house is going to be located your vision and the purpose for what you’re doing. Then the best place you are going to find that is in a perfect private relationship.

Okay. So here’s your breaking point if you’ve listened to this so far and you’re like, yeah, no, I’m not ready for a private business consultant. I, I still want to DIY that’s great. You can go ahead and stop listening to this podcast now and tune into maybe another sweet life entrepreneurial podcasts that you’ve missed. If you’ve determined that yes,

it’s time for me to invest in a business coach to grow my company more strategically and faster. Now let’s talk more about how to find the right coach for you. So Denise Duffield-Thomas was on the show a few years ago, actually she’s a money mindset, coach and author of the book, chill preneur. She was a guest here back in 2018 and she wrote a great article a few years back.

And I just want to reference this article because I think it’s really important as we dive into this. I also want to make sure I’m operating and recording this podcast with integrity and ethics because I am a business coach. So I want to make sure I’m bringing you outside expertise and resources. In addition to what I’m delivering you here on the show to help you find a business coach.

And that it’s just not all coming from me. So it’s not me saying, Hey, you know, here’s the questions you should ask a business coach, but there are so many different, great coaches out there and that’s really the truth. And so I want to make sure that I’m giving you enough resources. You can ask wise questions during your interview process.

So I’m referencing Denise’s article here and I’m going to talk about some of the things that she brought up in this article, as well as the strategies that I’m giving you here on this show. So a few points that she brought up and they are very, very valid. The first question to ask yourself is where are you at right now in your business?

Take a really good look at the current plain field. What does it look like right now in your marketplace? What does money look like for you? What is your money look like right now? How clear are you and what you want to build? How clear are you and where you want to go? What do your services look like? Or what do you want them to look like in what’s happening right now and have just a real serious come to Jesus with yourself and just say,

this is where I am right now in my business. I’m not clear on this, or I’m not sure about this, right? I don’t know what decision I want to make about something. Just get really clear and understand where you are right now. This is before you ever get on the phone with a potential coach, this is what you should be doing throughout the process as you’re looking for a coach.

So the first question is really to take a personal inventory after you’ve identified where you are and say, okay, where do I want to go next? What does that look like to me financially? What does it look like? As far as what impact I want to have on a market or on a niche? What does it look like in my business model?

Generally? What type of business model am I looking to build and what sort of marketing and PR do I want to bring in and tap into my business first, take that personal inventory of figuring out where you are and then get really specific on the results that you’re looking for from a business coach, the results you’re looking to achieve in your business and hiring a coach to help you do that.

And then the third part of that is to ask yourself questions like what skills do I need to get from where I am now to where I want to go? So identify the skills you’re missing, or you need to do better at no more. What resources do you need? What systems do you need and where actually am I going? And do I even have a roadmap to get there?

This is pretty standard goal setting strategy, identifying where you are identifying, where you want to go and understanding what’s missing to get you there. But this is absolutely imperative for you to go through this process first to the best of your ability. I understand if you’re hiring a coach, you need a coach to help you figure a lot of this out, but you need to have an understanding of your own individual desires and your current place.

Where are you anchored right now? And where are you going to set sail to? And then you want to go look for a coach that you’re considering hiring. And so here are some questions. Here are some really important things that you should look at in addition to the black and white. Okay. Number one, what sort of life does that business coach have?

Because a lot of coaches have a business model that doesn’t necessarily align with the business model that you want to have for your life. So if you’re looking for somebody to teach you what they know, the tricks of the trade, their area of expertise and their strategies and the plan in which they use to get there, if you don’t want what they have,

they are not the right business coach for you. And I’ve seen that again. And again, I’ve seen midlife women hire younger business coaches, which there’s nothing wrong with that, but totally wanting a different outcome, totally wanting and currently having a different life and wondering why they didn’t get the results that they were looking for. And I just think it’s incredibly important because just seeing somebody there and they might have millions of Instagram followers or a group with thousands of followers and a membership community,

it doesn’t mean that they’re the right business coach for you, just because of a lot of other people follow them. Or a lot of other people work with them. Doesn’t mean they’re the right fit for you. So really take a look and ask that business coach, number one, you should ask them, what is their business model? If you can’t identify this through your own research research.

So what is their business model? How many hours a week do they work? And really what was the process? It took them to get there and do they have kids? That is an important question. You guys, I, this isn’t a mom prenuer podcast or a dad preneur podcast. But if you have kids, you guys that are listening, I’ve said this a trillion times here on the podcast of building a business with kids is totally different than building a business without kids,

your business systems, your model, your scale plan, your launches, your marketing are all driven by business and life strategies. When you have a family, it matter if they’re one or if they’re 18 years old, it’s still, there are different strategies you implement in different things that you put value on when you are building a business for lifestyle Results around family.

So if you’re spending thousands of dollars investing in a coach, who’s unaware of how to build a business in a true travel lifestyle family. It’s probably going to backfire on you. Don’t be surprised if that happens. So that’s just a little side note there. So another great question to ask is what is their coaching style teach versus tell? So this was a question that was going on in a group that I was involved in.

And the question posed was how much do you teach your clients versus how much do you tell them what to do? And I’m reading the comments in this group. And half of the coaches were saying this, no, no, no. You never tell your clients what to do. You only teach them how to find the answer for themselves. And the others were saying,

Nope, I totally tell them what to do. I totally give them the direction that they’re looking for. And here’s what I say. I absolutely tell my clients my expert opinion on what I believe they should do. It’s my personal coaching style to actually do both. Sometimes people hire me and they just want to know the dang answer. They have been searching for years and they just want somebody to tell them the answer.

I’m not going to sit them down. Like my mother did when I asked her how to spell a word and she wouldn’t give me the answer. She’d say, now, honey, now spell it out. I don’t want to spell out the damn word. Right? I literally paid you to give me the answer. And sometimes that’s just what people need and that might be what you need.

But then sometimes my clients need these strategic answers and it’s really, really important. And I’m a firm advocate, making sure my job is to teach my clients every single thing I know as it pertains to their business. So they don’t need me anymore. So basically my job is teaching my way out of a job. And I want my clients to fully say,

you know, Hey April. Yeah, I worked with her. She taught me everything I needed to know, and I don’t need to work with her anymore. And so that’s really the goal. And I share that with you. Obviously it’s a little bit of my own coaching style, but I share that with you because the reality is, as some business,

coaches are not going to give you quick answers. Some business coaches want you to go through the discovery process. Some are almost giving you so much information. It’s like an MBA and funnel building. When you, you know, when you might be a nutritionist, it’s totally irrelevant to the end result that you’re looking for. And I know many of you that listen to this podcast are really strapped for time and you want results.

So do yourself a favor, decide, do I want a business coach that’s going to teach me and tell me when I need an answer or do I just want somebody to teach me how to do things in the style is going to vary across the board. We could get into a whole different conversation between a coach versus a versus mentor. I’m not going there.

The reality is it’s just no, the best way that you learn and know the results that you’re really looking for. And really the happy medium is being able to have the wisdom to make your own decisions based on the coach, guiding you to the response that’s best for you. So just kind of think about that a little bit. And now here are a couple of other tips.

I highly recommend that you’re able to speak personally, one-on-one with the person who’s going to be coaching you before you hire them. You have this opportunity, whether it’s for five minutes or 50 minutes to sit down on the phone or do a video call and make sure that the energy is right to make sure that the relationship giants and it’s really somebody that you can believe that you can learn from you can lean on and you can trust.

And I think that that is super, super important. Particularly with business coaches that require a higher investment to work with them sometimes are these funnels that are built, where you pay a lot of money to hire a coach without ever really having an opportunity to speak to them upfront. And I would personally say that you have a right to speak with anybody who you’re about to invest in to guide your business relative to the amount of investment they’re asking.

If you are joining. For example, one of my business mentorship programs is $10,000. I won’t even take you on as a client until I make sure it’s a good fit for both of us as well. And you would have that same opportunity to interview me back. And I think that that’s very, very important for any business coaching program that requires a higher investment.

So just to share that now, let’s go ahead and dive a little bit in, I gave you the download four 26 interview questions to ask a business coach. I’m going to share a couple of them here as we wrap up this podcast episode, but I really want to make sure you get all of them. They’re asked in a strategic way so that as you go through the interview,

you really get the answers you’re looking for. And so here we go. Question number one is how long have you been coaching number two? How many clients have you coached? Number three, what transformation can I expect after working with you really important one right there. If they cannot explain the end results, you should stop the conversation right there. Number four,

how long will it take to see these results? Number five, how many hours outside of your coaching time do you recommend? I work on the action items that you give me six. Can I speak with others? Who’ve worked with you seven. Do you provide a guarantee of any kind eight? What are your areas of expertise? And this is you asking the coach nine,

how will I contact you 10? How often will we meet 11? This one’s really important. What if I have an emergency question, make sure that you know, their availability to you during emergencies, especially if you’re hiring a coach with a particular launch or a strategy that you really, really need an immediate answer for that might come up. Are you available in person?

And the 13th question is what is your business model? And there are 13 more important questions, maybe not more important, but there are 13 additionally important questions that I recommend that you go through and a business coach interview. And I want to make sure that you have those resources so you can download all 26 business coach interview questions by visiting and sweet life podcast.com

episode two Oh four. So that’s Ford slash two Oh four. And of course you can get all of our downloads with no opt-in by joining our community@sweetlifecommunity.com. And of course, if you’d like to know about working with me privately, I would love to interview with you. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com and schedule with me anytime let’s have a chat.

Thanks so much for tuning into this show. I really appreciate your listenership. I know as we wrap up 2020, all of us are eager to get this year over, but I also know that there are a lot of investments that you’re currently making in your business. As you look into 2021. And my job is to make sure that they’re wise investments and I’m equipping you with the tools you need to make wise decisions for yourself and your business and your future.

All right, thanks so much for tuning in here. I’ll talk to you guys next week.

Episode 203: How To Create Your 2021 Online Business and Lifestyle Plan – April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the live workshop for detailed steps on planning 2021, Dec. 10, 2020 – join our Premier Online Community for only $7/ month

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my Start To Scale Up System™ – take the quiz here to find out and receive a personalized business growth plan.

Summary:

Whether you’re heading to a family reunion are planning to hike the John Muir Trail, Lifestyle freedom is the reason why you became an entrepreneur. Let’s make sure you’re planning your year in advance to actually make it happen. For the past three years I’ve recorded an episode every December to teach how I lay out my year for family and travel first, while assuring I’ve reached the profit benchmarks I need to to make it all happen. In this episode I lay out those steps to make sure my year it’s exactly the way I want it to be. (Regardless of what craziness comes in the year to come, creating a plan is essential to ever getting what you want.)

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Know how to layout the whole year for lifestyle freedom
  2. Be able to assess what changes may need to happen in your offers and services to reach your lifestyle goals
  3. Have the most important math equation that business coaches don’t tell you – and if you don’t know these numbers – you’re sunk

Resources Mentioned:

 
Join the live workshop for detailed steps on planning 2021, Dec. 10, 2020 – join our Premier Online Community for only $7/ month


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys. It’s so great to talk to you again. This is Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. So number 203, and I’m April beach, your host here at the show and at the recording of this,

 

we are turning over into the month of December. I’m so excited. I know you’re with me. Let’s have jazz hands here. We’re ready to put this year behind us. And in the process of doing that, it’s time to plan for 2021. So this episode is a really cool episode. It’s actually a great show. I have recorded this show and released it in December for the last three years in a row.

 

And today we’re talking all about the steps to plan this next upcoming year for profit and lifestyle freedom. And so this is a great show for those of you guys that are wondering how to plan out your business plan for the upcoming year. But also you share the same values as me, where as you want to make sure you’re setting aside time to be with your family,

 

to travel to your kid’s soccer, things that they’re going to do to go visit your family reunion at the Lake, whatever it is that you want to do, that you have a vision that you want to do, that you can do for the upcoming year. And the truth of the matter is, is if we don’t plan your business for this in advance,

 

it’s never going to happen, never, ever, ever going to happen. And regardless of any global pandemic or anything else that comes around or where we are as a world, as the new year rolls around, you have to have a plan or it’s never going to happen. So that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. And you know, people ask me all the time,

 

how I’m able to run two companies, have a busy podcast and still be able to travel with my kids. So in 2019, I was away from the house for almost six months for the whole year, traveling and living in different places. And this is how I did it. So even though this year, didn’t roll out the way all of us wanted.

 

I’m still going to teach you how to plan for it for the years to come. And in this show, this is what you can expect. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know how to lay out your whole entire year for lifestyle freedom. And I’m going to give you the steps, almost the order of operations in which I go through this every single year.

 

You’re also going to be able to assess what changes you need to make to your current offers. That’s actually going to make that happen. This shows can help you open up your eyes in a very sobering way. I’ll be honest regarding what you’re selling and whether or not what you have in your menu of offers and services and programs is honestly ever going to get you to the lifestyle that you want.

 

And we’re going to do that by making sure you have the most important math equation. I hate math too. I’ll be honest, but there are some pretty important math equations that most business coaches don’t tell you that I need to make sure that you’re aware of. Because if you don’t know these numbers, if you don’t hit these numbers, you’re never going to have lifestyle freedom.

 

And so we’re going to dive into all of those things on today’s show. Again, this is Sweetlife podcast episode number 203. So you can cruise over to Sweetlife code.com or find us on all of the podcasts listening apps in all of the show notes will be@sweetlifecode.com. Number two Oh three. And we do have a couple of bonuses for those of you guys that are really interested in making sure you’re nailing your 2021 business and profit plan.

 

The first thing is join us over in our Sweetlife community. We have just launched our premier members community. It’s $7 a month. Yes, I’m charging $7 a month for it. We really only want to make sure serious business builders are in there. And so we need to charge people something. Otherwise we just have dead weight. I don’t like dead weight in my communities.

 

So cruise over to Sweetlife community.com and in December, I am going to be teaching a class, a workshop taking you step-by-step through the process of laying everything out that I’m talking about high level on the podcast. So join me on December. The, let me look up the date for you 17th, as long as you joined Sweetlife community.com, cruise over there and pay your little puny $7,

 

I will be teaching you a live masterclass and taking your questions on top of that as you’re going through this training. And as we’re talking about what you need to do, step-by-step to lay out your year, if you’re struggling whatsoever with your offers, if you can’t hit your offer numbers that you need to hit, then go to signature offer.com. There’s nothing I can give you right now,

 

but you can join our wait list for our new signature offer masterclass. It’s opening up again in February of 2021. So those are some resources. They’re all there in our show notes. And let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training.<inaudible> The steps to plan your business year for profit and lifestyle freedom. So starting with the most important thing you have to have is a primary offer that you know,

 

will generate the revenue that you want. So how do you know that you have to take time to craft an outline, a high value, high impact program service, signature offer, or package. So if you haven’t done that yet, that’s your very, very first step. Again, if you need help with that cruise over to signature offer.com and we’ll connect in my in February.

 

But the very, very first thing is making sure that you have a primary offer that is high value, high impact that people meet, where they want so much, that they are seeking you out. It’s something that is incredibly needed in your space. And they’re going to pay you to solve this for them because they either don’t want to, or they can’t do it on their own.

 

They can’t do it without you. So you need to make sure that you have this primary offer and that it’s nailed down. Emitted is awesome. So we can’t plan your year. We can’t plan profit unless we know you have something incredible that you’re selling. And I’m talking about the primary offer that you were selling. So after you know what your primary income source will be,

 

then I want you to look at the year. I want you to look at a calendar and this is how I do this. This is how I teach it. And I’m telling you what you guys have been doing this now for about seven years, every single year, it’s exponentially better. So step number one is to look at your whole entire calendar.

 

If you’ve ever seen behind the scenes, I literally have a 12 foot calendar going across my wall. I’m a calendar dork. It’s a dry erase calendar I got from Amazon. And I can look on my wall and whatever calendar you like to use. I want you to block off all the times in this upcoming year that you plan to travel or take off work in the whole entire year.

 

So if you don’t have a specific plans yet, but you know, you want to travel, make sure you block off those times now. So for example, I have no idea where exactly I am going to travel next summer, but I can tell you what I know I’m going to be on the East coast, at least a dozen times at lacrosse tournaments over the months of June and July.

 

And I know I’m going to be on the West coast with my other son dancing in the spring. So I’m still blocking off those times in my calendar, even if they’re just general times. And I don’t know exactly when I’m going yet, but generally I know that I’m not going to be in the same work capacity. So after you’ve gone through your calendar and you’ve thought about the times that you want to travel,

 

even if you don’t have specific plans yet, even if we don’t know what the world is going to look like, I want you to block them off now or you know what you’re never ever going for sure. And step number two is to block off any professional development time after you block off your personal time. So this could be time for working on any projects that you’ve set aside,

 

like writing that book, or maybe doing a big project, like rebuilding your website that you really can’t dive into because you haven’t blocked off all the busy-ness of work in life. So I want you to go and I want you to think, when do I want to be working on these projects? When does this make sense to me to reach this specific goal?

 

And I want you to note it on your calendar and if needed, you might need to take off or reduce your client or business service time to develop your new professional skills or write that book or whatever it is. So step one is blocking off travel time, family time, when you just really don’t want to be in the office setting. Number two is setting aside your professional development time and what this does,

 

is this a side note here? It’s super cool because as you see these conferences coming up, whether they’re online or in person or a mastermind that you want to join being offered in 2021, you know that you will have already made those things important. And so now you can look for those things that actually fit into your calendar. Look for the opportunities,

 

the mentors you want to work with and the trips that you want to go on professionally or the work that you want to do. So that is why blocking off your professional time. Come second, because again, those are things that they come last, usually for us as business owners and they shouldn’t. And then after you’ve blocked off and secured your personal growth time and your lifestyle time,

 

now let’s get into how you’re going to pay for it. Right? So looking at your primary offer, I want you to ask yourself, can you still deliver this primary offer during any of your blocked off times as the answer is yes, then there’s really nothing much you need to do. But if the answer is no, then you’ve keenly become aware that you need to sell more of your offer in less time.

 

So you better be strategic to pull it off, right? So therefore I want you to block off your primary selling period and product or service delivery times for this primary product or offer. I’ll give you a personal example. I always like to try to show you guys behind the scenes. So I know that I’m traveling a lot in June or July. So when I open up my,

 

your signature offer masterclass, for example, it is never going to be in June or July because I will never ever do it. I’m not going to be here to do that, right? So I know that the times I’ve blocked off on my calendar to invite people, to join me in my signature offer masterclass, I need to make sure that I am hitting our financial end goal benchmarks during those times.

 

And you need to do the very same thing. So go on block off your primary selling periods. And when you are offering that particular primary offer in order that it’s going to work with the rest of your calendar side note to those of you guys that are in somewhat of a seasonal business, there are certain seasons that align with when people buy. So,

 

you know, if you’re a realtor, there’s a house buying. If you will kind of season, you know, you’re not going to not plan to sell during when your primary season, it would be like a bathing suit shop closing in the summer. So although we are designing your life because we’re creating a profit plan that gives you lifestyle freedom. We always have to be obviously realistic.

 

When do people want to buy what you’re offering? And so take that into consideration when you’re going through and planning this. So first we’ve laid out your personal time off second, we lay out your professional time off third. We note on your calendar, your primary selling periods. Again, in order to pull off the lifestyle side of it, we need to sell more in less time.

 

So now we need to look at those numbers. And this is when the sobering part of the podcast training comes next. You need to crunch the numbers. This is seriously not rocket science. I am terrible at math. How many of your offer do you need to sell in order to hit your financial benchmarks for that particular product in those groups of times,

 

for the year. And in order to answer that you need to know some basic things about your primary offer. First, first of all, what is it cost? And secondly, what is your capacity? Your capacity is how many people you can serve at once. So what is the cost of your offer and how many people can you actually have based on your business capacity,

 

serving during those times of the year that you need to sell your primary offer. And then once you’ve gone through it for your primary offer, then you’re going to rinse and repeat the same step for any other offers. You have secondary offers, digital products, quick grab things that might not require so much of your time. So first I want you to do it for your primary sales objective,

 

your primary signature program service, whatever it is, you do know how much it costs and ask yourself how many people can I serve at a time. And these numbers become really sobering for some businesses. You may realize that with your offer, the way that it is, you can never reach your financial benchmarks. And I’ll talk to you about what to do here in a second.

 

Give that to you then. And again, I want you to rinse and repeat this for any other offers that you have. And so you’re going to end up with some basic but powerful math and these answers to these math questions or really sobering. So you will learn that you possibly need to alter and change some of your products, business model to serve more people,

 

to reach your financial benchmarks. And this is what we call scaling. This is what my company does. This is our Ninja skill. We help companies take your assets and scale them with other online business models and offers, and is a side note. If you’re ready to scale, then you know where to come. But if you’re looking at your offers and saying,

 

wow, I have this really amazing. Let’s say, for example, you are a career coach have this really amazing career coaching, but it’s one-on-one. So we need to, to create other opportunities for you to bring in more streams of income, using your expertise, your intellectual property, your content, and your assets, so that you can still keep your one-on-one clients.

 

But then we’re adding more revenue through scaling by other offers. So this math is really going to let you, you know, Hey, does my current business model actually support the lifestyle I really, really want? And then here is the next part. This is the part that most business coaches, well not tell you. So we have this number, right?

 

We have this dollar amount that you need to hit in order to be able to take the other time off, to head to that mastermind, to pay for that mastermind for him and sakes. So the other sobering reality, every single entrepreneur should know and opens up the world of sales. Statistics is the average sales conversion rate is 3%. Now, every industry is totally different.

 

This is just generally speaking, but this is the baseline number to start with. I’ve done a ton of podcast, by the way, you guys, on how to increase your conversion rates. And as an example, most of our clients close it over 80% with their sales calls. But the reality is is if you’re selling like a digital product or a low touch sales funnel,

 

let’s just call it 3%. I would rather underestimate and have you underestimate than overestimate. So if we have our dollar amount, right, that you have to hit, right for your primary offers and your secondary offers taking the percentage that 3% are going to convert. This is your next question. You need to ask yourself how many people do you need to reach in order to convert the numbers of products you need to sell to reach your financial benchmarks at 3%.

 

So if you need to sell $300,000 to sustain the life that you want, that your company, and this is all growth, but $300,000, and let’s say your product or your service is worth 10,000, then you need to sell 30 of them, right? Basic math. But now here’s the reality check. Now ask yourself, 30 sales is 3% of what number in.

 

This is a number of people you need to reach in your marketing in order to hit that financial benchmark. And the answer to that is a thousand. So if you you’re wrapping up your really plan and you want to mindfully create your marketing strategy around the number of people you need to reach, not the number of people you want to sell. I need to know that you know that number.

 

So if you need to sell 30 of your primary offer or your combination of offers in order to hit the sales conversion yeah. And that you want, how many people do you need to reach? And as you’re going back to your map, your map, I call it map. Everything’s a map in my head. As you’re going back to your calendar could a map,

 

right? As you’re going back to your calendar, make sure that you are blocking off your marketing time out on your calendar, that you are enabling for ample warm up time with your audience, ample relationship, building time, grassroots marketing on top of the regular digital marketing strategies so that we can increase your conversion rates to exceed your baseline sales needs and expectations.

 

So this is all about planning and calendar planning, but it’s important that you know, the difference between how many you want to sell and based on basic sales conversions, how many people you need to reach, because we have to plan your marketing and your strategy, the time in your calendar to make sure that you are nailing it. Well, I hope that makes sense.

 

Again, if you want me to roll up my sleeves with you in there and talk about these numbers we can do. So, and the workshop that I am teaching in Sweetlife community.com in December, you can join me over there and I’ll give you some extra help with this and really work through, take your personal questions. I’d love to see you in there.

 

So in summary, wrapping it all up here for you to plan your year for freedom. First, you start with blocking out what you personally professionally need. That’s a very first thing to block out in your calendar. If you don’t do it, you guys it’s never, ever going to happen. Then you reverse engineer the numbers, hand in hand with your calendar to make sure that you have planned the marketing programs and the service delivery systems in conjunction with the sales to reach those numbers.

 

In most cases, you’ll realize it’s time to scale that you’re going to have to change some of your offers, maybe add some additional revenue streams of income so that you can work less utilizing the assets you already have in order to hit the numbers and reach the lifestyle for you and that you want. So whether you’re heading on a family reunion or are going with your girlfriends to hike the John Muir trail lifestyle freedoms,

 

the reason why you became an entrepreneur, right? So let’s make sure that you’re planning your year in advance and you’re crunching the numbers. You’re creating the programs and the offers that are actually going to get you there. So I hope you found this episode helpful. I hope this wasn’t the first time that you were aware of the percentage of, of sales conversions and how to plan that into your marketing time and strategy.

 

But if it is, I’m so glad that you were here, it’s a really sobering non-sexy number that really opens up how important marketing your business is. And so today we talked about knowing how to lay out your whole entire year for lifestyle freedom, making sure you’re laying out your things you need first. Otherwise it never happened. We talked about being able to assess what changes you might need to scale your current offers or change a business model in order to reach your lifestyle goals and to do so.

 

We need to reach your financial benchmarks. And we talked about knowing this basic math and making sure that you’re looking at your numbers and they’re going to tell you, do I need to change my offer? Do I need to make it more of a higher value? What do I need to do to my offer my program, my service in order to be able to charge that or do I need to scale other things that I already have?

 

So I hope you guys found this helpful. I love chatting with you. Welcome to December. I’m so glad we’re here. I hope that your holiday season is kicking off and that you’re just having a great time, that you’re super healthy, where you are and spending time with those people. You love again, cruise over to Sweetlife community.com. If you want to join me in there and connect with us further,

 

and thank you for tuning into this show, please share it with your friends. All the show notes can be found at Sweetlife co Right? I’ll talk to you soon.

Episode 202: Tactics To Becoming A Confident Introverted Entrepreneur – Stephanie Thoma

Stephanie Toma SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join our online community to start networking confidently in our monthly coffee connection. 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my business growth system who are introverts. You love who you are, but know that being a little “type A” could grow your business a lot.

Summary:

This episode is for entrepreneurs who are introverted but know you need to become more of an extrovert to share your business with others. It can feel like a challenge and our guest today, Stephanie Thoma, author of The Confident Introvert, is here to help.  In this short episode, you’ll learn simple strategies to become more comfortable outside of your comfort zone. Plus, we also do a little practice session in this episode to help you relax. This is a great show for those who really prefer your own company but know your business needs to be shared.

At the End of This Episode You Will:

  1. Feel most settled about being an introvert in an extroverted world
  2. Have meditation/prayer practice to calm your nerves
  3. Understand how to manage external communications while remaining the introverted person you love to be.

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome back again to this sweet life entrepreneur podcast today, Or talking specifically with those of you who feel like you are an introvert and you’re an entrepreneur you want to lead in your space,

 

but there are some different social barriers that you have trouble approaching and crossing as an introvert and the work that you do in your business. You want it to feel authentic, how you show up on social media. You want it to be authentic to who you are, and you really love your comfort zone. And so today on the show, we’re talking to Stephanie Toma and Stephanie is truly an expert at helping those of you who are introverts to really step out and lead in your space.

 

She is a networking strategy coach event, host and founder of the confident introvert. She’s also an author of a new book that came out this past June called the confident introvert. She is an introvert herself and she’s facilitated over a thousand events and established a fulfilling career. Helping people generate meaningful connections at online and in-person events. And her mission is to help you feel confident and establish really amazing business relationships that catapult you forward in your career.

 

Stephanie has been featured by Forbes business, insider entrepreneur thrive global, and so many other places, including being invited to speak at Harvard, Northwestern, and Boston universities, as well as internationally to date, Stephanie has helped thousands of people just like you. You’re an entrepreneur, or you want to step into leadership. She’s helped thousands of people like you to make sure that you can celebrate your strengths as who you are and be authentic with confidence and make meaningful connections.

 

It’s not sounding so great. I’ll be honest with you. I learned so much. I’m not an introvert. I’m definitely an extrovert. And so many of the strategies we talked about on today’s show, including like a quick short guided meditation that we went through was so powerful. So this show is for you introvert entrepreneurs, but it also is for those of you guys that might actually be going so fast at a trillion gazillion miles an hour,

 

that you need some resetting techniques too. So I was so excited to invite Stephanie onto the show. At the end of this show, you are going to have solutions to how to approach anxiety and different hacks to get through times when you’re anxious, you are going to know how to approach social media as an introvert and how to show up across social media.

 

And you’re going to get tips on how to network, even though we’re talking about online networking, how to network confidently and different web apps, strategies, and different ways that you can connect with people that isn’t just doing it cold really ways to enter you into relationships with people in a way that feels confident to you. So if all that sounds great, stick around because we’re going to dive in all the show notes from today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com,

 

including all of the business programs available to you to develop your programs, your signature offers, and your 2021 business strategy cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. We’re here to help. Let’s go ahead and dive in.<inaudible> All right. Hey, you guys, April here and I am joined by Stephanie Toma. And today we are talking, especially to all of you introverts out there.

 

You are experts your leaders, your entrepreneurs, your creatives, you know, you are where exactly where you’re supposed to be, but maybe there are some struggles that you have that other entrepreneurs may not have as far as how to be confident and own who you are as a person and the business side of it. And that is why Stephanie Toma is here on the show today.

 

Stephanie, thank you so much for joining us. Tell us a little bit about you and your area of expertise when it comes to confident introvert entrepreneurship. Yes. Hey April, thank you for having me. So my company is competent introvert and there are a few different tiers there. I do individual coaching focused on leadership development and also a variety of webinars focused on networking,

 

remotely, networking in person, and also cultivating authentic competence. That’s rooted from within. I’m certainly not about faking it until you make it. It’s about actually from a root level, understanding what are the roadblocks and navigating those to have an authentic sense of confidence that is unshakable, even as an introvert, there’s such a common misconception that if you get your energy from solitude,

 

which is the definition of introversion, that, Oh, you’re meant to be a wallflower and that’s not true as introverts. We can authentically connect with more than just one person it’s quite possible, but there are just little tweaks that can help us navigate social spaces. I love what you said. If you get your energy from solitude, I never realized that was the definition.

 

I’ve actually think there’s probably a lot of people that can relate to that and be like, Oh gosh, maybe, maybe I do have some, some aspects or characteristics of introvert than I, then I didn’t even realize that, you know, people just really, really get their energy from that space. So thank you so much for being on the show and you are the author of a new book.

 

We want to make sure that you mentioned that just came out for those of you introverts. Tell us really quick about your book. Yes. Yeah. So competent introvert, a practical Guide to connecting with others at networking events and beyond it came out this past June. And it’s all about how to go from point a to point B point a being I would like to connect with people.

 

I would like to get out there and grow in my career, whatever that looks like. I like to become clear on my goals and achieve them become successful, but how do I get there? So this book really fills in those gaps and leverages the most fun way to get ahead in your career, which is through making authentic friendships, which is your network and coming from a place of,

 

okay, how can I help people? And then, Oh, I have a bunch of friends and maybe I can ask for help when I need it. And it becomes this really synergistic sort of experience, but it’s all about taking the first step and beginning to network. So basically I have hosted over 1000 networking events and before I hosted network events, I was attending them.

 

So that’s what prompted writing the book. I realized that there’s magic and there’s learning in numbers and having been to a high volume and hosted them. I was really excited to put pen to paper and just let this flow out of me last year. I love that what an amazing resource for people. And so you have attended thousands of events, you’ve hosted over a thousand events and you are stereotypically.

 

What somebody would say is, yeah, I’m an introvert. And so this like really leads us into the very first step that you’re going to share with us today. Let’s talk about just some general anxieties for introverts and some of the things that introverts experience that other entrepreneurs might not experience as far as from the social emotional standpoint at these events. Can you share a little bit about what that feels like for an introvert versus somebody who’s just super out there and in everybody’s business and face like me?

 

Yeah. And Hey, it’s great. We need both ways that everyone shows up, but I would say that one of our core needs is to feel understood and to be understood. So there are a couple of different areas of dissonance that introverts specifically can come up against in a networking capacity. One scenario is everyone thinks I’m so quiet. If I speak up,

 

then it contradicts what people expected me and what I expect of myself and not as uncomfortable. So that’s one way. And then the other way, this is what I more recently have sort of encountered, which is people assuming that I am an extrovert because I have developed social skills and I use them actively. So there can be this dissonance of, Oh,

 

I’m quiet. Everyone thinks I’m quiet. I don’t want to be different than that. Or Whoa. Everyone thinks that I get my energy from others because I can talk with people, but it’s like the secret that I’m an introvert. Interesting. I mean, I can’t exactly understand, but I can see how that, that would be stressful. And so from an anxiety standpoint,

 

how do you manage the anxiety of attending these types of events or frankly, how do you manage the anxiety of operating as a founder, as a CEO and as an introvert? What are some of those anxieties? Yes. So in a virtual world, one of the ways that we can alleviate anxiety is by taking steps to avoid burnout. I mean, I’m sure you’ve probably experienced zoom fatigue.

 

It’s just a guess. It’s super common just when you bond, like from one event, the other to the other and you realize, Oh, I should be energized. I’m just sitting in my chair for eight hours straight and not doing anything. It should be fine. However, we find ourselves depleted and the antidote to that is a concept from my book,

 

competent introvert, it’s called a solitude sandwich. Essentially, we can do this with our socialize. We can do this during the Workday. We can translate this in person or online. And basically what that means is the contents of the sandwich. The meat of it. If you’re vegetarian, let’s go with some PB and J that’s your activity. That is what you’re actively engaging in.

 

Maybe it is a phone call with someone, maybe it’s going out to dinner, whatever it is, making sure that on either end of the activity before and after you have a little bit of a buffer to let’s say, go on a walk, take a stretch break. Or one of my favorites is meditation. And that kind of leads me to the next tip,

 

which is to engage in a meditation practice. If you don’t already, do you meditate? Is that a part of yours? Yeah. So I meditate and pray, and that is, I actually start every Monday morning. That way I don’t feel like I need to as much throughout the day, but when I’m coaching sometimes a big stretch day. So like an intensive day with the client,

 

I absolutely have to back away with zero stimulation, at least halfway through it to recharge it. Yes. And you know, I’d say for introvert specifically, what can cause us a lot of anxiety and strife is overthinking and you know, I have joked with people. Well, I think other people just under think, you know, like maybe I’m thinking enough and it’s fine,

 

but you know, sometimes I’m like, wait, there can be thoughts that are ruminating and you feel like your wheels are spinning and there isn’t a lot of traction and it’s not benefiting you in any way. So what meditation does is it acts as a way to clear the mental fog. And if there’s any confusion about what are the next steps in my life that I should take,

 

or do I want to go to this event? What do I want in my life? What do I want out of this event? You know, I really view it as being such a powerful tool to be in. And So many people use this tool, but are doing so wonderfully in their careers. It’s pretty much a best kept secret and it’s not exclusive to monks or to people and,

 

you know, praying contacts it’s really accessible to all of us. And a great way to introduce yourself to meditation is with a mindfulness meditation technique. So I call it the breath of four, four, four. It’s pretty easy to remember. And if you’re feeling stressed or feeling anxious, this could be a foreign event. Or before you go to sleep,

 

when you wake up, whatever that anxiety pops up, just taking a comfortable seat, rolling your shoulders back and just breathing in through the nose for four counts. And you can do this with me. I do this, I love doing this stuff. We’ll do it here. If you got listening with us, you Guys can do it right here on the podcast with us.

 

Okay. So if you’re driving eyes open, if you’re so breathing in through the nose for one, two, okay. See, this is why I’m addicted to yoga, Lots of yoga. So these techniques, these anxiety techniques, what’s so great about this particular show. I mean, they really aren’t just for introverts. These apply to all of us with a really high level high stimulus world.

 

And so those are certainly important, but I definitely can see why they’re so much more important to an introvert leader to be able to strategically think and thrive. And there’s so many different parts of being a leader in this space that require you to be articulate and, you know, be proactive and be that leader in that, in that area. But I certainly see how that could be a struggle as well.

 

When we are talking about leadership for introverts. One of the questions that I get all the time is from clients and podcast listeners in general and just across social media, is it as an introvert. I hear a lot from people that they feel like they need to be present on social media. They need to be doing Instagram lives or Facebook lives, or they need to be out there really in a raw live capacity.

 

But that is not within who they are as a person. And it may or may not actually align with the brand they’re building for their company. How do you recommend, or what tips do you have for introverts that really feel like they may or may not. I mean, this is a whole business strategy question, but just generally for them, let’s say they really do need to be active on social media.

 

They do need to be doing live streams. They do need to be guesting on podcasting, do need to be present. How did you help introverts approach those types of things that are completely out of their comfort zone and frankly, they don’t even want to do. Yeah. Okay. You bring up such a great point because I get this all the time with my clients as well.

 

I don’t want to be visible. I don’t want to be the center of attention, or I don’t want to take up more space than other people because why should I should let other people speak? And from a certain standpoint, it’s like, okay, we can rationalize and say, you know what? I don’t need to do that. So I won’t,

 

but that’s how you stay small. And when you become about something greater than yourself, which is the reason why you have a business, because it’s not just about you, this isn’t a big ego trip. You know, if it is then maybe rethink your entrepreneurship, ideally you’re driven by a mission that extends beyond yourself and a part of getting that mission out there and helping people is being visible.

 

So even though it’s uncomfortable, I will say repetition for effect. So I’ve hosted so many events. And before that I attended so many events. And what do you think it was like when I very first started? Was it seamless? Was it perfect? Was it credible? No, it was not. But I mean, and that’s kind of an extreme example.

 

You don’t need to attend a thousand events before you’re comfortable, you know, it’ll happen sooner, but then the more you do something, there will be so much dissonance. If you dislike it and you keep doing it. So you learn, Oh, I kind of like that part of it. And then over time there are studies that suggest that the more you see someone,

 

the more likely you are to like them. So these, there are studies that suggest this, like at the word hand, for, within your home environment, you know, ideally. Yeah. So it would make sense if the more you do something and you don’t do it with the intention about why have to, even the referrals I get to, I am in such a privileged place that I get to attend this event and learn about this topic and meet others who are also interested in learning.

 

Yeah. So I’m hearing you say, it’s basically the response to a question that we ask our clients, what will happen to your people. If you do not show up for them, what’s going to happen to them? Like what is going to happen to them? If you do not, if they don’t hear about your services, if they don’t hear about your offer,

 

if they don’t experience the transformation that you deliver within your book or your program or your mastermind or whatever it is, what’s going to happen to them. So I love that. And that certainly does put it in perspective because it has nothing to do with the leader themselves. It’s all about who they’re called to serve and change. And then the other thing I heard you say was that repetition is going to make it easier.

 

Each time you do it, you got to show up. It’s not about you. It has nothing do with you actually whatsoever. And it’s really going to get easier each time you do it. So I love those encouraging words and it is, it’s so important because every single entrepreneur is different. Everybody brings something different to the table and there’s nobody like you and nobody will be out there.

 

If you aren’t out there, you won’t be out there. And that’s a big thing. So kind of trying to transition this a little bit here. So we have these online events, right? Or we have the social media we’re out there and being present. But what we also know is it, regardless of all the social media in the world, posting that you’re doing,

 

what really builds business is relationships. Relationships are what increase sales, bring other people into your business, word of mouth, nothing builds a company like relationships. And so with these introverts, what tips do you have for introverts for actually networking and building relationships online? The yes. I mean, we can talk about, we could do a whole show on in-person networking events,

 

but you know, right now, what do you recommend as far as how to go in network remotely, how to reach out and make those first connections. How to go about doing that as an introvert. So many introverts myself included, tend to really thrive when it comes to communicating. One-on-one maybe it’s not our first choice to be on a stage, but you can get there if you want to be there.

 

Right? So I would say that, especially if you are wanting to ramp up your networking and you do feel, let’s say a bit of social anxiety or just don’t get your energy from that, then one way to start is by doing one-on-one networking experiences. So there are a few apps, including lunch club, Bumble, biz, and shaper. And those apps,

 

what they’ll do is they will match you with a new professional every week. And so you could meet up to five people and one week, if you choose to, and you know, you can meet with them from anywhere from 30 minutes to an hour, and you just never know where these conversations will go, but what’s great about them is that you don’t necessarily need to go out there and find someone,

 

you know, this person wants to connect. So there’s a little bit less of that factor of I’m going up to this person. Are they interested in connecting? I mean, chances are, if they’re out of virtual event, they probably are, but it’s more foolproof this way. And then let’s say, if you are interested in connecting with someone and you’ve attended a virtual event,

 

be that person who in the chat feature drops their LinkedIn link and says, Hey, I’d love to connect and invites people. So what I have found in my experience as an introvert and event hosts is it’s so gratifying to have people come to you. You know, when you’re the host or when you are extending an invitation, then it really does open doors for you that you wouldn’t necessarily know to open yourself.

 

And also attending events that have a specified networking portion. There are a lot of really great tools right now. You know, I’ve used icebreaker a lot. There’s also teleport and other different online one-on-one connection games where they could be an entire virtual event or they can be a component. But if you are looking to connect with people and don’t necessarily want to do it completely from scratch,

 

have a warm lead, so to speak, then that’s certainly one way to go about it. That is so smart. As we were driving into this section, I was thinking that you were going to share with us just how to send a cold message to somebody on LinkedIn, asking them to have virtual coffee. And I identify that. I was like,

 

gosh, that would be a really big thing. I imagine for an introvert, these tips are so good. And the fact that we’ll make sure all of these resources are shared in the show notes for you guys who are listening. So all these things from the shaper of the lunch club, but Bumble, biz, icebreaker, teleport, and obviously every place else where you can find Stephanie,

 

we’re going to make sure they’re on the show notes for you guys. Stephanie, thank you so much for your time today. This is a great show and it isn’t a topic we’ve really hit on very much. I think we had a show about introvert entrepreneurship about three years ago. And I still remember that realizing that there are so many different aspects of leadership that truly need to be approached in a different manner for different types of leaders.

 

And, and I love that this is your area of expertise, so thank you so much. And then also for our listeners that are like, Oh my gosh, this is me. You know, she’s speaking my language. They Kevin’s talk a little bit about, you have a help sheet that we’re going to include in the show notes here about the working remotely resources sheet.

 

Is that, is that include some of the resources you’ve mentioned or what are our listeners going to get out of that bonus to this episode? Yes. Okay. I’m so glad that you’re asking about that. So that is just an easy one page cheat sheet of different tactics from my networking remotely webinar, but also we did touch on a few of them in this call as well.

 

So yeah, I would certainly say if you’re interested in just a refresher from this conversation and to perhaps learn about new concepts as well, that can help you in your online networking journey, then you’ll want to go to Stephanie toma.com/freebie and that Stephanie T H O M a.com. Perfect. Perfect. And then for Stephanie’s coaching programs, we’ll make sure a link to her coaching program is in that is in the show notes for this episode as well.

 

Stephanie, thank you so very much, any last words you’d like to leave for our introvert founders and CEOs listening to this episode? Yes. So I would like to leave everyone with just the sentiment that if you are listening to this podcast and thinking, you know, it seems a little bit of a reach. I’m not sure if I a leader, I Know that I’m an introvert,

 

but I don’t, you know, the thing’s kind of stretchy for me, just knowing that having the desire to lead and having a mission greater than yourself is the first step. And I truly believe that everyone can lead once you have that clarity of what you want to stand for and lead with that’s so, so good. Thank you so much, Stephanie.

 

We really appreciate you. Yes. Thank you for having me April<inaudible>. Thank you so much for tuning into today’s show. Again, this was Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, episode number 202, and Stephanie Toma was our expert guests today on the show to find all of the resources that we talked about, including how to find Stephanie’s networking, remotely strategy sheet, all of the apps that she mentioned on today’s show ways that you can work with Stephanie and she can help you walk into your authentic leadership and how to get your hands on Stephanie’s new book,

 

please cruise to Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 202. I’ll see you soon. Have a great week. You guys

Episode 201: How To Beta Test Your Online Program To Save Time and Money – Kendra Perry

Kendra Perry SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

JOIN OUR ONLINE COMMUNITY for monthly masterclasses and no opt-in podcast bonuses. 

Who This Episode is Great For:

If you’re in the process of launching a new online program, course, or other virtual group service, and you want to be sure its the right fit for your audience, this show will teach you how to use a beta-launch strategy, the steps to a successful beta launch and how to make sure your new program is a success.

Summary:

You’re working hard to create an online course or program, and you want to conduct a “beta-launch” but you aren’t sure how to do it successfully and whether or not it’s even needed for your program. In this show, we dive deep with Kendra Perry, host of the 360 Health Biz Podcast, to talk all about beta launches. You’ll the timeline to launch your beta program, how to test your business model, how to charge for your beta launch, and why it all ties into a higher profit full-launch in the future. If you’ve ever thought about a beta-launch but we’re sure how to manage one, this episode gives you all the answers.

Highlights:

  1. How/if you charge a fee for your beta launch
  2. What you’re looking to achieve in a successful beta launch
  3. The exact steps to conduct your beta launch 
  4. How many people you want in a successful beta launch

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey everybody. Welcome to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, episode number two, 201 I’m April beach business strategist for experts, leaders, entrepreneurs, and small businesses. And you are here listening to our show that delivers you proven,

 

trusted trainings that other coaches charge thousands of dollars for. We’re rolling up on doing this for you for about four years now. And I love that you’re here tuned into this show, all of the resources and the show notes and the programs available to help you grow and scale your business online can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. We have some amazing things coming up for you,

 

experts and leaders, to make sure we elevate you in your space, especially rolling into 2021. So make sure you cruise over to Sweetlife co.com for all of our intensive mastermind and group consulting programs. Now diving into today’s show. I am super thrilled to be joined by our guest expert. And today we’re talking to all about beta testing, your online program launch.

 

And so this episode particularly is for those of you guys you’re launching an online course or an online membership community or a group program. You know, you have a general outline of what you want to do for your people, for your students, for your clients. But some of the problems we have are going through all the heavy lifting all the work to actually create that ahead of time,

 

and then having a program that frankly doesn’t sell. And so this episode is going to save you time, money. It’s going to reduce the stress around a full, complete launch, because we’re diving into the importance of beta testing your program. In this show, we’re going to talk about different steps to go through in order to beta test your program, what you have to do in order to get that kicked off the ground and what you really should be looking for in a beta test.

 

Why are you beta testing? And our guest expert today has done the same thing as I’ve done. She has built a whole entire program and never sold any of it before. And so we want to save you time and energy and money. So that, that doesn’t happen to you. Today’s expert is Kendra Perry. She’s a former functional health coach turned online business strategists for health and wellness coaches.

 

She’s on a mission to end the online coaching poverty by helping a hundred thousand health and wellness coaches build a thriving six figure businesses. And currently to date, she’s helped 200 health coaches grow their practice. Now, Kendra is awesome. You guys know me. You’ve been listening to the show for awhile. I’m an action sports. As far as the ocean girl,

 

Kendra is a fired up action sports adventure, and you can find her hanging out in the remote mountains of beautiful British Columbia treads in there in the snow, in the middle of nowhere when she is not totally delved into her business and marketing, and also her podcast. You’re going to learn about Kendra’s podcast today on the show. So she’s a creator of the wealthy coach accelerator,

 

and she helps coaches really create profitable group coaching systems and really make sure that if you’re a health and wellness coach, the things that you are building are in fact not just needed but wanted. And so that’s what we’re diving into into today’s show. At the end of today’s episode, you are going to understand what a beta launch is. You are going to generally have a really good understanding of how to go about a beta launch and what are the benefits of doing a beta launch first?

 

And we’re talking about whether or not you should offer your beta launch for free, or you should charge for it. All of this is in this week, sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, and all the show notes, everything we talk about, how to find Kendra, how to get the resources we have available here within Sweetlife company for you to grow your business purposefully,

 

profitably, and intentionally can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. All right, let’s dive in.<inaudible> All right. You guys welcome back to the podcast. I’m here with Kendra Perry. And today we are talking about something that is truly going to save you money, save you time and make sure you don’t have a mental breakdown is Kendra. And I talked about and chatted about behind the scenes.

 

So we started recording. You know, we know many of you are launching online programs. You’re, you’re scaling your business. You experts, you leaders out there, you small businesses shoot you big businesses out there are looking at creating amazing online programs to scale your business faster. But all things we create don’t actually win the way that we want them to.

 

In sometimes we as business owners, I’m raising my hand here. If you’re watching the video version of this have launched things in the past, Kendra’s raising her hand to where we think it’s awesome. We launched the whole thing, and then it’s totally bunk because we didn’t beta test it. So today on the show, Kendra is here to talk to you all about how to beta test your online program so that you don’t fall on your face and lose your ass.

 

Kendra, thank you so much for being on the show. Give everybody an introduction to you, who you are and, and why you’re so passionate about this topic. Well, thank you so much. I’m so excited to be here. I’ve been listening to your podcast for a little while, so it feels kind of like a band girl in a little bit on this side.

 

So thank so. Yeah, I’m Kendra Perry and I help health coaches start their business. Health coaches tend to be very clueless about the business side of things. They just want to help people. And then they’re like, Oh crap, I got to run a business and I don’t even know what I’m doing. So that’s sort of where I come in now,

 

why I’m so passionate about beta programs is because, well, I did that whole thing that April just described, you know, I spent six to eight months creating this program that I thought was amazing. I put a lot of time into it. I put a lot of money into it. I worked on the weekends. I sacrificed my relationship with my partner.

 

Like he probably wanted to dump me during that time. And then I put it out there and I pumped all this money into the launch and ads and like this webinar and like, I didn’t get one sale. It never even occurred to me. Like, as I’m running this webinar, I’m sitting around, post-its like probably 30. Post-its that say $15,000 on them because I was like,

 

I’m going to make $15,000. This is what’s happening. If I surround myself with these, post-its it’ll happen because I’m manifesting it and it didn’t happen at all. And I was like, it never even occurred to me that that would happen. And I was like so perplexed and it really like traumatized me. And then I relaunched this thing three more times over the next couple of months at night,

 

I think I ended up making a couple of sales. So I lost a ton of money, like thousands of dollars and my sanity complete mental breakdown. Right. And it’s because what I knew my people needed and what they wanted were not aligned. It was not the same thing had I beta tested. I actually would have learned that like a year earlier.

 

So that’s why I’m so passionate about this. Okay. Let’s just stop there. And let’s just repeat what you just said, what your people needed versus what they wanted were not exactly the same thing. We could just end the podcast right there with that. I think that that is a huge disconnect for business leaders, especially, you know, you guys are listening to this show,

 

you’re experts in your space, you know what they actually need because you’re the expert. Right. You know what they really, really need, but it doesn’t mean that that’s actually what they want for a whole bunch of different reasons, which we’re going to talk about. I’m sure on today’s show. So what exactly is like, how do you define a beta test Kendra?

 

Sure. So you can kind of think of a beta test is like a trial run of your program. And you can do this for a private coaching program. You can do it for a group coaching program. You can do it for a membership program, basically any new program. It’s the first time you run it and you run it strategically so that you can get feedback from the real life people.

 

So you can figure out where the gaps are and where people are confused. And then you can get the information ahead of time. Is this actually going to sell it space as a way to pre validate and prove yourself, Oh, this is going to sell or it has sold. Therefore I should make it instead of making the whole thing and then it out there and realizing That nobody wants it.

 

Right. I have a question that I want to ask, but I’m going to actually hold this question for a little bit. Cause I think that you might get to it. How often do you find, because you coach health coaches, how often do you find that coaches actually do this? Never. Okay. So if you’re listening and you haven’t done this,

 

you’re not alone. I think a lot of people necessarily know about it, I think. And I think it logically, it makes sense while I create the thing and then I sell it. But when you’re beta testing, you’re bringing in this whole concept of pre-selling. So you’re selling something before it’s made. And that seems really counterintuitive and also incredibly intimidating because you’re like,

 

well, if I sell it, I don’t have it. So right. How does that even make sense? Right. But it actually does make sense, but it just doesn’t logically kind of connect in their head. Right. And so really what I’m hearing you say is the benefits of beta testing is really making sure that it is desirable. People do want it.

 

And you know, I think I first heard this concept you’re right. It scared the shit out of me. When I first heard this, I was, Oh gosh, this is like, feeling like it’s dating me. I was on Lewis Howes book launch for school of greatness, like 2013 or something. And a really small group of people that was like only 40 or 50 minutes in this beta launch and listening to some of these online course creators.

 

And, and these guys were selling their programs in that were, were on this beta team before they’d ever built them. And I remember thinking to myself, because I’m such a strategist, like freaking out about that thinking, there’s no way I could sell something that I haven’t built yet. And just absolutely panicking about that flash forward though. Like I was sharing in the beginning,

 

I have launched stuff since then, that has been totally bunk because I never tested it that way. So you’re right. I mean that initially when you guys hear this, it’s going to be like, Oh my gosh, this is so scary. But what happens is like, exactly, like you said, you’re totally validating what it is that you have and that it is needed in the market.

 

So what steps do you need to take before you run your beta test? Talk to us about that. Okay. So the first thing that you need in place, and I’m sure you’ve talked about this with your audience, and I’m a, like a broken record about this. I like am like constantly punching this into people’s head, but you need to know the who the problem and the solution.

 

Right. Which is essentially the niche you need to know your niche. You can’t just sell like a general basic program. Like it needs to be specifically for someone and it needs to solve a specific problem and give a specific outcome. So who is the program for, what does it solve for them and what outcome does it help them achieve? And that needs to be incredibly clear.

 

And if you don’t know what that is, then that’s where you need to start. Like don’t even consider launching a program. I see a lot in the health coaching World, they launched, Oh, this is my detox program. And it’ll help you solve fatigue, brain fog, joint pain, leaky gut. You’re going to lose weight too. And like,

 

yeah. Okay. We know in health and wellness that these basic strategies can help with a lot of things, but people don’t know this. They’re just like, well, I’m fucking tired, but you’re promising too many things. So now it seems inauthentic. Yeah. And I think, let me ask you this too. You know, we, we talked to a lot of business owners that are launching membership sites,

 

right? So the business strategy, the business model of a membership site is to keep people in your membership site. And so you’re always, so in your mind, as a membership program, creator, you are always thinking I need to come up with more content, more content to keep them in there, keeping them engaged. Yes. All that is true,

 

but there still has to be an injury result. It could get in result of each month. It could be an injury is all to be tweaked. And this is like my broken record. Like you have to have predictable transformational results within any single program, whether it’s in a day and an hour and a week. And these like benchmarks that people can measure to go through.

 

And I totally see that too. You’re so right about how, like, people don’t know how to explain, like when you do this well, or when you’re done with this or at the end of this, you’re going to have these, you know, things. Yeah. Okay. So obviously step number one is knowing the end result you provide, even if it’s an ongoing end result for those of you guys that are launching membership sites,

 

you are not exempt from this. You have to know that. Yeah. Because there’s that maintenance piece too. And if I’m speaking to health and wellness, if we use fatigue, it’s like the membership helps them get more energy, but they stay in the membership to keep their energy. Right. Right. There are still measurable results. Okay. So that was my,

 

I just was dealing with that with some clients this week who have a really successful membership site. That’s falling off. They’ve had literally thousands of people in it it’s falling off because of that fact that they haven’t really measured the end Results in that totally aside from this, but just for you, guys’ membership people. So step number one is obviously knowing the,

 

who the problem you’re solving and the solutions you deliver. Okay. Totally great. Yeah. And then next, what you want to do once that’s done, you kind of can create the program structure, but you’re literally just creating like an outline for the program. Like what’s the timeline? Is this going to be a four week 90 day, a six month?

 

Like, what is the timeline of the program? How are you going to set up the calls? You know, in the case of a private coaching program, how often are you going to meet? What types of sessions are you going to have? If it’s a group program, when are the training calls? When are the Q and a calls membership as an example,

 

like what are they getting monthly in terms of call in terms of content, whatever that is, you can set up the structure and you can make a basic outline for what you’re going to cover in each sort of training call or education session. But that’s, as far as you go, because you really like, I teach people to launch with an idea or an outline.

 

So like, this is the program, this is generally what it’s going to look like, but I’m not going to spend the next three to six months, like video recording all of the content because you’re going to actually run the program live again, whether that’s private membership or a group program with a fixed date, it’s live right. You’re running it live.

 

And that’s how you can launch with an outline because you’re not prerecording anything. Right? Yeah, absolutely. Anything else we should have done before somebody runs his beta? Honestly, That’s it, because I think with a beta in order to test something five to 10, people will do it right for a first round and you don’t need a fancy launch strategy to get five to 10 people.

 

A lot of my clients are literally just doing direct outreach. They’re like writing a list of people who they think would be interested in the program and they’re reaching out or saying, Hey, I’m thinking of doing this. Would you be interested? And I think that’s totally fine. Sure. If you have launch skills and you know how to launch, you can launch a beta with a fancy launch style.

 

That’s what I just said. I literally just launched a beta that finished enrollment on Friday and it had the whole fancy webinars sales sequence thing. But as someone who’s newer, like you don’t need any of that. Like you were literally just need a payment link and then some direct outreach to get someone. So kind of depends on where you are in your business.

 

But if you don’t have anything you don’t need much. Yeah. And I love that. You just said that because that’s so true. And I think I’m in the whole launch strategy and process really holds people up, especially when they’re in newly developing their program. And they’re newly learning how to the whole launch strategy. It’s just a lot at once. Okay.

 

So now I’m going to go back and ask this question that I was thinking about asking you earlier, do you recommend, so business model, so you were talking about, you know, we have to know you call it a structure of your program. I call it the business model of the program in a beta. Do you recommend that your people run it on a condensed business model or a condensed structure,

 

or actually, do you feel like it needs to be the exact structure they’re proposing? If the structure actually aligns with the results they get, what do you think about that? So I think it could go either way now with my people. I recommend that they do it on the timeline, just because health is really hard to speed up, you know,

 

for people to get Results like they need time to implement, but it could, you could run it on like a quicker or condensed timeline, I think would be to be something where you’re teaching like business strategies or something like that. I think you could definitely do that, I think either way, but it probably depends on your industry. Yeah. Great tips.

 

Okay. So how do we actually run a beta program for free? How do we go through that process? What is the value in that? And really the question I can ask you, because we see this all the time is how to keep people engaged when you’re giving them something away for free. You know, there’s always some sort of skin in the game thing,

 

especially, well, I actually don’t, I don’t think I would ever recommend doing a beta for free or like offering it for free. I think people have much of a stake and things they get for free. Right? So a lot of the language around running a beta is to offer it for free, but I just don’t think you get committed people.

 

And the point of the beta is to test and get people to go through it. And I honestly think, and I don’t know who said this, that the transformation is in the transaction. I don’t know who to give credit to, but I’ve heard that before. And I truly believe it. People have to give away something that hurts just a little bit in order to be engaged and committed.

 

And most people, I know who’ve run free betas. Like a lot of people drop off. So I think people should charge for it. But I think they should probably charge maybe around half of what they ultimately want to charge for the non-banks. Yeah. I’m glad you said that. Yeah. We just did a beta of our masterclass, your signature offer and it was half the cost,

 

which is still hundreds and hundreds of dollars. Yeah. Yeah. I agree with that. Okay. So I was going through kind of our notes and I was like, I wonder what she’s going to say about this predated thing. So I’m glad you said that. All right. And so in what are the three steps you have to running a transformation in your beta program,

 

a transformative beta program. So yeah, I think there’s three components in any sort of transformative program that really what they make up is the experience of the program. And I really do believe the experience is what generally sells in a program rather than just some like DIY info product that there’s a zero experience. So the first one is education, right? You have to be teaching people,

 

something new, something they didn’t know before I find it. A lot of programs though, people stop at the education piece and they’re just spewing out content and information and content and information. Doesn’t equal transformation because we actually have an abundance of content. Like content is not our problem in this world. It is literally everywhere and there’s too much of it, but you do need that education piece.

 

So the next piece is the support, like how are you actually going to support people? And that might be through live coaching calls, live Q and a calls might be through email support, tech support, if you’re doing more of a private coaching program or some sort of one-on-one program, but you do need to support people. And that’s really why people in best cause like the education is great,

 

especially when you deliver it in a step-by-step format, but like they can find all that stuff if they want to. Right. So that support piece is really important for that experience. And then the third is accountability. I think accountability often again is missed, but how are you actually going to hold people accountable? Because people actually need that. Especially if you’re talking about health and wellness or even business,

 

right. Especially new business owners. Right, right. Like how are you actually gonna like call them out on their shit and be like, Hey, did you actually do this? And that can be through email check-ins or homework assignments where people actually have to hand it in right. In my programs. Cause I like to run more intimate group programs. If people go Mia,

 

actually follow up with them and I’m like, Hey, I noticed that you haven’t been engaging. I just want to know like, is there some way you’re not being supported? Like how can we help you? And obviously in the end that it’s their responsibility and if they go Mia, that’s, that’s their thing. But I think that accountability piece and being able to keep tabs on people in some way is really important in a program.

 

Yeah. I love the subtle that, so education, support and accountability for sure. Yeah. Three ways to build this transformative program. Love all of that. I agree with that a hundred percent and love that you run smaller groups. I love smaller group programs. I think that we’re really starting to see a shift. Thank heavens from the cattle drive courses and programs that have been certainly popular from about 2017 to 2019.

 

And it’s all about relationships. So if you guys are listening, you you’re about to launch a math course. Great. That’s awesome. Or super happy for you, but there is massive value in the accountability piece and the relationship piece between smaller elite programs. Love that. And then how do you recommend people actually use this beta testing process to lead in their space,

 

to lead their industry in their program? What are the, this is kind of the wrap up question here, but what are the springboard steps after this beta that you recommend people take in order to take the lead in their space, especially for you, like you deal with health coaches, they’re all health coaches, you know, but everybody’s different. Everybody brings something different to the table in their program design.

 

So what are really kind of the springboard steps to lead in whatever area they want to lead in. So it’s being very intentional with the feedback that you receive in the beta, right? That’s, what’s going to allow you to make the program better and optimize and make it the best in your space in your industry. And so you want a really robust way to collect feedback within the program,

 

right? Yeah. You can like kind of gauge what people are thinking, you know, in the Facebook group, if that’s what you’re doing or however you’re doing it, but actually creating surveys that you give away after every phase of the program. And I typically, I love bribing people. So I usually say, Hey, if you fill out all the six surveys,

 

I’m going to enter you into the contest. And I make the prize like really juicy, like just like, Oh my God, because people need a little bit of incentive. So I like to call it ethical bribery, but there are actually four questions that I want to share with you that you can ask your people after each module or phase or step,

 

whatever you want to call it. And that is what was your favorite part about this training or module? What was confusing about this training or module? What do you wish I had expanded on? And finally, what resource would help you better succeed? And that’s what helps you. So when you run the beta, like you want to run it super basic,

 

you know, like it’s the most basic way you can run it while still providing the value. So don’t go and create a million handouts and like a million resources and all this stuff like actually ask them like, what would help you? It’s almost like a co-creation process. Like you’re creating this program, not just with you, but with the people who are literally engaging in it.

 

And that’s how you make it the best. Because at some point after you do this a few times, people are like, wow, I feel like you made that program exactly for me. And you did right? Because you can get with Them. Right. Right. What an awesome idea. I love those feedback questions. And just being able to measure where people are in each benchmark of the program too.

 

And how cool is this? Like, you can’t do this. If you’ve already taken the time recorded, the videos done all the PDFs and they’re all pretty and they have your logo and they’re all branded on there. And then you go like you don’t get an opportunity to do that because you’ve already created the outcome for that. So this is, this is a very cool concept to actually take it from that direction and have the beta students go through and tell you,

 

Hey, this is what I need right now in order to take action on what I learned today or this week. So super awesome. Kendra, thank you so much for being on the podcast. This was super informative. How can people find you and connect with you? You have your own podcast. Let’s talk about that for a minute. Yeah. I have a podcast called the wealthy coach podcast.

 

So for anyone who’s doing online coaching, I speak primarily to health coaches, but anyone who’s in the kind of online, personal development, health and fitness space, I give a lot of great information on that podcast. But if you want to connect with me or ask me any questions about the show, the best place to connect with me is Instagram. My handle is at Kendra Perry,

 

inc. I answer all my DMS and I love chatting with people. So don’t be shy. I love it. I love it. And we, we really appreciate you being on the show and following this. So for our listeners to take action, we were talking about a way for them to go through and take action based on what you talk about.

 

We’ll have a resource to be able to share with our listeners that they can take action in the show notes of this show, where they can do that to drop on my pen here and we’ll make sure that they find that. So all of the show notes you guys can be found@sweetlifeco.com, click on our podcast and where to connect with Kendra, how to find her podcast and everything we talked about today will be in those show notes for you.

 

Thank you so much, Kendra. We appreciate your time. And I love the concept of the beta launch, both you and I have learned some hard lessons and hopefully those people who haven’t done this process yet, we’ll save them some time many, and I’m certainly increasing their peace of mind. Thank you April.<inaudible> Thanks for sticking with us in today’s show you guys.

 

I can’t wait to talk to you next week, where we have another awesome guest coming on the show it’s guests season. Wow. I love our guests. I learn. And I just benefit so much from our guests as you guys do. Thank you for your reviews. You leave on this podcast. You know, our mission is to give you proven strategies,

 

business strategies that you can take to the bank strategies, that if you were to hire a coach, they charge you thousands of dollars to tell you the stuff that we deliver. You hear on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. I’m a nonprofit founder as a nonprofit founder. This podcast is one of the Sweetlife company’s missions. It’s one of our mission, one of our outreach to make sure that entrepreneurs across the globe are not only growing their business,

 

but you’re growing it strategically in a way that you can trust is going to give you that future. You want. That’s what we do here on the podcast. That’s what we do in this sweet life company. So thanks so much for staying tuned with us. Of course, find everything that we talked about on the show notes, including programs on how you can work with us,

 

how you can work with me privately and personally, to grow your business by visiting Sweetlife co.com

Episode 200: How To Write A High Converting Sales Page In 5 Steps – Amisha Shrimanker

Amisha Shrimanker SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Free Live Copywriting Masterclass with Amisha: November 19, 2020 and January 21, 2021
JOIN OUR ONLINE COMMUNITY to attend! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs, coaches, course creators, leaders, teachers and others looking to sell your service or program online.

Summary:

You’ve worked hard to create a great offer, and it’s time to sell it, but no one is buying. Chances are your copy is bad. Writing sales copy is a craft and not everyone can do it well. But, in order to sell your program, your copy has to be as great as your service. 
 
In this episode, Amisha Shrimanker, founder of The Copy Crew, breaks down 5 steps to write a high converting sales page to increase those well-deserved sales. If you’ve struggled to sell your services online, this show/mini business training is a must-listen. 
 
As a bonus, Amisha is also teaching two live How-To Copy Writing Classes for our SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast listeners. To join the live (or replay copy) writing class, join our online community at www.sweetlifecommunity.com

Highlights:

  1. Have a 5 step plan to write great copy
  2. Know where on the page to start writing
  3. Understand how people buy
  4. Know what to say to separate and elevate your offer

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
Free Live Copywriting Masterclass with Amisha:  November 19, 2020 and January 21, 2021
JOIN OUR ONLINE COMMUNITY to attend! 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And Welcome to episode number 200. The Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast. My name is April beach founder of this Sweetlife company. And your host here on the show. This is episode number 200.

 

Thank you so much for being a podcast listener of this wheat life for the last almost four years. We’re coming up on our birthday here soon in January, and we just appreciate your listenership and the reviews. You leave us so much. We are here to give you trusted, proven business strategy that other coaches and programs charge thousands of dollars for. And that’s exactly what we’re doing today.

 

Yet again on the show. Again, this is episode number 200. So all of the show notes and everything, you can find that we talk about the summary of what we talk about and the gold I’m going to tell you. It’s gold that our guests gives you today can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com clicking on podcast. And this is episode number 200 today.

 

We’re talking about how to write high converting sales page. Copy copywriting is a tough thing. You guys, copywriting is in fact, one of the hardest things that could stand in the way of success and failure. You could have an amazing program. You could have an amazing service or a course, but if your copywriting doesn’t really speak to the buyer, nobody’s going to buy it.

 

And so it is a huge wall. It’s a huge barrier and a huge gateway for a lot of companies. That’s why today’s guest is so important to be on the show. Ameesha Sri Moncur is a conversion copywriter and founder of the copy crew, and she specializes in writing and sales copies for online product and online program launches. When she’s not whipping up persuasive sales copy in her to 10 X or clients launches,

 

she’s busy, plane, mom, staying fit and catching up on her reading. You can connect with alicia@thecopycrew.com and at the copy crew on Instagram as well, just under a DM. She’s always happy to answer your questions here and on today’s show. We’re talking about the reasons why people struggle with copywriting, but honestly, we really dive into Results today’s show is going to give you five different steps on how to write,

 

copy that converts for your sales page. But I’m telling you in step number one, you guys she’s diving into seven other sub steps. You need to know. So this is going to be one of these episodes. I know you guys have these episodes. I hear this all the time. These saved at Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, business training episodes, right?

 

This is going to be of those. You’re going to come back to again and again, if you’re driving your car or you’re working out or you’re cooking dinner or whatever, no worries. You can come back and listen to it again. Also, I will say that Alicia is so amazing. She is going to be teaching a master class in our community.

 

So if you aren’t yet in our online business community, cruise over to Sweetlife community.com. So if you want more help with sales and copywriting cruise over to Sweetlife community.com, you can join our private online community app. It is not a Facebook group guys. We left Facebook a long time ago. It’s actually a separate app where we connect as a community. You can network with other businesses.

 

We’d love to have you there. And Ameesha is going to be teaching, not just one, but two different masterclasses in November and in January for our exclusive community members. Just so you know. So let’s go ahead and dive into the episode. Again, we’re talking about five steps to write high converting sales copy. You’re going to get the goods here on today’s show and all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

 

This is episode number 200 and connect with us. Join Ameesha in the masterclasses by visiting Sweetlife community.com. Okay, let’s go.<inaudible> Super excited. You guys to be joined by a Nisha Sri mocker. When I saw her application for the show, I knew we needed her on here because she is a copywriting genius, and she helps those of you that are in the digital space.

 

Really get it. What is in your head out into your sales page, which there’s this huge hang up usually between what you want to say and actually how businesses are able to say it, how well they’re able to execute it is a big problem in a copywriter is a must, I would say, on every single strategic online business team, you need to have somebody with excellent copywriting skills.

 

And frankly, personally, I am not one of those people. So I have people that do that because I already know that that I’m one of probably the 90% of the people that are not great at this, but I think we can learn, right. And that’s why we’re kind of here on the show today and Ameesha is going to dive in. And today we’re talking about how to write a high converting sales page in five steps.

 

But before we dive into that, welcome to the suite life entrepreneur podcast, and Meesha, I’m so excited that you’re here. Tell everybody who you are and why, why you love doing what you do. Sure. Well, thank you April so much for having me. It’s great to connect with someone who loves digital marketing and entrepreneurship, as much as I do.

 

And it’s evident in the content you produce because I’ve been listening to some of your podcast episodes. So a little bit about me. I may conversion copywriter and I write launch copy for online entrepreneurs. So whether you’re Launching a digital course, a membership site or a coaching program, I’m your gal. If you things that set me apart from other copywriters, because there are a lot of launch copywriters,

 

I bring my strategy skills to the table. I know how the overall funnel works. So with me, you get copy and my launch experience to launch your thing. I don’t just write pretty words on your landing pages and sales pages. I really dig deep into research. So I find out everything about your industry, you as a person, as the creator,

 

your clients, I talk to them. I stop people in Facebook groups, find out everything before I write a single word of copy. And that’s why the copy converts. And lastly, the other thing is I have an eye for detail. So lot of copywriters, what they do is they write, copy, hand the Google doc a word, but I go deeper than that.

 

I like to see the finished result on sales page. So tiny details like, Hey, what are your bullets? Symbols look like? So if I was writing for a makeup course, creator I have in the past, there are symbols. The bullets symbols could be something like lipstick, right? It’s a tiny details, but it makes so much of a difference when you’re kind of like trying to stand out there because copy your funnel is a package as a sales and a marketing package.

 

So it’s got to stand out, not just with the words, but even with those little details. So those are three things. That’s a new part. Wow. So you are the copyrighting unicorn that everybody has been looking for. Just so you all now know you guys can, you can pause the podcast right now, go follow Ameesha at the copy on Instagram.

 

And we’ll of course, make sure that all the links to connect with her are available to you guys in the show notes. So in this process that you have to help business owners to help experts and leaders really launch and sell their programs, launch and sell their methodology. There’s zone of genius and it’s in their head. They already have a struggle. People struggle with even creating the actual program itself.

 

So there’s always kind of like this bigger picture we’re looking at, they’re creating their actual intellectual property into their program. That’s one step, but then we need to take it down a step further and actually talk about it in a way that an audience that might be a totally cold audience that has never experienced this company before understands. So how do we do that?

 

Guide us through these five steps to write a high converting sales page, especially now that we know how much more you bring into it, then just a regular straightforward copywriter. I’m super excited for you to share these with us today. Sure. So I have five steps and the first step, really the step that proceeds before and in these five steps is obviously do your research.

 

So if you’re writing for yourself, this should come a lot easier kind of because you know who your avatar is, who, you know, who’s your audience. So when you’ve got that nailed, let’s start with step one. Step one is you need to know the seven most things before you write a single word of copy. And this kind of digs into that research.

 

The first thing is you need to know what’s your one offer. Like we’re not selling a bunch of things on that one sales page. So this is kind of like, you know, straightforward. What is your one offer? Is it a course? Is it a coaching program? Is it a membership site? So get clarity there. The other thing you want to know is what is your one promise,

 

right? So like, what is a specific promise that if your avatar or your buyer does everything you tell them to do, what is the outcome that you can actually guarantee? And that’s important because you’re going to write about that on your sales page, every sales page offers a guarantee and the guarantee kind of ties into the promise, the big promise that you’re making.

 

I see a lot of my clients who come to me and they’ve got an idea for this huge, amazing offer, like, Oh, okay, we’re going to do, it’s a 30 day program. I’m going to tell them how to set up an online business. That’s great. But what is the outcome? What does that one promise that after the end of 30 days,

 

when they’re done with the program, what are they going to get? Are they going to get a website that they can show off? Is it going to be a landing page that they can show off? What is it to get clear on that third thing is, this is obvious. Who’s your one reader, one human being that you’re writing copy to like really know this person,

 

you know, what are they like? What are their 3:00 AM sweats? You know, what gets them anxious, hopes, fears, dreams, all the good stuff you want to know. What is your one big idea? Now this may be a little tricky to wrap your mind around because I had a client whom I wrote a sales page for, because he was selling his Facebook ad course.

 

And he wanted to kind of make this big promise. If you take this ad course, and it’ll help you scale your ad programs or your ad campaigns, and we’ll help you to X your ROAS and you know, all that good stuff. And I’m like, no, you’ve got to lead with one big idea. Like one promise. One thing that a person who reads it gets it.

 

And here’s the other thing it’s a pro tip. The more ans you have in your big idea, the more confusing it is for your buyer to kind of connect with you. So let me give you another example, Nike, their tagline says, just do it. They don’t say just do it and also have fun and also take care of your health.

 

Right? You’ll lose someone there who your one big idea is just this one sideline thing. One thing that someone can like instantly get it. And they’re like, yeah, I get it. Now I’m intrigued. I want to know more. So I’ll stop there. I love that. Thank you. Then comes your stage of awareness. Like how do you market to someone who’s unaware or even problem aware is very different to how you market write copy for someone who’s most aware,

 

right? If someone who is unaware, you’re not going to write a sales page, selling them something. You’re going to give them top of the funnel stuff like a blog or a podcast episode and all that good stuff. But someone who is solution aware has a problem, knows it is looking for different solutions, has tried different things. They’re an easier sell.

 

So kind of your copy, you know, follows that suit. The other thing is traffic temperature, are you running traffic or are you running your sales copy to a cold warm or hot audience? Know who you’re running into? If you’re just emailing your list about your offers, it’s an easier sell because your list, hopefully you’ve been emailing them consistently. They know you like you and trust you,

 

right? So it’s easier. But if you’re running sales page to a Facebook ad campaign and it’s all to cold leads, they don’t know who you are. So you kind of have to like build that rapport. At the beginning of the page, the seventh one is your unique value proposition. What sets you apart from others in your industry who are offering the same thing or similar thing to a similar audience,

 

you kind of want to set yourself apart. Know that what that one thing is, and kind of like go double down on that in your sales copy. So that’s step one. Okay. So just to recap, so for those of you guys who are listening this alone, we could do like two podcast episodes on this, this alone, a huge training you guys.

 

And so if you get nothing out else, not that you won’t, you’re going to get a ton of value because that’s what we do here. But if you take away, if you can remember anything out of this episode, I want you to remember step one, come back to the show notes. I will make sure these are in the actual show notes of the episode for you.

 

This is gold. You guys I’ve been a business strategist for 24 years. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs and experts for 24 years. I’ve never once heard anybody explain it like this on a sales page. So I’m telling you like, pass’ replay this, these seven things, the seven most important things of going through and outlining your sales page. Literally take this to the bank.

 

This is step number one. These seven things are within step number one, again, sweet life co.com for the show notes for this. And we’ll make sure all the Meesha stuff is linked in there for you too. But, but just pause for a minute and saying the seven most important things are your offer. Your promise, knowing who your reader is,

 

you know, being able to articulate clearly and simply your big idea, the stage of awareness, where people really, when they come to your page, what sort of solutions are they looking for? Whether or not they even know they’re even looking for a solution, your traffic I’m going to these new people are these people that know you, at least in some capacity who is actually landing on this page.

 

And then of course your unique value proposition, which is always a fun part of figuring out, you know, how your business fits within the landscape of the rest of your market and your niche. So I just wanted to just pause for a second and say, that is incredible and incredibly powerful. So although it’s only step one, I don’t want people to,

 

I don’t want people to overlook that. Yeah. Okay. Now let’s continue on is step number two, to writing a high converting sales page. So Step two is where you use the golden ratio of sales page copywriting. And I use this because it’s slashes writing time. It reduces blank page syndrome, and you can just overcome perfectionism, even as copywriters,

 

we get this, you know, we do wake up with this like, Oh crap, I have this Google doc in front of me. It’s blank. I don’t even know where to start. So here’s a trick. So what this means is, you know, you should start writing your sales page from the introducing section. You know, that part where you’re like introducing,

 

and then you announce your offer and the name. And then you kind of like dig into like, you know, number of modules or these are the benefits. And these are the features I would say, start your sales page, right from that point, which is, you know, midway down the page and this section and everything else that follows below is mostly logic based.

 

And in fact, I don’t know what studies this is, but it was discovered that a lot of people who are familiar with a particular product or the creator will jump straight into this introducing section to find out, you know, what’s included in the course of the program. So it’s kind of like its own mini sales page, for sure. Yeah. I’m that person I’m like,

 

just tell me what’s in here, girl. I just want to say, I could care less about anything else. Just give me the meat and potatoes. Okay. All right. Yeah. So it’s super fascinating. And then chance to actually start with that, first of all, understanding what you’re selling, having an incredible signature program service or offer and being able to articulate it.

 

But how else do you recommend people kind of execute this stuff? Number two. So from the perspective of someone who’s creating the course, you know, your course very well, right. You know, the outline, you know, what is step one, step two. So you kind of like go into that. You write that because this is more logical base.

 

It’s, it’s funny, it’s easier to write something that comes logically natural to us, sort of like, you know, Hey, this is what my course is and we know what our product is, so we can go on and on talking about it all day, it’s easier to do that than to switch tracks and kind of like, you know, talk about your reader and their problems and the agitation and all that stuff,

 

which really happens at the top of the page. So when you’re at this part of the sales page, you talk about the benefits and the features you talk about the most frequently asked questions like, Hey, is this course for me? And you kind of know that if it’s you or not, you anticipate that you can write that out easier than, you know,

 

anything else, which you’re talking from the perspective of emotions. Does that make sense? Totally. A hundred percent. So how do you define what the golden ratio is? That’s a very good question. So the golden ratio, I like to look at a sales page is the 80, 20, 20% Israeli, everything from the introducing section, everything down below.

 

So that includes introducing, calling out your offer, talking about what it contains, the FAQ, who is right for this program or offer that you’re creating and who isn’t the guarantee. Is there a guarantee and the closing section, these are more logical base elements of your sales page, easier to write. So this is the 20%, the 80 Israeli, where you’re starting at the hero of the very top,

 

which is your headline. You’re talking about the problems. You know, your avatar has the things that they’ve tried. You’re kind of crushing their objections. So it’s more emotional blocks, you know, crushing objections, getting into the mind space of the avatar. So that’s where 80% of your efforts should be dedicated. And that takes a little bit of time.

 

And, you know, also comes with a little bit of practice too, the more, you know, your industry and your avatar. It gets easier with time, but this is more like an exploration into what really goes on into your avatar site and you know, what’s going on in their head and those emotions. So that’s the 80% Fascinating. And I love this approach because I think it’s so much easier than you were saying,

 

just looking at a blank page and just saying, okay, I have to come up with this copy here, but really starting with the deliverables within the program and the facts and the things that are not so much emotionally based, it’s just black and white. Like I said, like, here’s the meat and potatoes. This is the deliverables. This is what it is.

 

This is what it, who it’s for. So what a great way to overcome that initial, not even writer’s block, but just such overwhelm that I know a lot of incidents owners face and really figuring out how to start creating this content. So that is step number two. So what is step number three, Step number three is where you go back and write everything else.

 

And you’re writing your page. You don’t edit yourself here after your 20% is done. You’re going back and you’re going to write your headline, your hero section, your body copy. You’re going to follow a framework. There’s a sales copywriting framework. And there are a lot of frameworks, but the one I particularly like, and I talk a little bit more about it in my program,

 

it’s called PAs problem agitation solution. And you know, you write everything that you know about your avatar. This is where your research comes in handy. But what I find often is like a lot of people want to edit everything they write like, Hmm. You know, they’ll write something and they’ll want to edit it because, Hey, this doesn’t sound grammatically,

 

right. Or how can I make this more sexier or, you know, more live with personality that doesn’t really work like that. Just write, don’t worry about editing because the editing will come, right? What you want to say first, then clean it up on how you want to say it. And the how is really your personality. And it’s really kind of like cleaning up the grammar and all that stuff.

 

So that’s, those are later steps. So write, write, write, and then come back and clean it up. I even think about it. Just dump it all on the paper, put what you want down there. Don’t judge yourself. Don’t try to make it sound better than it is. I, it was really funny. I was, I came across an article or some,

 

it was a graphic on LinkedIn about how a new entrepreneurs try to use really big words and their sales copy and really confusing. And like you were saying sexy wording and how it was actually a really funny graphic, but it actually showed that like the percentage of their success actually giving people Results is like 90% less than just the person that’s just putting out the basic sales of age there.

 

I was like the educational level people that try to use big, crazy words that, you know, to prove they’re, they’re further along than they are. So you guys don’t need to do that. You know, we’re going to talk about how to get your personality in here in just a minute and the other steps, but just write the dang copy,

 

write what you know about your program, right. Well, you know, by your people and just write it all out. So love step number three. There’s no judgment. There’s no grade on how well you did this paper. If you will, it’s just writing it all out. Okay. And then step number four is really then getting back in there and talking about editing that sales page,

 

you’re talking to boost conversions. What does that really look like for our writers? So next comes the editing process, like you said, I use Grammarly to edit my work. I also have an awesome copy editor who understands my client’s voice. So when we get to work with clients, I have this other Ninja trick, which when I tell clients it blows their mind like,

 

Hey, you know what? I can write exactly in your voice because I have it down to a science. I have tools to kind of like really understand what you sound like, and you know, how you write. And if you use long sentences, short sentences, are you writing a grade three level four level? You don’t have to be that Ninja,

 

but you can analyze your own writing voice when you’re using these tools. So I give that kind of brief overview to my editor. Like, Hey, we’ve got a client. She writes great. Three-level she writes long sentences. That doesn’t mean that you don’t edit it because you want to make it punchier. So she writes at this level, she kind of has this optimistic overview of,

 

in everything that she does. So like, if you sound, if you’re like Marie Forleo, you know, who’s like her tagline is everything is figureoutable. For example, she’s optimistic, she’s cheery. She’s happy. I do work with some clients who talk like that and have that personality when they write their emails or their newsletters. So we kind of take that and I give that briefing to my editor saying like,

 

Hey, this is how she writes. So you want to kind of like have that zing factor onto the sales page. So use Grammarly. It’s a great app to edit all your work for paid version. If you can get a copy editor. Excellent. There are lots of amazing copy editors out there who will edit your copy, cut out the jargon.

 

You don’t want to write jargon into your sales copy unless it’s some of the words that your avatar, your audience already understands, but you don’t wanna be too heavy with that. You know, obviously grammatical errors you want to correct that you don’t want any of that stuff. I’m known personally to write a lot of personality based copy in the work that I do to help my clients,

 

you know, kind of reflect their quirks, bring it out into the copy. So my copy is alive with that. It’s not as dry, but I kind of like, you know, try to get that from the client’s like, Hey, how much humor is, okay. Can we use gifts in your copy? Do you swear in your copy?

 

All that stuff. And last but not the least, you want to also do what? My copy mentor Joanna Wiebe from copy hackers does she uses what I, what is called the seven sweeps of clarity. And I’m just going to quickly go through what these are. Number one is clarity above and beyond. You want to make sure your messages are clear,

 

so they’re not confusing and long winded. Number two, you want to check for voice and tone. Does your copy have appropriate tone? Is it angry? Is it happy? Is it helpful? And this goes in with your messaging and your personality. The third thing is you want to ask yourself every time you read a line of copy. So what our reader never re has to read a line and wonders.

 

So what, so what if she’s telling me to do this? Or so what if she tells me this is how I feel? So for every, so what do you want to kind of like have that so that you can, because I’m kind of like have that explainer copy. The fourth sweep is approve it. And you know where every point is supported in some sort of proof.

 

If you’re making a claim that using this Facebook ad Ninja strategy, you’re going to get to X row. As you want to back it up at some proofs, very important, because you will lose someone’s trust. If you can’t back that up on your sales page. The other thing is how specific is your copy? Anything that’s vague messaging. If you’re reading your copy needs to be replaced with something specific like numbers,

 

think in terms of quantities, sizes, emotions, can you paint a picture, make it interesting, make it more specific, right? Like the whole thing, just, you know, show don’t just help. And then one look at your copy and check. If it has feelings, if it has emotions, do you think reading something will kind of compel the reader emotionally.

 

We want to do that because copy, it feels like it’s an art, but there’s also logic. And there’s also emotion. Do you want the reader to feel a certain way to take that action? And then the last thing you want to do is have the zero risk would that means us. Have I given my reader everything they can today to take me up on my offer and that there there’s no risk involved,

 

meaning you have to have a guarantee. So you want to look at these seven things. And I know this seems like impactful. So I’ll just recap Grammarly or an editing app. Copy editor. If you get one and the seven sweeps also call the Greek sweep or the seven sweeps check for clarity, your voice answered the so what with every line of copy,

 

you read, prove it, whatever you’re writing on the page, you need to prove it. And back it up specific, be specific. Don’t be vague. You want to make sure your copy has emotion and last but not least, can you back up with a strong guarantee? So there’s no risk for a reader and they trust you. I know that was a lot.

 

That’s. I mean, again, there’s just so much, there’s so much gold in this episode, you guys, this is going to be one of these podcasts that people come back and, you know, we have a handful of those they come back to and they listen to it again and again and again, because they’re really going through the process of training and learning how to do this.

 

There’s so much information. So I just appreciate you being so generous. You know, a lot of podcasts you go on, people are like, well, I’m going to tell you three things. And then, you know, again, we’ll leave you hanging in and unless you work with me, I mean, you’re really just pouring so much into our listeners and we just,

 

we love that. And that’s what we do here on the show. And I just appreciate you so much for this. It’s definitely not too much. W we’re all sponges here. So bring it on. We listened a bunch of times and that kind of ties into your final stab. That’s really well said. And the final step is bringing in your personality into your writing.

 

And that is kind of that fifth step of creating high converting copy on sales page. That’s really going to increase sales and increase profit. And what’s so cool. And listening to this is a lot of times, you know, we work with companies that sell and they sell really well, but they don’t take the opportunity to really make sure that who they’re selling to is actually the people that they really want to be working with.

 

So they might find out that they’re even incredibly lucrative or they have hundreds of people in their course or their membership, but it really, really isn’t that person that the founder, the leader, the teacher really wants to be connecting with. And so I love also the, what you’re saying is that it isn’t necessarily just going to increase the ROI of the sales page,

 

but it’s really going to, you know, what we always want to do is disqualify at the same time as pre-qualifying people into, into our program. And, and I, and I love everything you said, because I can see how that is just naturally part of the process interwoven into how you copy. So you recommend people write copy on their sales page.

 

So I, I appreciate that is from a business strategist standpoint, you know, making sure that our listeners are not only selling, but they’re selling to the people that they really want to be selling to. So is there anything else that, you know, our listeners really need to know as far as generally speaking, the psychology of writing? Great copy.

 

I think it’s really scary because a lot of people aren’t great writers and then they really aren’t great sales copywriters. So w what else can you share with our listeners? Just an encouragement to kind of wrap this up, put a bow on it here at the end. It’s just encouraging them in the direction. Maybe it’s not, maybe it’s not encouraging them.

 

We shouldn’t always do everything ourselves as leaders. You know, there are some things that I hire out because I know I suck at it. And as a leader, we might just need to identify, Hey, you know what? This is not your area of expertise. Hire it out, have somebody else do it for you. You know, what can you leave our listeners with and,

 

and really deciding how to move forward from here? Sure. So I would ask you this copywriters come in all kinds of budgets and all kinds of price tags. Of course, if this is your first launch, if you’ve never launched before, and you’re on an unlimited budget, you could learn how to write your own copy. It is not next to impossible.

 

In fact, I do have a little program that teaches people how to write, copy your own copy. It’s really takes you step-by-step right from the headline all the way down to the closing argument. And we talk about everything and how you can use the personality section of how you can pump up the copy with your personality, your quirks, because people want to not just know and trust you.

 

They need to like you, the copy has to be engaging like you rightfully said, and you can do that. You don’t have to sound dry and corporate-y and sleazy. So yeah, I would recommend that you could do this on your own. It’s not next impossible. The other thing is, if this is not your first launch and it’s a live launch,

 

or it’s an evergreen webinar launch, for example, there are a lot of moving parts in the funnels. There are 10 to 20 emails, there’s a landing page, there’s a webinar registration. There’s so much of stuff and I can keep going on and on if that is a whelming. And if you have a team to support you with the tech and the marketing,

 

right. And if you can afford a copywriter to come on board and kind of like, you know, take over and say, Hey, you know what? I can write all this for you, hats off to you do that, because that will a good copywriter. Won’t just write the copy, but they will even interview your customers to find out what they feel about you and what they have to say.

 

And, you know, sometimes I’ve given that to my clients and, you know, the recorded conversations and survey data, and they’re like, wow, I just got an idea for a new product. I never even thought of until, unless you would have interviewed my clients. And that’s like, it’s a huge deal. Like ask yourself. When was the last time you did a market research survey or even talked to 10 of your clients or buyers,

 

if you haven’t done that, a good copywriter will do that packaged as a deliverable and give it to you like, Hey, this is what your clients want from you. And this is what they’re saying, and this is what they desperately need. They just don’t know it yet. And in this box of product ideas, here you go. And you know what?

 

You just 10 extra return on invest. Right? So true, love that. And how can people find you? So I know that you have something you’re going to give our listeners here. That’s really going to springboard them to get started in the right direction. But also I want to make sure that we’re going to put in our show notes to a link to this,

 

write your own copy program as well. So wherever our listeners are, they can connect with you. We’ll put it on the show notes too, but where people find you and what is this tool that you are giving to our listeners as a bonus for this episode? Sure. So I have a website, the copy crew.com. You can find me there.

 

I’m also on Instagram with that same handle, the free gift that I have for your listeners today, it’s called the ROI sales page outline. It gives you a sales page outline. What do you need to do first and what you need to do last 15 to 16 sections of a sales page that you’ve got to have if you’re writing for a digital course and the paid offer that I have,

 

it’s a $37 course. It’s how to write your own sales page. It’s kind of serious sales page. You only charge seven 30, $7 to that. Oh, you guys, everybody should go grab that right now. Okay. Okay. Yeah. It’s pretty cool. That’s amazing. Okay. We’ll make sure there’s a link to that in the show notes for this as well.

 

So finding you@thecopycrew.com, we’ll make sure a link to this ROI sales page worksheets are all there for you, as well as a link to this, write your own copy. $37 course. You guys, even if it’s not for you, maybe somebody on your team that would be an investment that I would certainly recommend as a CEO. Ameesha thank you so much for all of your time today.

 

I have loved having you on the show. I have so many notes here. If you guys are watching this video on YouTube, behind the scenes, you see all my chicken scratch notes here on this piece of paper. I’m real old school like that. We really appreciate your time and your expertise. You know, really not holding anything back in orange is incredible wisdom and training and high level business and copywriting strategy and to our listeners.

 

So we just appreciate you so much being on the show. Thank you. Thank you. This was a pleasure. Thank you so much for having me. You are welcome. Sure. We’ll be connecting again soon.<inaudible> Thank you so much for tuning into this show. What an awesome episode again, if you would like to join a Meesha in our private suite life,

 

business owners, community, then cruise over to sweet life, community.com and join us. She’s going to be teaching a masterclass to you, diving in deeper and taking your questions about the steps we talked about on the show. And she’s going to be coming back in January and working through actually your copy tearing down your copy and providing some extra level, higher level services to those businesses within our community.

 

So cruise over to Sweetlife community.com to join us there. And again, for all the show notes and everything, we talked about cruise over to sweet life, co.com. Thanks for tuning in you guys. We’ll see you soon.

Episode 199: How To Love Your Business Financials To Create The Life You Want – Megan Dahle and April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Megan Dahle’s FREE 36-Page E-Book: Getting Your Money Right

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs (in all Phases of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want to stop being scared of the money and start taking control.

Summary:

You either love or hate to talk about money in your business. In fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when it comes to financial ledgers. But on today’s show, we’re gonna make you love the money and control it. Getting your money right in your business is the best feeling ever, and the first step to getting a company that’s going to scale, grow, and give you what you really want in business and life.
This week we’re diving in with guest expert, accountant and CFO Consultant, Megan Dahle, and talking about where you are now, understanding where you want to be, and making sure you’re on the right path to get there. We do this by teaching you the simple three numbers you need to know that will give you the power, confidence, and control you seek.

Highlights:

  1. Understand why you need to name your money
  2. Get clarity on the dangers of reinvesting every dime into your business
  3. Know the most important number that you really need to pay attention to
  4. Get a simple routine to look at your numbers without being scared

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back. This is sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, episode number 199. And yes, spoiler alert next week is our 200th podcast episode. And there’s some really cool stuff.

So make sure you’re subscribed. So you don’t miss out on that today. We are talking about how to love your business financials. So, first of all, if you clicked on this episode, then you’re pretty brave because the reality is that you either love to talk about money or you hate to talk about money in your business. And in fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when we’re talking about financial ledgers,

but on today’s show, we’re going to dive in to make you love your money and take control of it. Getting your money right in your business is seriously. One of the best feelings ever really start to pay yourself. You’re paying valuable team members. Nothing feels better than that, but then we need to take it a step further. Is your business actually going to give you the life that you want.

First, we have the business foundations and financials that need in place, but today we’re talking about your life. How do we have the company generate enough money? And what do we need to do to get your life, to look the way that you want it to? And today’s guest expert, Megan Dali is here to talk about all of that. So the reality is let’s face it.

You either don’t understand the money in your business, or you have zero control of your cashflow, or you’ve done a really great job getting your financial systems in place. And now you’re ready for the next level either way. This is a great episode for you to tune into entrepreneurs. Don’t inherently come wired as accountants, as a matter of fact, most entrepreneurs are creatives.

And so when it comes to these types of systems, you might run the other direction. So that’s why today’s a really important show. And these are the things we’re covering on today’s episode. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know why you need to name your money and what exactly that means. You are going to get clarity on why it might be dangerous to always reinvest your profit back into your business.

So raise your hand. If every time you make goes back into your company, raise your hand. If every time you make those back into your company, but you also pay yourself a little bit. We’re going to talk about why both of those are not good, even though everybody does it and how to start changing that pattern. So you can reach your long-term business goals and we’re diving into important things like the number one number that you should pay attention to.

And why Megan says you don’t have to know all the numbers. We’re not getting into financial accounting lingo here. You’re just going to walk away understanding the most important number that you should know and a simple routine to look at your numbers on a regular basis, to make sure that you are on the right track. And let me introduce you to Megan here,

she’s our guest expert today, and she’s a doll you’re going to love her 15 years in a Megan Dolly’s corporate accounting career. A business owner reached out to her Megan privately because she was worried that one of the partners was taking more of their fair share. After looking at the books, Megan discovered that the partner had in fact taken $400,000 out of the account without the other partner,

knowing it was this sensitive project that was a launching pad for Megan. She is now a consulting CFO who creates light bulb moments inside her client’s businesses. And she makes the numbers easy for you to understand more importantly, easy for you to use so that you can learn how to grow your business stronger and make sure you’re generating cash and that it’s producing long-term wealth benefits for you.

So let’s go ahead and tune into today’s episode. Again, all of the show notes and the resources make it has here for us can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is podcast number 199. And if you haven’t yet, please take a second to leave us a review on Apple podcasts and share this episode with your friends, other business owners who really need to take control of their financial numbers as well.

Okay, let’s go.<inaudible> All right. You guys are welcome to the show. I am here with Megan Dolly, and today we’re talking about money. We always talk about goals and so many other podcasts talk about goal setting, but what are really comes down to is actually looking at the numbers, then the path that you’re on to make it happen.

And so that’s why I’m so excited to have Megan on the show today, because this is her area of expertise. And before she introduces herself, I wanted to read something to you that she sent to me, which is why I knew she absolutely had to be here on the show, talking to you guys today. She said light bulb moments are my favorite thing.

When my clients finally see what the numbers mean, it’s like watching. One of those videos were colored by blind people, put on those special glasses and can see color for the first time. It’s magical. Those magical moments have appeared in many parts of my life. And that’s how I know I’m on the path God has designed for me. Things that start by devastate is devastating.

Disaster is turned into something beautiful. And these transformations, these transformations that make me believe that all things are possible. And so Megan is absolutely an expert. She has crazy credentials, which I’ve already read for you, but what’s so important when we bring experts on the show is understanding the why behind what you do, not only what your Ninja zone of geniuses,

but the why behind. And so I wanted to share that with you guys before we, we dove into talking to Megan today. So Megan, take a minute and introduce yourself to our audience and tell people a little bit about you and how you got to be what you’re doing Today. Sure. Well, thanks so much April for letting me come on your show.

It’s amazing. I love how many shows you’ve done your consistency. The content is like, Oh my gosh, this is stuff I actually use. Like I’ve actually implemented stuff from your podcast. And so it was no brainer that I wanted to be on this show. So I’m a small town girl. I’m from Midwest, South Dakota. I like gardening. I have my kids.

I work with the marching band at the high school. I like to volunteer there. Yeah. And the numbers are my game. Numbers are my jam. I’ve just always seen them differently. Math always came easily. And my math teachers are like, your brain just works different. I love that. Yeah. You have to have a special gift to see numbers differently.

I do not have that gift nor to any of my children. So there you either have it or you don’t. I think. And, and so we’re grateful for people like you. So how do you work with clients? Primarily you have this amazing framework that you’ve created to help entrepreneurs and business owners make sure that they’re on the right path and that they’re going to achieve their goals.

I mean, this is a tangible framework and we’re going to dive into it today, which I’m so excited to on this show. Yeah. So the whole thing is that people are scared of their numbers or they don’t know what it means. They’re timid around them conversations with their bookkeeper and their accountant. Don’t go so well because they’re using that chart in the depreciation,

but you’ve been a, the, you know, those revenues Rose, it’s almost like they don’t want you to be asking questions, right? I’m going to use some jargon. So you just stop asking me questions. What I want to get to is what’s useful for you. I mean, you don’t need to know the ins and outs of your financial statements.

What’s actually useful. That’s going to help you make good decisions that you can have confidence in and know why you made those decisions and see the progress down the road. So it’s breaking it down into what would be a need. Right? Right. And your framework that you share, and you have a book about this, we’re going to, we’re going to let everybody know how to find you is number one,

where are you in identifying that number two is where do you want to go? Where do you want to be? And that’s the one we’re really diving in here today, which I’m super excited about. And then the third one is, Hey, you know, are you really on the right path to get there? So guide us into that second part of how,

how do you protect your goals? How do you identify, you know, really what is it going to take for me to get that beach house or send my kids to college or, you know, sell my company or whatever that is. How do you work with clients to understand that? Yeah. So it’s like the second half of goal making that is completely missing.

People don’t want to talk about the math part of the goals because it’s scary math or they forget about it or, or they’re more about it’ll come set the goal, set your vision board and it’ll come. I’m more about, well, let’s go get it. Let’s not wait for anything. Let’s not sit around and wait for it, but let’s actually quantify it and then go get it.

So it’s like, yes, I want that beach house or yes, I want to sell my business for X amount so I can retire with that cash. That’s great. Now let’s put a number on it. Let’s put a date on it. And where are we at compared to that? So we can go and get that progress. What happens when you don’t do this is that you make progress towards your goals,

but you might not recognize it. And so you take that progress and you reinvest it in your business, or you use that progress towards, Oh, some other expenses that might come up or the next shiny object. And then it’s like, your three-year goal is still your three-year goals, six years down the road. Wow. That is so true. That is exactly what business owners do.

So we think that that progress that we made financially, you know, instead of putting it to maybe what you’re saying is this in goal, they just automatically invested back in the company, which could be great. Or maybe it’s not what they should be doing with that. Yeah. That’s really fascinating. Oh yeah. Thank you. Yeah. So curiosity,

I love it. When business owners get curious and they start experimenting with things, but it’s also important to like have a, if you want to be curious and experiment, that’s great. Let’s have money that’s designated specifically for that, but let’s not be taking all of our progress and throwing it at this next shiny object. Yeah. Okay. So being proportionate about what you invest,

where each time you get each time you make progress, whatever that is. So if you have 20, $30,000, instead of reinvesting all that say, okay, we’re going to put 10 to this and then, you know, 20 or 30 to that. Interesting. Okay. So super interesting. So step number one is really quantifying how much it’s going to cost for you to get to that goal and really drilling down on those requirements.

And I think that alone, like we could just end the show here. How many of you guys listening to the show have actually sat down? And I know you all have thought about what you want because you’re entrepreneurs and we’re creative. And that’s what we do. How many of you have actually sat down and crunched the numbers to figure out what it’s actually going to cost for you to get there?

Connect with us, like send us a DM on Instagram Sweetlife podcast and let us know if you’ve actually crunched the numbers. And we’ll do like a little poll on our Instagram story on this with the week. This show airs, because I guarantee you, I mean, tell me Megan, how many people actually that come to your, like, this is going to cost me a million dollars.

I’ve had one client in my five years. I’ve had one, one that’s like had everything set up and she’s like, I know exactly how much I want for my daughter’s wedding. I know how much I want for my retirement. I will know how much I want for Beneta da. Great, awesome. That was so cool to come across. It’s like,

all right, let’s work on the next step. You’ve got this covered, right? That’s right. Yeah. Okay. So yeah, it’s a 90% of people will not have that 99.9% of people will not have that. Okay. So after somebody identifies really how much, what that’s going to cost the next step you say is really assessing their progress towards that.

Is there a certain frequency in which a business owner should stop and take a look that you recommend financially about how they’re doing? Is that quarterly? Is it monthly? Is it yearly? Is there a routine that you recommend entrepreneurs are in assessing, not their monthly? I mean, this is not a show about monthly operational costs. This is a show about where I am,

as opposed to where I want to be in my future. Right. So if it’s set up correctly, you’ll just be able to look and see, okay. Part of it is just taking that money out and hiding it from yourself in a special place. That’s either getting interest or invest in somehow to protect that progress and maybe do some work for you on the side while you’re not watching.

So I’ve lost my train of thought a second. When you triggered something, when you said it’s it’s mom mode, it’s our mom brain. No, what I was saying was I feel like as business owners, if somebody is like 30th of every single month, you should do this every single quarter. Should you do this? So I think that entrepreneurs,

you know, we’re super creative people, but when somebody gives us a system, we love systems. We geek out on systems too. So do you have a consistent system where you say to your clients, Hey, we’re going to have a, check-in call every quarter and make sure that your money’s moving, where it needs to be, and you’re still on track or we need to assess what’s happened so far or just regular,

like a routine that you recommend businesses really pay attention and reassess. Yeah. I actually have only a few numbers that I want my people to pay really close attention to. Because if I tell them to, you know, start pull your financial statements every month, it’s one of those things that, eh, I got it, they pull up, open an income statement,

they look at the bottom line. They’re like, yep, that’s about right. And they move on, right? It has no meaning to them. So I actually pick a few numbers, like one that you might need to watch weekly and other that you’ll want to look at monthly and another, that you’ll want to look at quarterly just to make sure that things are going along the way that they need to be.

And we’ll do that deep dive, more quarterly. But one of the most important, one of the most telling numbers is your 60 day cash in 60 days, how much cash am I going to have in the bank to run my business? And then we make sure that what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t going back in and what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t hurting the business.

Cause that’s, you know, you don’t want to be taking out too much cash. And when you can see what your cash balance is going to be in 60 days or other types of business, if you’re like retail and you have busy seasons, we actually take that out much farther. They want to know where the cash is going to be. Cause that’s the blood.

We don’t want to be donating blood if we can’t afford it. Right. Right. Right. So smart. And so the next thing you say is to name the cash before it comes in, let’s talk a little bit about that. What do you mean by that? So once we have that cash projection created, we know what we think our cash is going to be coming in for the next couple months.

And now that we think we know what that cash is, we’re going to have a purpose for it because if we don’t have a purpose for it, what’s really easy to do is to spend it. If we don’t know at that way, coming in as man, those coaching programs, the advertising, the marketing, all it’s, it’s sexy and it’s fun and it’s,

it’s new and it’s novel. So we actually name it like, okay, we know that next week we should have about 2000 coming in. And two weeks after that we have 4,000 coming in and then we know where it’s going out in terms of expenses. We know where it’s going out in terms of the progress towards our goals. And we know what’s being set aside for a little sandbox fund cash and owe taxes.

Don’t forget about taxes. I do taxes and taxes yet. So you actually say Before it comes in, so you know where it’s going versus where somebody like myself, I have a tendency to not just name the money to actually spend the money before it comes in. So in my mind, I’ve already and I don’t actually spend the money, but I think maybe I do that.

So in my mind, it’s already saying this money is coming here for this. This money is going to this and it’s not like robbing Peter from pain, Paul, but I definitely know where my money is going well before it gets here. And so I feel like I’m doing good, according to what you say in that area. Although I’m sure that the categories in which I named my money could use some work.

And like you were saying, so you’re saying taxes, of course, business operations. And you’re saying that we really need to pay attention to the 60 day cashflow. And that is the key numbers are our listeners should be paying attention to, is that correct? Yes, that’s right. And on that cashflow, you’ll see the different categories. You’ll see,

like the marketing that one can get out of hand really quick. You’ll see the tax and all of those buckets, because truth is to get a little bit accounting, jargon ish on you, not everything that is cash out actually appears on your income statement. So your income statement might show that you’re showing have a profit, but cash is like, did you know that you paid yourself?

And did you know that you had these debt service payments? And there it goes, what you thought was your free cash flow. Right. Okay. And I’m sure this happens all the time. It’s just why people need somebody like you to make sure that you’re helping them protect their assets. So the third step you say is protecting this actual progress. So as businesses,

they have their structure in place or they’re getting their structure in place. What does it take to actually do that and put that structure in place so that the money is accumulated in the appropriate buckets so that they can reach their goals. How do you put this structure in place for your clients? So I have a really easy Excel tool in all my clients have to do is put in their bank balance.

At the top of that tool, like open up the bank balance today, it says $7,500. And it will tell them exactly what to do with that $7,500. If something’s going to stay in the business, if something is going to be moved to pay themselves and put it in their pocket, or if something is for their goals specifically for that, and going to move directly to,

I work with a lot of like personal finance people, like go put that in that account over there and your personal finance, personal take care of it. If they don’t have a personal finance person, I’m like, go put this in your savings account, your money market, account, your investment account, and just let it be happy over there. All by itself will take care of itself,

right? Who are The primary clients that you work with? I work with creative females primarily, and between being told that you’re creative and between being told that you were a woman you’re generally taught from a very young age, that numbers aren’t for you. And so when it comes to those conversations and showing people visually how this works so they can get that shift of,

Oh, this isn’t hard. I totally get this. I’m smart enough. I’m good enough. And now I feel like I am a true business person. I feel like I’m in control of my business. It’s really cool. Yeah. Super. It feels super powerful. It’s such a rush when yeah. I think as, as women, as men,

they just are expected to, but as women, when we finally take control of the numbers, it’s such a, such a feeling of, I don’t like to use the word empowered because it’s so overused, but this is a perfect instance in which she used that. And so I love, absolutely love what you do. So now I’m going to put you on the spot and I didn’t prepare you to ask these questions,

but I really want to know what are your favorite books for women founders when it comes to being smart about money? Do you have, besides your own? So let’s talk about your book, you know, getting your money. Right. I know that I hear a lot of people whose agenda and Cheryl’s book, you’re a, bad-ass at making money, which is more mindset around money.

It’s not money strategy. I personally actually loved that book. Are there any other books or resources that you recommend that our listeners who might not have a healthy relationship with money in the first place can use to kind of dive into reset their perspective? Yeah. So profit first was transformative for me. Mike McCullough is a great guy. And when it comes to bank balance accounting,

he’s the King and that’s what we’re doing and using what he has built and expanding on it. He’s really good. He’s really funny. If you listen to his books, listen to it on two X and he’s hysterical the other, I’m actually going to stand up and get the author’s name cause I can hear it. Oh, I love it. Thank you.

And then we’ll make sure you guys that we are sharing, we’re sharing these resources in the show notes too. Along with Megan spoke to one of the things that I know that businesses struggle with is just understanding the fundamentals of money. And it’s really interesting. I have a lot of clients that are CPAs and that are accountants and you know, that are finance coaches.

And it’s interesting to see as we’re helping our finance coaching clients build their business, how they approach scaling their business online and developing their coaching service versus our other businesses because they already know. So a part of the strategy is also part of the structure and the foundation of the money. It is that profit first approach. And it’s a beautiful thing as a business development coach,

you know, to go through and watch. And they’re saying, okay, well, this is the way this is going to be. And they’re very, they’re very strategic about that as far as being entrepreneurs themselves. So I, I love to ask these kind of behind the scene questions like about your own business and how do you do this and what are some of the resources that you love for your own business?

Just because I think that teaches a lot as well. So what was this other book? Cunningham has a couple of really great books. His blueprint to a successful business is like, this is why you need to understand the numbers in your business and how they make you incredibly profitable when you understand them. And he’s also not about all of the nitty gritty bits and pieces of the numbers.

It’s just the overall picture of how it flows together and how it works. Yes. Awesome. Cool. Thank you so much for sharing those. Okay. So in closing today, we have talked about how to not only protect your goals, but how to actually make your goals come to fruition because you are quantifying them to figure out the importance of how much your goals and what that looks like is going to cost you.

We talked about the importance of actually assessing your progress on a regular basis and naming the cash before it comes in and making sure that you are hiding and you’re protecting your money and you are not giving 100% of your profit back into your business that you’re pulling out these small chunks of this. And that’s a really big deal, I think for a lot of our listeners as well,

because especially in the first five years of business, like every dime they make, they put back in, and that does, you’re saying that’s a risk factor of, you’re just putting off that amount of time to even start working on their personal goals. Is that correct? That’s right. Yep. They need to start getting rewarded for the work that they do,

change your relationship with your business. Yeah. And then in your book, this ebook, you have getting your money, right. What does that look like? What are some of the things that our readers can expect to really learn from you in that book? So there are three types of numbers that you need to know in your business. There is the number that tells you,

where am I at? Like, where am I even at relative? How did I get here? What direction am I facing? When, where am I? And the second one is, well, hang on a second. Where do I want to be? And that’s the quantifying, this is what I want my from my business. This is how I want it to serve me.

And then the numbers that tell you, are you on the right path? Are you doing the right activities or does something need to shift? Do we need to take a detour in what those different numbers look like and how you can find them? Great. And so you’re going to, you’re going to dive in and guide our listeners through that process. Megan,

thank you so much for being on the show today. I appreciate your expertise and your wisdom and your sense of humor and just really making this so much more fun than I think that entrepreneurs experience a lot of times when we talk about money and being so real about the fact that you don’t have to know all the nitty gritty terminology, but these are the basic three numbers you need to know.

And our listeners can find out more about that by downloading your free book, which we will make sure there is a link to that in the show notes of this episode and where else can our listeners find you Come on over to Meghan dolly.com or connect with me on Facebook. I love conversations to begin to sit back and have 15 minutes of coffee together, sometime if you want,

Love that. Okay, perfect. We’ll make sure that those links are in the show notes. Thank you so much for being a guest. Oh, thank you so much, April. This was fun. Yes. Appreciate you.<inaudible> Thanks so much for tuning into this show. Here is a reminder that you can get all of the notes that we talked about today,

including all of the bonuses and strategies by visiting Sweetlife co.com episode one 99. And if you are in a place where you’re ready to develop your signature offer or your program now is a time to get in through pre-registration by joining our wait list for our, your signature offer and program masterclass coming in 2021, I would love to work with you and extract your expertise to create your intellectual property,

to make you be this beautiful leader and your space to learn more about our, your signature offer masterclass, simply visit signature offer.com. I’ll talk to you next week. We have episode number 200 coming right at you and almost four years of Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Rolling out so excited and you appreciate so much have a great week.

Episode 198: How To Transition From Founder To C.E.O. – with Kate Carney and April Beach

Kate Carney SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Kate’s 5 Strategies For Scaling

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs in Phases 3 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”. You’re ready to grow your team. If you’re ready to hire, grow and transition from doer to leader in your company, but you struggle to know where or how to start, this show is for you. 

Summary:

If it’s time to grow your team and stop being the one that does all the tasks, but you struggle with how to delegate, how to create culture, and how to move from founder to CEO, this episode is for you. Together we dive into why entrepreneurs struggle to transition from founder to the CEO role, And the importance of aligning your goals with your strategies and objectives, and how to go about doing this, before you hire critical team members.  We talk about the hard things like mindset shifts from doer to leader, And why some entrepreneurs should never be the CEO of their own company. 
Kate Carney is our guest expert and guides you through the process and practical shifts to move and grow your business. This episode also includes an amazing bonus worksheet that details 5 Strategies For Scaling your company right now. If you’re ready to hire, grow and transition from doer to leader in your company, this show is for you. 

Highlights:

  1. Understand what the transition from Founder to CEO really looks like
  2. Identify the importance of outlining your goals and objectives before hiring key team members
  3. Have practical ideas of how to create the culture you want for your team members and contractors
  4. We even talk about how to pay people and bring them aboard with equity in your company before you can afford a full-time salary, and what to watch out for if you do this!

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate Back to the show. I’m April beach, the host here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur business podcast and my company this week life company, and this podcast is all about helping offline companies scale online and helping entrepreneurs,

experts, and small businesses create your signature offers and launch your business. We are super excited to chat with you again today, and we have an amazing guest in the house. I’ll introduce you to her in just a second, but let’s go ahead and dive into what we’re talking about today and why it might be important for your business today. We’re talking about how to grow your team and transition to that CEO role.

You know, oftentimes new businesses struggle to move from that place of doing all the things to building the team that you really need to grow your company. So entrepreneurs and creatives, it’s a constant struggle for almost every single one in the beginning of your business, that you just automatically might not come wired with strategies and systems in mind. And you love your business so much.

Your hands are in every aspect of your business. It can be really hard to delegate and bring other people aboard. The problem we face is it’s going to cause issues with scaling your business. And when it’s time to really grow, we need you to be able to build your team and to bring the right people board so that you can take on the CEO role.

But here is the kicker. You maybe shouldn’t be the CEO of your company. And in today’s episode, our guest and I dive into that as well. She even shares an example of how one founder knew that she didn’t want to be the CEO of the company strategically in the beginning and built her team around that. And why you actually have permission to operate in your growth of your business.

However you want. There are no rules here, but let’s face it. Not all entrepreneurs are the best leaders in their company, but if you have a growth mindset, that’s a critical part to help you learn and develop the new skills that you need and want to become the leader. You can be an amazing CEO of your business. So in today’s show,

we’re talking about three steps to transition from this founder role into the CEO role. We’re talking about understanding what this transition looks like and what it means to you to go from a doer to a leader. We talk about aligning your objectives with the strategies that you want before you ever hire your first team member. And we’re talking about creating a culture within your business.

Even if you have independent subcontractors, here is the other little special question that I asked our guests today. I asked her what if a company is ready to grow, but you really afford to hire a full-time team member. And you’re considering giving equity in your business in exchange for having an advisor or somebody come aboard. And our guest today answers that question.

You get some really great wisdom as well. So today’s guest expert is Kate Carney and she’s an experienced business consultant, lawyer and strategic advisor. And she helps female founders scale businesses and reach profitability. She works with businesses in a founder centric approach to performance, focusing on leadership, talent strategies, and organizational design. And she believes that alignment in these critical areas,

results in a culture that supports sustainable growth for your business. I’m super excited to introduce you to Kate Carney, and let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show all of the show notes and the resources we talk about can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number one 98.<inaudible> Hi everyone. And welcome back to my conversation today with Kate Carney.

I’m super excited to be here and have her as a guest because we’re talking about something that I know a lot of our listeners struggle with, and that is this transition, not only mentally, but within the systems and the structures of your business, when it’s time to change from that role of being the founder of your company and doing maybe even like the Jack of all trades,

doing a lot of things into the CEO role and delegating. And that can certainly be a struggle. So we have Kate Carney here on the show today, she’s our expert, and she’s going to be diving in with you and giving you the strategies to go through this transition a little bit more seamlessly than maybe you have been doing so before Kate, welcome to the show.

Thanks so much for being here. Thank you for having me. I’m excited to be here. I am super excited that you’re here. Tell us a little bit about you and help our listeners get to know you a little bit. Sure. So I am a lawyer by practice. I know lawyers, but I am. I worked with corporate and mostly hedge funds for 12 years.

And in 2016, I quit with no plan in place, a new mortgage over my head. I just needed something different. I wanted to be challenged by something I really wanted to learn, and I had no idea what that was. And so I spent most of 17 figuring out what that could look like. And you look back on your career and you find one common thread.

And for me, that common thread was always serving as the right hand to whoever is in power, whether that the CEO or the senior partner at a law firm, that’s where I always slotted in. And it was for my judgment really, and my ability to give opinions that are reasoned with information when asked. And so, you know, what does that translate to?

I wasn’t really sure. I ended up going to a co-working space to do because I wanted to get out of my house. And I started going to events and I met a bunch of entrepreneurs and I loved hearing their stories and what they were doing. And I thought it really great to be part of this future economy and around really passionate people that I vibe with.

And so I made the transition into doing legal work for startups. I had been introduced to a gentleman who had started a boutique firm that focused just on startups and high-growth companies. And so it was the beginning of 18. I moved over to work with them and I got to work with startups mostly on any corporate legal matters from formation through, you know,

sales transactions and everything in between. And that was great. And I got to see, you know, when companies were doing well and growing and, you know, clients that didn’t get anywhere. And I served as an outsource general counsel for one client. And I went in their office twice a week and all the fed and they were falling apart. And you see all the reasons why this founder kind of fall apart or not be able to make the transition.

And I did a lot of research and I talked to a lot of founders and I, you know, I looked at all the stats around female founders and I just thought this was an area where I could add a lot of value because it poles not only my beagle rational, analytical mind, but it also pulls in some of the executive work I’ve done on senior teams and a lot of the strategic work I’ve done and it kind of pulls them all together.

So I moved on to coaching founders and I love it. I love that story. And so you were in a really unique position, so you have seen, and you, like you said, you’ve been at like the right hand of some of these really powerful and prominent leaders. And you’ve seen that and they’ve trusted you for your advice. And then you totally scaled down if you will,

to this beginning route in this beginning of seed of this entrepreneurship, and then you see the struggles there. So you have a really unique advantage point of seeing what it looks like in the end, and then coming back and seeing where people fail in the beginning. I love your story. And so in this process, going through and realizing that when a founder is in this place where they’re ready to grow,

what are some of the problems that you’ve seen that people run into mental problems and strategic problems? Why is this transition from founder to CEO and your experience so hard? I think a little bit, if we can talk about that, need to control, you know, it’s your baby and people struggle to go from it’s your baby to it’s a business, right at the beginning.

It’s an extension of you who you hire the teams, how things get done. It tends to be about personal achievement at the beginning, like the winds of the company or your wins. And you need to move into this place where the business stands on its own. And that means hiring people, putting together teams, removing yourself from the middle, and that’s scary,

right? You think nobody can do it as well as I can do it. I know my market best. I did the research. I know my product or service better than anyone, but if you want to scale, you’ve got to remove yourself from that center. And I think founders just struggled to get there. And I think part of it is,

you know, a challenge of taking on the new role and understanding what the new role is. And some of it’s just this, I can’t let go mentality. Yeah. Yeah. I agree with that. And, and we’re so emotionally charged and the things that we’ve created, it is hard to let go. And it’s hard to have trust in that.

And so what are some of the things that founders should be doing to think about their role differently when they get to this transition point? I think it’s important to fundamentally understand the different, you know, as a founder, you tend to be the execution person, the ideas person, there’s this notion if your head’s down and you’re hustling and you’re the middle of it all.

And to be a CEO, I think it’s about culture, right? Setting the right culture and developing your culture. It’s about hiring and developing your managers. It’s about promoting collaboration, putting some systems in place and then serving as the key connection to all your stakeholders. So whether that’s internally with employees or vendors, or most importantly your customers, and so that’s a big role,

no doubt about it. And honestly, most people aren’t suited for that role if they haven’t done it before. And so there’s this panic, they’re this, they’re a failure. Am I smart enough? Can I do it by let people down? Particularly if you’ve taken on venture capital dollars, will you let people down? And I think the starting point is having this growth mindset.

So always start with the mindset and then sort of the tactical. But I think the growth mindset is critical, right? If this belief that with hard work and learning, you can develop new skills. And if you want to learn something, you can read about it, or you can learn from people who have the necessary experiences. And this is where I think you can hire coaches,

find mentors, go to leadership programs, find peer to peer networks to build your leadership skills and to learn about all these other areas that are really important to being a CEO and have the conversations with others that have either done it successfully, or can guide you through the process. And some of the things you struggle with. But I also think it’s if honesty and self-awareness that you have to stop and say,

okay, what am I really good at? What are my strengths? And what do I like to do? And then what are my weaknesses and what don’t I want to do? And you might be great at something, but you also may not want to be CEO. And that’s okay to admit. And I think some founders struggle. I had a client who has a COVID her business was taking off.

She hadn’t had a patent, it was taking off. And she said out of the gate, I do not want to run this company. I want to hire somebody first step. I want to be in the MOC in there in the weeds executing. And so that’s really important to know. I have another founder that just held on to the very end and destroyed what was a company and ego kept him there.

And I think that he plays a problem. And so he’s got to know what your strengths are. You don’t have to be good at everything. Right. Nobody expects you to be good at everything. You don’t have to do it all. Yeah. Right. And I think, I think that we, we do. I mean, yeah, we,

we certainly expect ourselves to at least know how to do everything at first. And, and I think that’s an important part of being able to delegate, but I love those two examples and I love how that founder, she knew right away, Hey, listen, this is, I love what I do. It actually reminds me of Michael Gerber’s book, the E-Myth,

you know, where he goes through and just really defines the entrepreneur, the technician and the manager different roles. And we do as business owners and as entrepreneurs fit into those really differently. And if you guys haven’t read the E-Myth, it’s a great, you know, beginning business, you know, creating systems book, we’ll put a link to that in the show notes for you.

And I love that awareness that she had. And I think that most business owners do kind of feel like, well, this is my company. I got to run it. And I love the freedom and how beautiful that wasn’t her thinking, Hey, you know what, no, I want to be in here. I want to be creating, this is what I do.

And this is what I love to do. So when you’re going through that transition period, you got to make those first hires and you have to build that team and you have to start somewhere and it can be really scary to hire your first person. And so how do you recommend our listeners? You know, some of our listeners have teams, smaller teams,

mid-size teams, how do you recommend people that haven’t ever started? They haven’t made their first hire yet, or they’re ready to make their first big hire, whether it’s to, you know, a C, M O or somebody that’s really going to take on a bigger role. And there’s going to be a lot of trust required. How do you recommend people go about doing that?

It starts with being very clear on your strategy. You need that in place first. And then you can break that down into specific objectives on how you’re going to get and work forward. And then break that further down into specific skills and experiences you need to execute. And you’re going to be creating those functions. If it’s, let’s say to grow revenue from a hundred K to a million or something,

find who’s done that, or has experienced growing sales teams, perhaps. But if you’re really clear about the role and the objectives, and you put that out, you’re more likely to attract the right person, know what you expect them to do the first 30, 60, 90 days one year, particularly right now, you know, it used to be that talent was hard to find,

but now the market is flooded. And so it is going to take some weeding. So be very clear about what your expectations and what the job actually is. And there are certainly challenges whether that is to hire too soon before you really have the job in place. And so you’ve got this nice list of roles and responsibilities, but they don’t kind of exist when you bring the person on.

That’s frustrating, but more often, I see it’s waiting too long to hire somebody. And you certainly don’t want to be in the position where you’re scaling quickly and you just need somebody to come on and you make this really quick hire. And it’s probably for many people to end up that way. And you may have to fire that person and you just don’t want to get in that position.

So thinking very clearly early, Hey, here’s my strategy over the next six to 12 months, this is the objective. This is what I’m going to need to accomplish it. These are the skills. Okay. When do I want to start this process? And it takes a while. So you do want to give yourself time to lead through interview. And I think the biggest thing is going to be,

you want the culture fit and that’s not easy to read very quickly. So you’ve gotta be really clear about what kind of culture you want to develop. One bad Apple obviously can be extremely costly, both for time, energy and a negative impact on the team morale, particularly with small teams, right? If you’re a team of five or six and you have one just negative Nancy,

or, you know, not a team player, whatever it’s going to impact everybody. And they’re not going to want to come to work because it’s just a hostile or not fun work environment. I had a founder say that when he thinks about hiring, he says for every one I hire, I’m going to end up with 10 more, just like it really tells me,

like, is that how you want to grow? Do you like these people in us, listen to your gut. If your gut is telling, you know, ask others that you’ve interviewed with your colleagues and say, did you get the same reaction, right? Or is this just me? You know, maybe it’s something else going on in your own bias in your head,

but ask, but really listen to your gut and trust your intuition more often than not, instead of just forcing somebody into a spot because you mean, Hmm. Okay. I have some questions, but first of all, what I heard you say was you have to take the time to figure out what you want. And I think that a lot of founders,

a lot of startups don’t actually know sometimes what that role that they want to fill. It looks like because they haven’t even actually worked in that before, which is why they’re hiring somebody else to do it. They aren’t an expert at it either. So really taking the time to figure that out, doing the research, getting guidance, wisdom from other people and just taking the time to figure that out.

And my biggest fail. So I own two business consulting firms. And I still remember when I built my first team, it was 2009 or 2010. Finally, I had one woman come to me. We’re great friends today. And she said, April, you are for sure the worst delegator I have ever worked for. And it’s because she would say,

Hey, I want to own this. And I’d say, great, go own it. And then she’d come back and present something to meet. And then, and only then would I take the time to look and see what she did and realize I didn’t want it. It was ultimate entrepreneur leader, you know, creative mind failure. And I knew that,

and I’m so grateful that that’s something that she pointed out. And I have had to actually work to hone in my skills as a leader in a delegator because I was awful at it. And I think there are a lot of business owners like that. Like, they’re not really sure what they want yet. And so they’re waiting for somebody to come in and take it.

But I love that. You said you got to figure it out. You got to figure out the strategy because she was a great person. And she is an amazing asset still to my companies, but she could have just walked away and she didn’t. And so I was really grateful for that. So I just wanted to kind of share that relational story.

If anybody’s saying, how do I do this? If I don’t know what it looks like yet, it’s do take the time to research and get guidance on that and figure out and brainstorm what that means. Okay. So here is my question for you. We have clients that we work with, that aren’t in a position yet where they can hire a full-time employee.

So I have two questions, totally different going in different directions, and I’ll just pose them both. And you can go whatever direction you want to go or answer both of them. The first question for startups or for mid-sized businesses that don’t have the funding yet. It’s more of a statement and I’d love your feedback. I know that there are companies that give advisors a percentage of ownership of that company in lieu of a full time salary to start out.

I would love your take on that. The second question is how do you create culture now that our teams are so spread out and working virtually? Is that a problem that you are seeing new growing companies have actually creating a culture within their teams when nobody’s actually physically together. So I know those are two totally opposite questions, but I would love your expertise.

I’ll talk about culture with this work from home, but on the equity piece, you know, it’s an effective way to reward them on pace them and incentivize them to work with you when you don’t have money at Warren and be careful at the very beginning, you bring on all these consultants are basically people that are working so free essentially. And they start asking for equity and everybody wants to be an advisor.

If you can push it off six months to a year, when it comes to like the high level advisors and see what they actually contribute. Because so many people say I’m going to be an advisor and take a half a percent, and then they do nothing. They don’t make any connections all year that you kind of want to have that, that people are worth whatever equity you’re giving up and it’s okay to give them,

but I would be cautious and moved slowly and assess and evaluate that person before you hand out equity, because yes, it’s very cheap, right? I mean, it’s worth zero when you’re growing a business, but it’s valuable down the road. And there don’t just hand it out like Great advice. And we’ve seen both instances with clients of ours, where they gave it out in the beginning and the people you’re right.

Did nothing. It was absolutely a waste. And then the other companies who have waited for these really top level advisers and they’re worth their weight in gold and they love advising them and they’re super involved and making all these connections. So great advice. Thank you for that. Okay. On the culture side of it, like we were talking about how do you,

how do you create culture within your new company and lead teams in a way that’s effective and really fires people up and helps them to love what they do when everybody’s so separated And new, interesting challenge. And we’re going to say a lot of new leadership styles come out of that and different ideas. And I think that’s very exciting. I mean, again,

it’s going to come down to leadership at the end of the day. I truly believe that your culture comes down to leadership and that, that is how you delegate and how you empower people. That is how you communicate with them. You know, that is how you have those teams working and sort of the processes and systems that you have in place. You know,

those are important too, but for leadership, it’s going to start with communication, right? I think over communicate is what everybody’s saying. There’s probably some happy middle ground, but it is about communication. And it’s not just the town hall that you have with the whole group or the all hands meeting on Monday morning. But it is about specific groups working on projects.

It is about specific one-on-ones that need to happen. It is very much about matching the type of communication with the type of task that needs to get done. And so not everything is meant to be on Slack. That could be for a project that is moving very quickly and it’s a small team, and maybe you do messages if it’s urgent and, you know,

still use email and have expectations. I think communication with the right tool setting expectations and that’s part of leadership. And there is concern that there’s a lot of lines being blurred between personal and professional. It’s easy to set this tone when you’re home, that you should be available 24 seven. And I think it’s the responsibility of leadership to acknowledge that there are breaking points and that it’s okay.

And just be honest about when you’re going to be available and when people should be available. And the little thing like be empathetic. I think we can’t talk about that enough for leadership be empathetic. There is so much going on for your employees that goes beyond just doing their task and their job. There are a whole nother set of pressures that never were before.

And so really listened to them and, you know, ask, how are you doing? You know, how’s work from home, working for you, what isn’t working for you, anything I can do to make the team, you know, working from home any easier for you, ask questions and particularly to your direct report drive. If you’re the CEO,

you don’t have to ask every single person, if you’ve got a big team, your functional heads can ask their team, but start asking questions and remind your team of your mission, right? You still are responsible for setting that vision and communicating it and inspiring your team. And so even if you’re pivoting in some ways, right, most likely the vision hasn’t changed,

how you’re getting there might be changing because of COVID. But most likely, unless like, I don’t know, it was completely wiped out. The problem you’re solving entirely, but most likely, you’re just, you’re changing how you’re getting there. So just remind your team constantly what they’re working on and that vision. And so they feel connected to something that is unifying.

And then of course, you know, you could do the happy hours or the lunch and learns or the game nights and, you know, have a social channel on Slack that the bag wine, or Yeah. I’m like, why? Cause that’s mine, I don’t sell the new irrelevant, But that’s great. It’s something relevant, but that creates a conversation between teams.

I love that. Thank you so much for all your tips today. So today we talked about, you know, what really does that transition look like from founder to CEO and why so many people struggle with it? And thank you so much for your wisdom and what you shared with our listeners on and really how to get through and process that and how to think differently.

The founder is that ideas person, but the CEO is the developing of other people. And it’s totally okay if you don’t want to be the CEO of your growing company, as you shared, which I particularly love that. I think that information and that insight is just gold because I don’t think business leaders actually realize that and give themselves permission to not fill that role.

And then we also talked about, you know, making sure that you have your objectives and your strategies and what you want and what you need to find before you start building your team and growing your team so that you’re setting clear expectations of what you want, what you want the culture of your company to be like, and the person that you want to fulfill that role.

And then you also shared with us your wisdom on really creating that culture through distance. And, and I think that distance is going to stay. And I totally agree with you that there are some boundaries that need to be set. I’ve always worked from home. And so I feel it’s interesting from this vantage point, just to kind of see more traditional businesses that are working from home and you’re right.

I mean, it’s bleeding everywhere. They’re working all the time and then you have kids behind and homeschooling and there’s so many other struggles. And so that’s certainly something that I’m so glad companies are taking into consideration and really processing through. And then for our listeners, I want to share this software with you guys. We love it. We’ve used it for a while.

So if you have a team and you want to create culture and you want it, you don’t want to use Slack. Although we love Slack for a lot of reasons, we also love Voxer. So I’ll make sure we put a link to the show notes and boxer boxers, just a walkie talkie app, basically, where you can send to your team and you can send it out to everybody at once and just say,

Hey everybody, it’s Monday morning, you know, what’s your objective this week. I’m thinking about you. And it was really much more of a personal connection than a typewritten connection. And, and we love that software as well. So we’ll go ahead and share a link to that in our show notes and tape, where can people find you? You know,

somebody saying, Oh, you know, this is really great. I really need help, but I need her strategy and I need her wisdom and her eyes and my company. Where can they find you? You can find me. If you go to my website, you can also download five strategies for scaling. The website is K the number eight Carney,

C a R N E y.com. Or you can just DM me on Instagram at K eight dot Carney. Great. And we’ll make sure that we share all those links for our listeners. So these, you guys can find those in the show notes as well. Kate’s five strategies for scaling, really aligned with what we talked about today. And these are all things that you guys have to do and you have to nail before you can scale your business.

So I would definitely recommend grabbing that from her as well. Kate, thank you so much for your time and being with us today. I loved chatting with you on the show. We really appreciate you being our guest expert this week. Thank you so much for having me. You’re welcome.

Episode 197: Will Your Service, Course, or Program Sell? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to launch an online course, program or service
C) Want to make sure what you build is a needed commodity 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Course, Service or Process. In this episode we’re talking about how to know if your new service, program or course will sell? 
 
 Is it really needed and will people actually buy it? 
 
So if you’ve been working on building your first online course, corporate program, service or offer, today’s show will help you determine the need and make smart decisions to scale your business faster. 

Highlights:

  1. Know how to assess market demand
  2. Get clarity on how to make your offer stand out
  3. Determine if you should move forward or scratch the plan

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheetMust-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey there. And welcome back to I’m April beach. Thank you for tuning in with me this week. This is the fourth episode in the series that we’ve been doing called how to create your signature offer program,
service or process. And so for the last three episodes we’ve been talking about what is a signature offer or a signature program, a signature course, how to differentiate yours, how to create it using the assets you already have and how to make sure that your business can really stand out as the undisputed leader in your space by creating a signature service in today’s episode is the wrap up of those four.
This is episode number 197. So when you’re referencing looking for the show notes and things I’m going to talk about here today, you can always cruise over to Sweetlife co.com, click on the podcast and simply find episode number one 97. Today, we’re talking about how to know if your service program or course will sell. And we’re going to dive into some questions and some strategies that you can go through.
I’m going to guide you through that so that you can get clarity to know whether or not what you’re creating is actually worth it. And for you who are listening. And you’re like, yes, I want to lead in my space. I’m ready to scale my offline business online. I’m ready to launch my program or course, make sure you go grab the cheat sheets that I have for you.
And a six minute video on how to get started building your signature program over@signatureoffer.com. You can also join the wait list for my next master class called how to create your signature program and offer on that page as well. So I wanted to make sure that you knew that those tools were available to you, and you can go grab those right away. So who is this particular episode for this episode is for experts,
entrepreneurs, and small businesses who a, you either want to know more about creating a signature program or offer B, you want to launch an online course or an online coaching service or an online program, or C you just want to make sure that what you’re about to build, isn’t going to be bunk. Isn’t going to be a total waste of your time.
And you might be asking yourself, is this really needed? Are people actually going to buy this? So if you’ve been working on building, maybe your first online course developing a corporate program or a service or an offer today’s show is going to help you determine the need and make sure that you’re making smart decisions to scale your business faster. And of course,
time is money. And so today’s show is going to save you both of those. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to know how to assess your market for demand. You’re going to get clarity on how to make your offer stand out. And you’re going to determine if you should move forward or fully scratched the plan and save yourself time and not do that.
So I’m excited to dive into this conversation with you. Let’s do it.<inaudible> Okay, guys, we’re continuing our conversation in this four part series on how to create your signature program offer process course or service. And for the last month we’ve been talking about what is a signature program. You know, we hear all the time businesses saying, Oh, this is going to be my signature offer.
And we’ve covered in these episodes. Really? What is a signature offer? And just a little short recap. I do want you to need into those episodes. If you’re landing here the first time, those are episodes number one 94, one 95 and one 96, but just a short little recap, not every offer is a signature offer, just because you say it’s a signature offer,
there are specific things which is taking your thoughts, your intellectual property, and turning that into your methodology that becomes a foundation for your signature offer. So if you haven’t listened to those episodes, definitely go back. Cause it’s going to be a really powerful springboard for what we’re talking about today, which of course is how to determine if the signature program or offer you are about to create,
will actually sell. So this show, again, wraps up this whole entire series. And I wanted to make sure that you knew that all of it is available there for you. It’s a perfect way to wrap up this series because obviously we want to work smarter and not harder. We also want to make sure that you’re leading your space. So let me go ahead and start out with a story so that you know,
that if you’ve created something that hasn’t sold before you are not alone, I had this genius idea. I’m sure it was a genius idea. It was 2009. And I decided that we needed to have a website, which was a resource where all these parent coaches could come together. And I spent thousands of dollars building this website and recruiting different businesses to be found on this website,
paid my designer and it totally flopped on its face because I just wanted to create it because I felt like the industry needed it. There was no plan behind it. It was just April being creative and also April losing like $10,000 and a whole bunch of time. So the problem that we have as thought leaders and as creators is that the joy is in the building.
Most entrepreneurs have a bunch of ideas and oftentimes we’re so damn excited about what we’re about to do. We don’t even take time to research whether or not it will actually take off. Now, once you get a little bit more wrinkles and a lot gray hair in years, go by, you know, maturity combines with creativity. You get smarter and exponentially more profitable,
but you know, if you’d rather not wait for the gray hair and saggy boobs, that is why we are talking about this on today’s show. You are welcome in today’s episode, I’m going to give you questions to research, to know whether or not your product will sell. It’s like Pat Flynn calls it in his book, will it fly? And these questions,
there are six of them. So if you’re driving your car, you might want to get a little scratch piece of paper out. Or of course you can always replay this on all of your podcasts, listening devices and visit our show notes for this episode. But these questions are going to give you super insight into whether or not what you’re creating is really worth your time.
So let’s go ahead and dive in. So I’m going to go through these six questions and jam a little bit on each one to give you a little bit more background and insight about them. And then we’re going to talk about how to combine these six questions with what we have discussed and the business trainings that I’ve delivered on the last couple of podcasts to truly give you the gold and the answer that you need for moving the creation or the launch of your program or service forward.
Okay. So let’s dive right in question number one, what is your ideal client’s biggest problem as it relates to your specialty? And let me jam on this question a little bit, and then I’ll repeat it for you. Especially if you’re taking notes, we oftentimes talk about the solution. We create your product, your offer. That is the focus of our discussion and today’s podcast episode is the solution.
What you need to ask yourself is what is the problem I am solving and is the solution that I’m creating, solving a specific problem for my ideal client, certainly as it relates to your specialty. So you need to be able to answer the question very clearly. What is my ideal client’s biggest problem. As of course, it relates to your area of expertise.
So question number one is really hammering that out. And again, the clarity this is going to give you is, is what I am about to propose as my signature program solving this biggest problem. You might be able to stop right there and just say, Hey, you know what? I don’t think it’s hitting their biggest problem. And this is enough.
There you go. Edit it and fix it. So that’s question number one, question number two. What solutions are currently in the market? Now? This is a competitive analysis question, but I, when you’re talking about competitors, most businesses automatically think, Oh, I have to find everybody in my space that is just like me, every other program or a or service or in my geographic area.
One of the things I want you to think about is there are times when other business models provide the same solution that you do. So for example, if somebody’s biggest problem is they don’t know how to create a backyard garden. They can either, or a company to help them come in and do it that, or they can read a magazine. If you’re the company that’s great in a signature program about how to create the most amazing backyard vegetable gardens.
You need to know that one of your competitors or another place that they might be looking could be a local magazine. So just realize that when we’re talking about competitive analysis, it isn’t always what looks exactly like or close to what you’re about to create. It’s other places your clients are going for the same answers to their problem. So question number two is what solutions are currently in the market.
Question number three, what is actually selling now? Obviously you’re not going to be able to get into the back of the numbers of local competitors or similar businesses, but do your best at trying to determine, is this something that people are actually buying right now side note, just because somebody has thousands of Instagram followers doesn’t mean they make a lot of money.
I think that hopefully this, this year, everybody has realized that the number of Instagram followers you have has no correlation at all to how profitable your company is. Just a little side note. So what is currently selling right now? And don’t go to Instagram to see how many great looking posts they have that just figure it out. You can ask people in your market,
you can ask potential clients. Maybe I have purchased a service that could be a competitor of yours. Why they chose to do that question number four, what is missing? You see what is the need that has not been met? I still don’t know. I remember my favorite class in high school and no, I did not go to school very often in high school.
I was pretty much dishing school, but I never missed missing Holloway’s entrepreneurship class. I was there every day, single week, this guy was amazing. And he always said whole bunch of things like small businesses. Beautiful. But yeah, he always was saying, find that need, look for what people are craving. And sometimes it’s hard, but not for you creatives.
You can see right through that. If you really look hard, you can see what’s missing and it might not be the solution. That’s right. Seeing that maybe what’s missing is how it’s being delivered. Maybe what you’re proposing to launch as a signature service or program is very similar to what somebody else already has. But what might be missing is a way in which it’s administered or delivered the business model.
Okay. Question number five is, will your offer fill an unmet or under met need? This is a basic thing. You know, business one Oh one guys, we have to make sure that there’s a market for it. And people are going to buy it. That means you either need to be solving a problem or fulfilling a desire that people are willing to pay you for.
Okay. I can move on after that one. Number six, why are you uniquely qualified to create and to deliver this offer, you need to be able to answer that and you should be able to answer it for yourself. The answer to this question is also the solution to what a lot of, especially female entrepreneurs struggle with with imposter syndrome, like feeling like you aren’t enough or feeling like you’re never good enough.
And I just know, cause I’m a woman. I know a lot of women struggle with that. And I have certainly struggled with that as well. This answer to this question, why are you uniquely qualified to create, deliver this offer is like the hammer that shatters that totally not true last wall, right? You need to be able to look at yourself and say,
what have I been through? What is my story? What is, what have I walked through? What education have I received? What you know, on the job training and certification hours and hours performing this type of act, whatever it is, service consulting, what is that? And you need to hold that true. And you need to hold that close,
especially as you are creating a signature program, because nobody sees things like you do. Nobody provides solutions the way you do, especially when you have a history with that. So ask yourself and please make sure that you give yourself grace in this because you might fumble through it a little bit and you might not actually know the answer to this question and that’s okay,
but for sure, ask yourself, why are you uniquely qualified to create and deliver this offer? And when you answer these questions, it’s going to give you clarity on whether or not you should move forward and build and create your signature program or service. So let me summarize these questions. One more time. Number one, what is your ideal client’s biggest problem as it relates to your specialty?
Number two, what solutions are currently in the market? Number three, what is selling number four? What is missing? Number five, will your offer fill an unmet or under met need? And number six, why are you uniquely qualified to create and deliver this offer? Now know the answers to these questions alone are not enough to give you a total full insight into whether or not you should move forward in building this offer.
But these questions combined with what we did on last week show, which is sweet life entrepreneur podcast. Number one 96 are literally worth their weight in gold and will give you complete clarity on whether or not you should move forward or run the other direction. And don’t keep going. So today’s questions combined with one 96 are going to give you that foundation and that confidence to know whether or not you should move forward and building and creating,
launching, developing your signature program or offer. So let’s do a big rate cap over the last four weeks. We’ve been talking about creating your signature offer program course or service. And most companies start with the actual business model. Like literally I hear people say, I want to launch an online course, or I want to launch a membership site, or I want to develop a corporate benefits program,
or I want to create a certification program that is the business model of your signature method. You first need to start with outlining your intellectual property in creating a predictable transformational result that becomes the content and it becomes your methodology that gives people Results literally, I talked to businesses all the time. Then I just got off the phone with another really fabulous woman out of New York.
And I spoke to her last week and she’s like, gosh, I have been creating this course forever. And she’s so qualified to do it, but there was something in the way of actually just building the course. And it’s because she hadn’t gone through the process of actually extracting her ideas out of her brain and dropping them into organized buckets. If you will,
into a timeline or an outline that really can then become the business model, which is the course. And so I just want to share theirs first, going through this process, as we’re wrapping up this four part series, first, you create your intellectual property, your content, and then choose the business model. So you first want to start with that part and then choose a business model and how it will be delivered.
Again, a live course, a recorded course, a one on one coaching service, a group coaching service. You could be planning a retreat, a series of classes, corporate programs, sky’s the limit when it comes to the business model. And as a side note, if you have not yet, if you’re wondering about what business model, make sure that you download the ultimate guide to online business models that can be found right there on our website@sweetlifeco.com,
it’s a 14 page guide and it tells you every single online business model. So that’ll give you a lot of really good information there. And to summarize the last four podcasts, one 94, one 95, one 96 and one 97 are really powerful to get you started in the right direction, building your signature program or offer. So I know we discussed a lot of things.
I absolutely love you too need into this show. And I appreciate you guys so much. We’re almost at episode 200 and coming up on four years of the Sweetlife entrepreneurial business podcast and totally could not have done it without you liking this show and subscribing to this show and sharing the show with your fans. Our mission really is to deliver you proven, trusted business consulting and strategy that other business coaches charge thousands for.
This is our outreach and it’s our impact. And it’s the way we pour into the entrepreneur and the small business community first. And so I really appreciate you listening to the show and sharing it with your friends. And if you’re ready to totally knock it out of the park and become the undisputed leader in your space, you want help taking your thoughts, turning them into reality,
taking your intellectual property, outlining your methodology and turning it into your signature program or offer. Make sure you cruise over to signature offer.com and you can get information. You can add your name to the interest list to join my next masterclass. And of course, that’s also where I have the cheat sheet for you and the short little six minute video to get you started in the meantime that signature offer.com.
All right, you guys, thanks for tuning into the show. Next week, we have an awesome guest take Carney’s on the show and she’s helping you transition the mindset behind being the founder and doing it all. Just starting to delegate the processes so your businesses can scale. All right. Talk to you guys soon. Thanks so much. Bye bye. For now.

Episode 196: How To Use What You Already Have To Develop A Signature Program – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know how to get started in creating your company’s Signature Offer or Program and you’re wondering what to do first. 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Course, Service or Process. In this episode we discuss the problem most entrepreneurs have as you struggle to organize your ideas thoughts and expertise into an outline for your offer program for service. So if you’ve been working on building your first online course developing your first membership community are creating your first steps of service and struggling with taking what’s in your mind and getting it out on paper and then building it into your business model this show is for you. 

Highlights:

UNDERSTAND HOW TO:
  1. Organize your ideas.
  2. Outline your first offer.
  3. Guarantee your clients results.

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheetMust-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Welcome to another episode on entrepreneur business podcast and April beach. Thanks so much for tuning in with me again this week, especially in this topic, I love talking about signature offers and programs, and some of the messages you guys have been sending me are so cool seeing what you’re building,
getting your questions. I love it. So, so thanks for your feedback and insert connecting with me even beyond this podcast today, we’re talking about how to organize your assets into a signature offer program or worse. This is the third episode in our series on how to create your signature service offer program or, or methodology we’ve been talking about what a signature offer actually is and what isn’t a signature offer.
We’ve talked about the two different kinds of signature offers that was in episode number 194. If you miss those, go back last week in episode number 195, we talked about the four prerequisites are the four things that you have to do before creating or even thinking about creating your signature offer. So make sure that you don’t miss those because they’re definitely a foundation for what we’re talking about here today.
And on this week’s show, we’re diving in more in discussing how to use your current assets to develop your signature offer or program. And again, this show is part of this series we’re doing on how to create your signature offer program service or process. And on today’s episode, we’re going to talk about the problem that most entrepreneurs have as you’re struggling to develop.
Your outline is you’re struggling to organize your ideas and your expertise into an outline that becomes your program or offer or service. So if you’ve been working on building your first online course and developing your first online membership community, or, you know, creating your first signature service, this is discussing the first steps. If you’ve been struggling with that outlining process. So today on the show,
we’re talking about how to take what’s in your mind and getting it out on the paper, but then getting it from that step and building it into the business model that you actually want. Last week, I received a phone call from a woman who has been working to outline her signature offer for her course, for a year and a half. This woman is absolutely an expert at what she does.
She’s super excited to launch her first online course, but like most creatives, she’s a business woman, but she’s still creating. She’s having difficulty staring at this black and white outline on a piece of paper and trying to figure out what am I really missing? And turning that outline into the magic that she knew it could be, and then taking it fully and actually building the course.
And so she was missing so many aspects of what she really wanted to include in her course. And the reason was because the process in which she was taught to outline her course was not ideal for the way her mind works. And so she was just like, is this okay? I want to do this a different way. Help me, does this make sense?
And this happens all the time. The hardest work you’re ever going to do as a business owner is strategic thinking. And the process of pulling your ideas, experiences, and expertise into creating this signature outline for your new online course or your new service, or you knew your new offer. It’s totally exhausting. And it can be incredibly difficult if you don’t have a system that works with the way your brain works.
Okay. Especially if you are a creative person and you need to see things. And so I have a system and I teach entrepreneurs and experts to extract their expertise and ideas and put it into an outline that becomes your signature transformation, whether that’s a course or a membership community, or a service or a corporate program. And today on the show, I’m going to teach you the very first step in the process to start being able to outline your offer.
And I wanted to share this with you in the phone call I got last week was just even more of an emphasis that I needed to talk about it on the show. So today we’re talking about how to organize your mind. All right? So once we take all of your expertise and we organize in your mind, that’s how we can pull it into your signature offer or program.
And at the end of this episode, you will understand how to organize your ideas, pull from your assets you already have. And so let’s chat about that for just a hot minute here. We don’t want you recreating the wheel from scratch. Creating your signature program, entails pulling from your assets and your expertise. You are ready. Have we want to take what you’ve already done in scale your business?
That’s what we talk about. We talk about scaling businesses. So we’re going to talk about organizing your ideas, outlining your signature offer, guaranteeing your client’s Results with your offer, but you’re going to understand the importance of pulling from your established assets. And like I said, that is how we scale your business. So whether you are a new company that’s going to offline to online,
or if you’re an established entrepreneur, that’s really wanting to launch your signature offer. We want to pull from everything you’ve done already. And that’s what we’re going to talk about on today’s show. So all of the show notes for this episode can be found by sweet life co.com. And you can click over on podcast. And of course, this episode of like our other episodes here in our series,
we’re talking about on how to create your signature offer program service or process comes with some serious, awesome bonuses for you guys. You can get them totally free. We have a cheat sheet to help, you know, the components of a true signature offer and a six minute video to get you kickstarted on building your signature offer. And if you are ready to take the lead,
you can add your name to the wait list to join my next signature offer development masterclass. That’s coming up. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode, but don’t forget to grab all those bonuses by visiting signature offer.com.<inaudible> Okay. Let’s go ahead and get started to help you outline your first signature offer and turn your thoughts and expertise into business reality.
In this process, I’m going to guide you through a process that I call your asset inventory. And here is the gold in this. This is why this is incredibly important. And I mentioned it in the intro. We have to take what you already have. We’re going to scale your business by creating your signature offer and to do so. We want to pull from your assets.
We don’t want to recreate the wheel a hundred percent. This is a process in which we inventory all of your expertise, the things you know right now, the things that you can turn into your signature offer and program right now, this is the golden it, okay, because here’s the deal. We literally don’t want to start you from scratch. If we’re starting from scratch,
it’s not a signature offer. It’s a first offer and we need to get you more experienced in that signature offers are for those of you guys that are ready. You’ve gotten people experience in different areas before you really, really ready to dive in. If you’re a new business and you’re launching a foundational signature offer, then this is a great way to figure out maybe what new first offer you would like to launch.
And I love helping experts launch their signature programs and scale their business with what you already have. So I totally geek out on this topic, and this is how we start. If you have a piece of paper and a pen, I highly recommend you take notes while I’m going through this episode. And you can even splash down out of your brain as I’m guiding you through the steps.
So here are the six steps to inventory your assets. And after you do that, then you are going to be teed up to outline your signature offer. That’s going to make you the undisputed leader in your space. So step number one is asking yourself the question, what can I deliver right now? So what are services that you already can deliver? You already are delivering.
What can you deliver to your people right now? Literally make a list on a piece of paper. What can you help people with right now, right now, right this second, it can be from cooking to walking the dogs, to developing a high level brand, to brewing beer. Literally, you’re going to splash down from your brain. Everything, not necessarily just as it applies to your business,
because sometimes seeing what you can do right now in all aspects of your expertise, create some of the most amazing signature offers with your spin on them that nobody else has. So step number one is asking yourself the question, what can I deliver right now? What can I do right this second today and teach somebody else how to do step number two, then you look at that list and you say,
what am I an expert at? What am I really, really, really good at from your first list? So first is what can you do right now? Step number two is what are you an expert at? And step number three is what do you feel most comfortable offering right now? So what do you literally feel the most comfortable with? If somebody,
if I came up to you tomorrow and I was like, Hey, Cindy, I really need help in this area. I heard you do these kinds of a variety of things. What would I say that would totally freak you out? And you don’t know if you could actually help me. We’re going to cross those off the list, but what could you tell me that you could help me with and be super comfortable helping me get results in that area?
Do you maybe need to work a little bit more on your process of giving me Results sure. Of course. That’s the process of developing your signature offer, but what are you feeling the most comfortable about offering right now in your business? I don’t care what anybody says. Your level of comfort totally matters. You want to feel confident and you want to feel comfortable moving forward.
Are you always gonna fill out a hundred percent confident? No. Sometimes you just have to take a big leap, but if there’s like a feeling inside you and you’re like, yeah, I just don’t feel right about this. Or I just don’t feel like this is the right direction. Listen to your voice inside. That’s telling you that. All right.
So what do you feel most comfortable offering right now based on the things that you can deliver right now and the things that you’re an expert at and step number four. What do you love so much that you would do it for free? Don’t freak out on me. I’m not telling you, you should offer your signature services for free. Most of you guys probably actually aren’t cause you’re my listeners and you love your business.
You love what you do. Half of you guys actually probably love that question, but what do you love so much that you would do it for free? What lights you up? I’ll tell you when I get off a call with a new client, who’s just shared their business ideas and goals and the things they’re struggling with. And I’ve been able to give them steps to move forward.
I am the happiest I ever am in my business. Nothing fires me up then talking to people. One-on-one I love it. I live for that. What in your business do you know, after you’re done doing it, you’re going to have a huge smile on your face because you’re just going to be like, this was so awesome. I love helping people that way.
And so we’re going down this list of asking again, first, what can you deliver right now? Number two, what are you an expert at? Number three? What are you comfortable with? Number four. What do you love so much out of all those that you would do it for free. And now here’s when the real hard work comes in because that’s all mind work and decision making here is when you need your piece of paper and your pen,
and you also need to give yourself a couple hours to do this. This is not fast work for some of you. It could take you a solid week of work to actually complete this process. And by the way, side note, this is a great thing to hire a VA to do for you. Step number five, what current offers, assets and deliverables do you have right now?
Basically, what are all the things that you have are already created? We’re going to take an asset inventory of everything that you’ve already created. What do I mean by that? I mean, everything, videos, not just paid videos, your Facebook live videos, your Instagram live videos, videos on your phone that you recorded, that you never put anywhere,
your articles, your current services, audio files that maybe you’ve put out into social media, PDF downloads, podcasts books that you have written or contributed to journals that you’ve kept over the years of ideas and things that you want to create and little outlines. And don’t tell me you don’t have a notepad or a trillion of them in your house with all your ideas.
Cause I know you do cause we all do right. Some of those ideas, you’ve never done anything with you wrote them in a notepad and they’re still sitting there aren’t they? So it’s time to inventory those assets. That’s your mind, that’s your goal? That’s your intellectual property. And those notebooks could be Evernote files. It could be little audio notes.
I literally leave a million audio recordings to myself on my iPhone. And I very, very rarely am great at going back and listening to them again. So it could be audio notes on your phone. Also, it could be many courses that you’ve created products that you’ve created and it could be infographics, different social media, graphics, branding, graphics, ideas of different branding that you might want to do.
The list is endless. Step number five is literally going through the process and inventory. Everything that you’ve created, even if it is incomplete. And this is the gold, you are going to mine for gold within your own content because it is there. And this is a very first step in the process of really outlining a signature program and offer and scaling your business to the next level is inventory and what you’ve already done and taking a look at it and assessing it.
And then the question is, okay, April, what do I do with all of that? Step number six is grouping together your common assets. So this is literally taking your inventory sheet and you can do it old school. You can pick up one of your kids colored pencils, or you can really organize it out and build an air table spreadsheet and drop each one of the assets under a common,
similar topic, core area or the solution that it provides. Step number six is gathering together your common assets and organizing them into a common area, similar topic, or a solution that it provides. So I literally want you to go through the process of dumping your brain and then rebuilding it into common buckets. And once you complete this process, you’re going to have a clear brain dump in front of you.
And you’re going to know exactly what you bring to the table with a clear direction on what you can deliver right now. You’re going to be surprised at how much you’ve created. I know so many of you out there have created and created and you felt the need and the desire and the pull to create something or to write something or to make a video on something or just to outline something.
But there really wasn’t a place for it yet. And I believe that that’s all part of a bigger plan and a picture. I believe it’s God or whatever you believe that is, that is kind of saving and planting those seeds to come back for a time like now, where it’s time to scale your business and really created into your signature methodology or program or offer or course or whatever it is you’re building.
Because those little hidden treasures that you’ve created over the years are what makes your program yours unique? Nobody can steal it from you because nobody else has that idea in those thought processes that they’re putting into their program, it’s uniquely yours. So once you create this process, you’re going to have a clear brain dump in front of you. You’re going to have organized columns or sheets of what you can deliver right now,
your signature offer. And this is a very first process that I teach entrepreneurs and experts and that most people miss, and by taking an inventory of what you already have, we guide you through the process of then getting more clarity on the transformation outline that your signature offer will have. So we talk about transformation, our outlines in my masterclass. This means your outline and how you take your clients from point a to point Z,
whatever your definition of how many steps in between those things are. The other thing that is so amazing is when you pull from your assets, you are going to be able to get a clear understanding of your niche and who you really want to serve because your assets and your ideas and the things that even haven’t been brought to the table yet, or maybe you’re going to tap into a list of other markets that you know,
that you’ve always wanted to get into. You’re going to assess that list, going through this process and get more clarity and that moving forward. Remember though, don’t start this process until you’ve already completed the prerequisites that we mentioned in last week’s episode, number one 95. So this is hard work. This is not sexy. Quick button push work, you guys.
And that’s why few people do it. And that’s why few people have industry leading signature offers because the work in order to do it and mining for your own gold and developing your own intellectual property is hard work. But I promise you it’s the best, most rewarding, and frankly, most important work that you’ll do in your business, but make sure you’ve checked out episode number one 94 on the two different types of signature offers and that you have connected and gone through the prerequisites of a signature offer that we talked about in episode number one 95.
Okay. Let’s do a little recap here today. We talked about how to do an asset inventory in order to move forward and outline your signature offer course or program step number one was asking yourself what you can deliver right now. Step number two, what are you an expert at? Number three? What do you feel most comfortable offering right now? Number four.
What do you love so much that you would do it for free step number five is getting to work in inventory and all of your assets, finding everything that you’ve created, the list of things that you want to create, things your clients have told you, they want from you. PDF downloads, podcasts, recordings, books, journals, Evernote, files,
everything that you have done. Your current services, take an inventory of those. And step number six is grouping those back together into common areas. And I promise you when you see your assets, if you’ve ever had any question about how awesome you are, you will stop asking yourself that question. Some of the things that I get to look at with businesses when I see their asset,
that I had no idea these entrepreneurs had just sitting in their back pocket and they had never shared it with anybody before. It’s insane. You’re literally sitting on a gold mine. So let’s go ahead and turn it into gold. Don’t forget to add your name to the waitlist for my next signature offer and program creation masterclass by visiting signature offer.com. If you’re ready for that level of business development.
And of course you can grab the free cheat sheet and the little six minute quick start video I have for you also@signatureoffer.com. All right, you guys, I love chatting with you about this. Thank you so much for being a listener here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And if you haven’t yet, please leave us a review. It really helps other businesses to find this show where it’s our goal to give you proven business strategies and trainings and different solutions you can literally take to the bank of your business at other business coaching firms charge thousands of dollars for we pour it into you here totally free on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast.
Check out all of our show notes and our other business services by visiting Sweetlife<inaudible> dot com. Thanks so much. Bye. Bye

Episode 195: 4 Initial Steps To Creating An Awesome Offer, Program or Course – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know how to get started in creating your company’s Signature Offer or Program and you’re wondering what to do first. 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Service or Process. In this episode talking about what you need to do to be ready to create your first signature offer for. Prerequisites are important to hit so you know that what you’re creating is going to deliver the results you want need and expect. So, if you’ve been wondering how to create a signature offer or program this episode is for you. 
 
Businesses are always launching new offers and services. It’s part of staying relevant and giving your customers what they really need. But when it comes to creating a signature offer a signature program or your own new signature methodology, there are a few important things you must do first. 

Highlights:

  1. The four pre-work steps you need to complete before creating your signature offer
  2. Save time and not costly mistakes 
  3. Complete clarity so that you can create your signature offer or program faster.

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheet: Must-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys Welcome back to another episode here at the sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. Last week on the show, we kicked off our series on how to create your signature offer program or your methodology.
We have talked about the two types of signature offers that you can consider launching or creating in your business. And we’ve talked about what a signature offer actually is and what isn’t a true signature offer. So if you missed that episode, go back and listen to episode 194, because this is a continuation on this series. As we dive more today, we’re talking about four things you need to do before creating your signature offer.
We’re talking about the prerequisites here on today’s show and why this is going to save you so much time and so much money. So again, like I said, this is part of a series we’re doing how to create your signature offer program service or process. So if you’ve been wondering about how to do this in your business and how to really take the lead,
then these episodes are for you and a spoiler alert. There’s another episode in this series coming next week for you. So a lot of gold here in these podcast shows, you know, the issue is, is it experts in entrepreneurs and small businesses everywhere are always striving to be known. And there’s one way to lead your niche and to profit the way you want to.
And that’s by developing a unique signature offer or program, even your methodology, your core principles, it could be a course or a membership community. It could be your content, the you license out to other businesses. We’re talking about a lot of those examples and really get your juices flowing here in these episodes. And the issue is, is that in order to do that,
you have to understand what to do, what creates profitable results for your company, and actually how to go about creating a true signature offer or program that’s going to help you take the lead. How does that sound? So that’s what we’re talking about more on today’s show. So the end of this episode, you are going to know the four pre steps that you need to complete before creating your signature offer.
So the four prerequisites let, just like you’re joining a college course. You have to meet these prerequisites. And by knowing these, by doing these, you’re going to save a ton of money and a ton of time. So we don’t want you to make mistakes. This episode is going to help you avoid a lot of the errors that some businesses that just go off and start creating what they think is their signature program.
And we’re going to avoid the challenges that those companies face and pouring into you today with, with knowledge. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to have complete clarity so that you can create your signature offer or program faster. So if you’ve been a listener to this show for the last almost four years, thank you so much. If you’re new here,
I’m April beach. I help offline companies scale online and entrepreneurs and experts develop industry leading signature offers. And this is a business coaching podcast. We give you trusted, proven business strategies that most business coaches charge thousands of dollars for. So sit back, take notes and start implementing. And I promise you, you will be glad that you did. And the initial,
like many of our episodes comes with some serious bonuses. Today. We are giving you a cheat sheet that includes the components of what every leading signature offer has. And you also are going to receive a short little six minute video to kickstart your signature offer creation process. We love short, fast things because none of us have any extra time. And you can also add your name to the wait list to join my next signature offer masterclass,
which is coming up here soon. And you can get all of that by cruising over to signature offer.com. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training episode.<inaudible> Okay. On today’s show, we’re talking about four things you need to do before creating your signature offer. And here’s the deal a foundational piece. Again, go back and listen to one 94.
If you’ve not listened to that show yet, but a signature offer is in essence, the most important part of your business, it helps you to become known. It helps you to lead in your niche. It helps you to cut through all of the noise of other businesses that are in your same area, or maybe even if you’re a new company, it helps you really stand out in the very beginning of perhaps even a new industry,
a signature offer will also give you predictable results in your business, and it gives your clients predictable results, which is the most important thing. And of course, a signature offer is going to help you control your profit. So that is why having a signature offer. And we use this word offer loosely. It could be a program, a course, a membership.
It could be your signature system or methodology. It’s turning your ideas and your expertise into your intellectual property, and then choosing the business model of distribution that’s right for you. And so today we’re diving into the four prerequisites to building your signature offer. So if you skip even one of these, you can create the wrong thing. Waste years of time spend like truckloads of money that you don’t want to lose.
Just like wave goodbye to that truck, driving away with your money in the back, blowing everywhere in the wind. And you could brand your business incorrectly, which I’m not going to go down that road. You know, we, we don’t, we don’t want to give the wrong message about your business branding because that really takes years of time and money to correct.
So let’s not do that. Don’t forget to grab your signature offer cheat sheets and the quick start video over@signatureoffer.com. Okay. Prerequisite number one is to know who you serve. And we talk about this a lot on the show, you as a business owner, if you are an established business owner, then you know what I’m talking about, because you’ve probably nailed this.
You’ve gotten over that threshold of kind of wondering who this is, who are the people that are desperate for the solution you provide. What we’re talking about here is going even further into that. It’s niching down hard. And for those of you guys that are new entrepreneurs and listening to this show, I get that this is so hard to choose in the beginning,
but once you nail this down and you get more and more specific about who you serve, your business is going to be more successful faster. And one of the ways that you can do this is pulling from your expertise and the experience you have here is a great example of this. This week. I got a call from a woman who is launching a new life coaching business and life.
Coaching is a powerful thing. I’ve worked with a lot of life coaches in the past life. Coaching is also a very popular thing that a lot of people are doing. And so she really needed to differentiate herself from the other businesses that were also in her market and in that place that she wanted to go with her company. And so we had a really nice long conversation.
And at the beginning of this conversation, she went from wanting to be a life coach and helping women and men just get clarity and be high achievers. And at the end of our conversation, she was able to nail it down enough to know that she wants to help men and women get clarity and business advancement. Particularly for those people in the construction industry,
see the difference. It was super specific because her area of expertise and her background is working within that industry. And so you have to go from this high level of generally wanting to provide a solution you’re in your business to asking yourself who specifically am I so providing this solution for and pull from your own expertise and your own experience that you have had in the past.
So prerequisite number one is really knowing who you serve. Now, if you’re a new business and you’re not sure then launch offers launch services, but it’s not going to be your signature offer or program on this show. We’re talking about launching your signature, offer your signature methodology and your signature program. And in order to do that, you have to know specifically who you serve.
That’s prerequisite. Number one, prerequisite. Number two is you need to be able to answer this question. What problem do you solve? Not what do you do or what do you offer? But what problem do you solve? Here’s an example of this. I help busy experts and entrepreneurs who are struggling to take the lead scale, their business, and become the undisputed leader by launching their signature offer.
That’s my statement. And here is a prompt for you. If somebody asks you, what problem do you solve? Here are some words that can get you to craft your own problem. Solution statement. I help blank. So just while I’m talking through this, fill in the blank with me, I help blank. This is who you serve. So I help and then fill in who you serve,
who are struggling with, and then fill in their problem to do, and then fill in the solution or the end results you provide. So I help. And then you can just put like a blank line there. If you’re visual like me, and you’re driving your car blank, who are struggling with blank to do blank. If you can fill in those blanks,
you can answer that question. What problem do you solve? And here’s just a side note. And it’s a question that I get asked actually really often, because I work with a lot of lifestyle businesses as well. If you don’t actually solve a problem, you can also fulfill a deep desire. So if you have retreats or masterminds or things that are more of a fulfillment solution,
that is awesome as well. So it doesn’t always have to be this deep rooted fear or problem. You can fulfill an amazingly deep passion or desire for your clients as well. So prerequisite numbers too, is being able to answer this question. What problem do you solve? Or what desire do you fulfill? Okay, prerequisite, number three, decide what you want to become known for.
You’re not going to get stuck there. I promise you’re not going to get stuck there, but in order to develop a signature offer, you need to choose what you want to become known for because spoiler alert, signature offer is going to make you known, especially when you build it. Right? So really think about that. But let me just share with you a little timeline so that you can see from my own personal experience,
I promise you you’re not going to get stuck there. I first became known for creating the parent coaching industry back in 2006. And my first signature program was called baby university. It taught individuals how to become parent coaches. As a matter of fact, that program is still alive today in my other company, right? You probably had no idea that that’s how I got started now almost 15 years ago.
And then after that, my next signature program was called baby savvy, which was a corporate program for hospitals who wanted to include parent coaching. And then after that I created the baby dream gear class, which was an international class. It was licensed by parenting experts around the world. And then after that, I created the lifestyle business roadmap and launched my second company in 2014,
you guys had no idea, right? See, not stuck. Okay. So when you do it, right, each program you create is a springboard for the next and the springboard for the next. I promise you, you won’t get stuck, but you have to pick one that you’re going to start with and you have to do nail it. So you can own that space.
I own that space and every single signature program I’ve created, you will too, especially when you do it. Right. Okay. So prerequisite number three is to decide what you want to become known for. And then prerequisite number four is to understand right now what you’re qualified to do. So take from your current assets, pull from your current experience, use your unique story.
What have you been through? What have you done, who are the main people you’ve worked with so far and use your unique story to identify, you know, really who am I awesome at getting Results for? Who do I love working with? Who are my favorite people that I love taking care of right now? What have you overcome for these people?
Even personally, within your own business, as it applies to creating a signature offer in your company and the bottom line is what can you create right now? Yes, you can create a signature offer where you also need to learn other skills and bring in other skills to make your offer complete. But we have to understand that for it to be a real signature offer,
it’s pulling from your intellectual property, your expertise, your experience. And so prerequisite number four, to creating your signature offer or program is understanding what you are qualified to do right this second. And I promise you if you’re stumped on this one, no worries. Next week’s episode, I’m going to be diving in with you to show you how to inventory your assets and your ideas and your expertise,
and organize them into a beautiful outline for your signature program or offer. So don’t miss episode number 196, cause that’s what we’re talking about next week, but I promise you when you nail these four prerequisites, then it’s going to save you years of incorrect branding and tons of money and help you to be known in your space faster. So let’s do a recap on today’s show.
We talked about the four different prerequisites, the four things you need to do before you start creating your signature offer or program. Number one was know who you serve. Number two was be able to answer the question, what problem do I solve? Or what desire do I fulfill? Number three is to decide what you want to become known for right now.
And number four is to understand what you’re qualified to do and what you can teach right now to get all the secret weapons that go along with all of these episodes that we have for you when it comes to creating your signature offer program, make sure that you cruise over to signature offer.com right now, where you can also join the wait list for my next masterclass coming up called your signature offer and receive the cheat sheets.
And the quick start video I have. So you can get started creating your signature offer today. All right, you guys, I love chatting with you. Thanks so much for tuning into another episode here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And I can’t wait to keep talking about this subject. This conversation’s one of my favorite things to talk about, and I can’t wait to see the signature offers that you guys create.
So if you already have a signature offer that you’ve created connect with me over on Instagram at April beach life, just shoot me a DM and let me know what you’re working on or what you’ve already created. I would love to talk about your signature offer here on the show. All right, you guys have an awesome week and I can’t wait to tell Bye bye for now.

Episode 194: What (Really) Is a Signature Offer or Program? And Why Does Your Company Need One? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Waitlist to Create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process with April Beach – Masterclass reopening soon! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know the two types of Signature Offers and determine which type may be best for them

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Service or Process. What really is a signature offer or program? Spoiler alert, it’s not just a common service you slap the Signature Logo on. No… your signature offer, program, course or process is something that sets your company apart. So, if you’ve been wondering how to create a signature offer or program this episode is for you. 
 
Experts, entrepreneurs and small businesses are always striving to be known, but there’s one true way to lead a niche and profit, and that is by developing a unique signature offer, program, process, service, course, membership, system, event, or deliverable which makes it clear for others to understand what you do, creates profitable results for your company, helps you become known and gives your clients incredible results. In this episode we dive into part 1 in discussing “What (Really) Is a Signature Offer or Program and Why Does  Your Company Need One?”

Highlights:

  1. Know what truly is and what is not a true, authentic signature offer or program
  2. Understand the 2 types of signature offers or programs
  3. Be able to identify which type of signature offer or program your company should create first

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheet: Must-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process. 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. Welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m super glad you’re here because we are diving more, a little bit more step-by-step each week into one of my favorite topics to talk about.
So two weeks ago, we started talking about creating your services and making sure that what you’re selling in, what you have available to your audience is in fact selling right now, we talked about your primary offer and your primary programs and doing any sort of pivoting based on the crazy 2020 and how it has been. And we also talked about making sure that your services are solving an immediate problem for people.
Well, on this week’s show, we’re diving in more and discussing what really is a signature offer or program. And why does your company need one? And this is kicking up a brand new series that we’re doing here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast called how to create your signature offer program, service or process. And I’m super excited to geek out on this with you.
This topic is actually my Ninja skill and my zone of genius. And so over the next few weeks, I’m going to be sharing with you case studies from signature offers and programs. My clients have built over the years to inspire you, to see what’s possible in the huge result that you can make in your business by creating a signature process program or system.
And so this particular episode, we’re starting out and we’re answering the question, what really is a signature offer or program, and why does your company need one? And this show is for those of you, whether you are established businesses or you are brand new to this space, this show is for you. So that means that your business is anywhere from phase two to phase five of my start to scale business system.
If you aren’t sure what phase of my start to scale business system that you are in, you can just pause this episode real quick and go take a very short, quick question quiz@sweetlifeco.com forward slash forward slash quiz. And what that’s going to do is it’s going to tell you what phase of business you’re in on my start to scale up business system. And it’s going to give you a list of things that you should working on and focusing on right now in your business.
If you’ve been listening to this show for a while, you know that I try to attack the episodes based on the business phase, so that if you’re in phase two, you know, that this particular show in this training is for you. Or if you’re in phase four, you might want to opt out and not listen to certain shows. But today is particular show is for almost everybody across the board,
in any phase of my start to scale up business systems. So that means whether you’re new, whether you’re just launching or you’re ready to scale for you guys that are offline companies going online. This is a perfect episode for you to listen to this episode is for experts, entrepreneurs, and businesses who a want to know more about creating a signature offer B.
You want to understand the fundamentals of what a signature offer or program really is and what it’s not. And see, you want to know the two types of signature offers and determine which type might be best for your company. If you want to know the answers to those questions, stay with me here in this show. And as a super, very special bonus tool to this episode,
I’m inviting you to check out my signature offer masterclass. This is a class I first launched way back in 2015, 16, 17, and I am bringing it back. I’m so excited about it. It’s a step by step training to extract your expertise, expand your reach and explode your sales. And you can find all the details about your signature opera masterclass by visiting signature offer.com.
And when you add your name to the list for interest in joining the, your signature program masterclass, I am going to give you tools that you can use right now. So you don’t even have to wait. You can get started right away, and I’m going to give you number one, the components, it’s a list of components that every winning and leading signature offer should have.
And I’m going to give you a really short six minute video helping you kick off your creation of your own signature offer right now immediately. So again, that’s the awesome bonus that comes with this episode, and you can find that by going to signature offer.com, okay, this is episode number 194. Let’s go ahead and dive into the show.<inaudible> Okay.
Diving in here, we’re going to answer three really important and foundational questions for you regarding a signature offer and a signature program and helping you to determine really what is the right path in your business. And first of all, what really is a signature offer or program? So that’s question number one, what really is a signature offer or program? The long is a true signature offer is a program service method or a process that you extract from your own IP,
your own intellectual property, your expertise and your experience. So what, you know, what you’re good at, what your ju your zone of genius is what your zone of excellence is in that gives your clients predictable transformational results. So let me simplify that for you, a true signature offer or program is a process in which you create again, from your own IP that gives your clients predictable transformational results.
And it makes you known in your space. That is the official definition that I’ve given to a signature offer. And it, hopefully that will help you to understand exactly what it is and what it isn’t. But let’s go ahead and dive into it even more, a signature program, or offer, extract your expertise. It’s derived from your intellectual property. So it’s pulled from your experience in winning and in failing in a certain area in order to be a winner,
and to be an expert in something, we have to usually fail at it quite a few times until we figure out the ways to overcome it. Your signature offer is the result of that. It’s a ways you’ve overcome something. It’s a ways you’ve gotten yourself or other people really awesome results in a certain area. So your signature offer is pulled from your experience.
It’s nothing like anyone else’s. So your signature offer isn’t like anybody else’s because it contains your unique skillset, your systems, and your processes as true signature offer also disrupts your niche. So it improves or simplifies or changes the way things have been done to give better results, a signature offer, or a true signature offer and program provides predictable transformational results that people can count on.
And a signature offer a program meets your profit goals that your company has set. And it is something that you want to be known for. That’s what a real true signature offer program is. So let’s kind of talk about the flip side of that. What it isn’t a signature offer or program is not a copycat of popular programs that everybody else is doing.
It is not what just happens to be selling. And what’s trending right now in this space. And it’s not something you choose just because it happens to be your main offer. In fact, a signature offer is not something that gives people the same results in the same way that other programs and companies are doing it. So your signature offer program should be uncommon,
but it can solve a common problem, but the way you go about doing it, the way you go about understanding how to get people results is your intellectual property, your IP, your methodology. So again, a true signature offer extract your expertise into your methodology by creating your own unique content that becomes your program. It is not something that just happens to be selling it.
Isn’t something that is the first offer, just because it’s your first offer. Doesn’t mean it’s your signature offer just because it’s your only offer. Doesn’t mean it’s your signature offer. It shows signature offer leads the way in certain aspects and the goals that you set forth in your business. So now you might be asking yourself, Oh, okay, well, what,
what does that mean? And how do I know what type of signature offer to bill once you understand what type of signature offer you’re building, then you’re going to understand the goals that your business is going to set for that signature offer. So now let’s go ahead and I want to share with you the two types of signature offers or programs, they are a foundational signature offer or program or an influencing signature offer or program.
So the two types are foundational or influencing. This is a system that I created. It’s part of my service creation system that I watched about 10 years ago in once you understand which one you fall into, either influencing or foundational, then this is going to help you get more clarity. So I want to impact this with you here and break out the two types of programs,
a foundational signature offer. This is ideal for new businesses entering the market or established businesses going from offline to online, a foundational signature offer introduces you to the marketplace. It gets you on the map, and it helps you as a business owner to simplify your services and your systems, a foundational signature offer can be your first online offer. If you are going through the scaling up or the scaling online process,
or again, going from offline to online to grow your business, or it can be the first program or service that you’re introducing as your company is emerging, maybe into a new marketplace, whether it’s online or offline, a foundational signature offer can have huge profit results. Okay? So just because your business might be new, if that’s the arena you fall into,
or just because you might be new to online, it doesn’t mean that your foundational offer can make you a lot of money. It doesn’t mean it has to be some rinky dink offer. We just call it foundational because it’s setting the expectations for a new marketplace for you. It’s setting the foundation for how you’re first going to become known in a certain space.
So can have huge profit results, but they’re usually they usually are simpler programs. You know, they usually are not sometimes as robust or as long or as intricate as an industry influencing signature offer or a program. And this is because a foundational offer helps you as a business owner to gain confidence in what you’re doing and to test out your new marketplace, a foundational offers a great way for you to say,
Hey, listen, this is my area of expertise, and this is my experience. I want to go ahead and introduce this to a space and test it. So that’s also what a foundational offer does. And foundational offers are designed as that entry point and an introduction for both the company and the new client base to clearly understand the results you provide. So again,
this is new to online. This is a new company that could be starting from scratch, or it’s a program or a different way that you’re testing as far as delivering results to an established market base. That is a foundational signature offer in influencing signature offer makes you known as the leader in your space influence in signature offers are ideal to be created by experts.
So for those of you with extensive experience in getting people results based on your methodology. So an influencing signature offer is for those of you who have tested your content or your program numerous times in the past, even if it was one-on-one or an indifferent settings, you have tested your content. You’ve come up with your methodology and your system after feedback and time and testing,
and you’ve gotten your clients amazing results, and it’s time to expand your reach and your methodology to impact your industry and more people for good. That is an influencing signature offer. And so I want to share those two kind of basic paths. There are two, I call them tracks either foundational or influencing with you. And this is part of my signature creation system that I started teaching entrepreneurs about 14 years ago.
And once you identify, Hey, you know what, right now you could have an established business and you want to just launch your first online program or your first online course. It doesn’t have to be a 1216 week course. You know, you could just start out with a foundational offer foundational program online. It’s going to dive into the water of this new marketplace and test out what you’ve been doing with your clients,
maybe offline to see how well we can scale it to online. That’s a great example of a company who is ready to launch a foundational signature offer. This influencing signature offers. For those of you guys who are experts, your speakers, your writers, you are coaches or consultants of some kind, and you’ve gotten amazing results for clients in the past. And you’re ready.
You know, that the way you go about doing things is a bit, or maybe drastically different than the way other people get results. You have tested your content. You’ve created your content you’ve created, or you’re ready to create a system that disrupts your niche and extracts your expertise, your zone of genius, your intellectual property. And you’re ready to create content and build and create a signature offer or program that takes people from point a to point B.
And you know, that you want to be known as a leader for doing that. If that is you, you are ready to create your influencing signature offer. So those are the two different types of signature offers. And I just wanted to help businesses get clarity on that. And this is why we’re embarking on this new series, because this is a primary way.
My company helps businesses succeed is in creating your offers and your programs. And these are all the common questions that I get. And so I wanted to make sure I was pouring into you guys, our podcast listeners, and making sure that you have these answers as well. So what happens next? Next, we need to be able to identify what type of signature offer or program your company should create first.
And so the first question is how do you identify, what type of art for program should I create? Is it influencing or is it foundational? So first in order to answer that question, let’s identify whether or not you have a current offer that could become your signature offer. We never want to totally recreate the wheel. We always want to pull from your current assets,
from your current expertise, from all the work you’ve already done. We want to take a look at what you’ve already done, as well as what you want to become known for. Let’s just pause for a second and answer that question to yourself. What do I currently have or do, or content I’ve created that I am amazing at that I want to become known for.
And I really want to kind of explode this area. So that’s a first question to really identify and ask for yourself. Again, we don’t always want to start from scratch. The best thing we can do as business owners is using the things we’ve already created and turning them into something even better. So ask yourself is my current service or offer that I have something that I want to become known for in my space.
Does my current offer include my unique intellectual property or methodology, or am I copying someone else’s system? You cannot create a true, accurate, legitimate, genuine, proper, authentic signature offer. If you have just copycatted somebody else’s way about getting people results, a true signature takes your intellectual property and your unique methodology in turns it into your signature system or a process.
Okay. And then the third question to ask yourself is when people think of my business, is this what they automatically think that I do? Do they automatically think, Oh, I’m thinking about, you know, Jody, she’s great at whatever highlighting people’s hair that could be her signature offer. So, you know, do people automatically already think of, of what you do as your signature offer,
or do we also, in the process of creating your signature offer need to reeducate your marketplace is your signature offer an area that you haven’t tapped into yet that you haven’t established yourself as an expert. Yet, if that’s the case, then we’re going to be creating a foundational signature offer for you. So step number one is to identify whether or not you have a current signature offer.
Do you already have a signature offer? If you already have a signature offer, then we need to have a conversation about marketing it and positioning it as a leading offer that it should be. But in most cases, most companies do not. In fact, signature offers are something that is very rarely talked about. When we talk about building courses, we talk about building membership sites and writing books and speaking on stages and marketing on LinkedIn,
none of that can happen until you extract your content in that you create your signature methodology, your signature system, into your intellectual property, that is yours and only yours. It’s your methodology. Then we talk about what business model you build it into. Are you going to launch a course or a group coaching program or a mastermind? All those answers come later.
The first thing is identifying whether or not you have a current signature offer. So if you’re listening to this podcast and you’re driving the car, just answer, do you have a signature offer right now, or one that you would like to really emphasize and become your signature offer or not step number two, determine what you want to become known for what lights you up,
what makes you happy to do what expertise do you have that is within your established zone of genius. So we want to tap into who you are, your expert skills already to develop your signature offers and your programs. And then number three, choose if you’ll be creating a foundational or an industry influencing signature offer. Those are the three steps. Those are your three action items from this podcast episode.
And next week we are diving into the prerequisites of creating a signature offer. So next week, we’re continuing our series on how to create your signature offer program service, or process and episode number 195. I’m going to extract and share with you the prerequisites to building your signature offer or program. So what do you have to know first? What do you have to do first?
What are the principles that have be in place before you’re ready to actually develop your signature offer or program that’s going to help you lead in your space? You understand the fundamentals of what signature offer or program truly is. These three steps. We talked about identifying whether or not you have an offer, determining what you want to become known for, and choosing if you’re creating a foundational or industry influencing signature offer,
we’ll help you start the process of the work to create your signature offer. So your company can become known. And in addition to this whole series, right? So excited, I am giving you a huge tick start to get your signature offer program process, or system off the ground faster. So the bonus for this episode, don’t miss it. You guys,
I haven’t done a bonus, this awesome, honestly, and a really long time in this cause I know you need it. And I just want to pour into you. And this is my area of expertise. So I have so many tools and resources to give you in this area. I really want to give it to you. So the bonus for this episode is I’m giving you a short six minute video explaining what we talked about on this episode,
more in depth. Plus I’m giving you the blueprint of the components that every signature offer should include. So you’re going to get a list of components that are included in every single true, authentic, accurate, proper, legitimate, genuine signature offer. It’s a list and you’re going to be able to go through. And especially if you have an offer right now,
and you’re wondering cautious, this is my signature offer. You can literally go through this checklist and your signature offer or any signature offer needs to contain these components. And I’m giving you that totally free as a bonus to this week’s episode. So cruise over to signature offer.com to grab all that there. Plus you’ll be able to add your name to the wait list for my,
your signature offer and program masterclass coming back again soon. I’m so excited to teach this again, and I promised you, I would share with you some case studies of clients, who I have helped to develop their signature offer in the past. So I want to share these with you at the end of every single episode for the next couple of weeks, just to help get your wheels spinning and share with you what is possible in your space.
So the first person I’m so honored to highlight is her name is Eloise. She is the creator of the serenade program. And I worked with Eloise to create the first of its kind wellness and management program for surrogates. It was absolutely out of this world. We built this program about seven years ago, and she still leads the industry for surrogacy wellness internationally through her company,
family inceptions, international. It’s amazing. And then the second case study I want to give you is my client Lori out of Switzerland. I’ve worked with Lori for a while and Lori has created baby secrets. Baby secrets is her signature program. It’s a corporate benefits and wellness coaching program that includes classes and local resources for expats who are expecting children. And Lori is out of Zurich.
She’s absolutely beautiful. And I will go ahead and put links to both of these programs in the show notes so that you can get your wheels started to turn. So you can see one program. This is international wellness program, and the other one is smaller. It’s a corporate benefits and coaching program. The sky’s the limit, your signature offer. Your signature program can be anything starts with extracting your area of expertise,
your intellectual property, and giving your clients predictable transformational results that no other business champ. And I’m excited to help you do that. So again, the bonuses for this episode go to signature offer.com. You’ll be able to download the blueprint of the components of a signature offer. Watch that quick six minute video, which has even more than we talked about today.
And you’ll be able to add your name to the wait list to join my, your signature offer and program masterclass, which is coming soon. And of course all the show notes. And the quick recap of this episode can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 94. All right. So great to talk to you guys. I hope you’re having an awesome day and this message and these action steps find you wherever you are,
and they inspire you to create and become known for the area in which you’re called. Have you have an awesome day talk to you soon?

Episode 193: 3 Steps To Take Your Offline Business Online – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established offline businesses who want to launch online services but aren’t sure where to start. And experts, entrepreneurs or companies in my Start To Scale Business System”, phases 1-3.

Summary:

You know the potential to reach more people and expand your reach by offering online services. But when it comes to getting started in the online space you don’t have the time to get your masters in online business everything but you deserve to know where to start so you can make wise choices for your company and your future. This episode gives you three simple steps to take your off-line company online and gives you the wisdom and confidence and clarity in your first steps moving in this direction.

Highlights:

  1. Have confidence in what to do first
  2. Stop being overwhelmed by the fragmented and often times ill-advised coaching
  3. Create a game plan to take your business online now

Resources Mentioned:

 
Get Help Extracting Your Expertise Into Your Signature Online Offer
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life. You love FASTA with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 193 here at the sweet life entrepreneur in business podcast. And I’m April beach, founder of the Sweetlife company and host of this show.
Thanks for tuning in with me another week, we are giving you another business training that many coaches charge thousands of dollars for, and I’m so glad to have an opportunity to pour into you as you’re continuing, or maybe you’re just starting out growing your business online. If we don’t know each other yet, I would love to get to know you more. You can always shoot me a DM over on LinkedIn or Instagram at Sweetlife podcast.
And if this is your first time listening to the show, go back and cruise back and listen to our trailer. Now it was almost 200 episodes ago that would release that trailer, but it will give you an idea if you are in the right place for business strategy and training today, we’re talking to those of you guys who have an established business offline,
and it’s time to bring your offline company and your offline services online. And in this show, I’m giving you three steps to start this process. And let’s talk about why this is important, just to make sure you’re in the right place, listening to the right show. That’s going to give you the right results you’re looking for. So you’ve identified, right?
You know, that there’s so much more potential to reach people and expand your offerings by offering online services. We’re going to talk about some different options of those online services today, because knowing that you want to do that, and actually then taking the step to understanding the choices that are available to you in the most efficient way are two totally separate things. And I get that.
That’s why I’m here recording this show for you today. So when it comes to getting into that online space, there is so much information and it can be incredibly overwhelming. And what we don’t want is we don’t want you launching certain online programs or offers or services or even courses just because everybody else is doing it. We want to make sure it’s a right fit for your company.
And all of that wisdom is what we’re pouring into you here on this show. At the end of this episode, you are going to have confidence in knowing what to do first, second, and third, to take your offline services online. You, if you have been overwhelmed will stop being overwhelmed by all the fragmented information, or you’re either getting information in two different ways.
It’s either super fragmented and you’re not really sure what information you can trust, or there’s so much information coming at you from software companies to business coaches about how to bring your business, that it can be totally overwhelming. And this episode is going to help you sort out fact from fiction. And it’s going to help you understand really what you should just be paying attention to here in the beginning.
And you’re going to have a game plan of what to do in what order to bring your services online. And this show just like almost all of our episodes. We have super amazing episode bonuses. So with this particular episode, to give you even more wisdom and information, I want you to download our totally free ultimate guide to online business models. So we’re talking about obviously online services here on the show,
but this is over 14 pages and it just totally lays out all the different online business model options from online courses to group coaching programs, to masterminds, even to podcasting, to help you have even more wisdom. In what direction you want to go taking your services online. So you can get that ultimate guide totally free by going to April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide.
We’ll make sure we get that into your hands right away. Okay. So if you’re ready for these results and you want this information, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Okay. Three steps to get started taking your offline business online. So, first of all, let’s talk about what your offline business looks like. You either have a brick and mortar store,
or you’re used to providing services to people in person face to face, whether it’s hands on. And we work with a lot of healthcare providers, a lot of consultants and experts, and they want to go. And that could be you. You want to go from seeing people face to face and really expanding your reach to serve more people at a time.
And by doing so you create a business model that gives you ultimately more time and location freedom, as long as it’s done strategically. So if you have a current business that provides face-to-face services, one-on-one services on location, then this is the perfect episode for you to be listening to step number one, as you move in the direction of thinking, Hey, you know,
I really want to expand my business with online services. Step number one is to choose your online business model. And if you have been listening to this podcast now for almost four years, you know, we talk about online business modeling all the time. So if you want even more resources, cruise back to our podcast website@sweetlifecode.com and you can actually search all of our episodes for all of the online business modeling shows,
wanting to make sure, you know, that’s a tool available to you, but right now I want you to just hone in and focus in on what do you imagine that that looks like when you’re working with your clients? Not face to face, it could be in zoom could be by the phone, or it could be creating great content and videos for your clients and distributing it to them.
What does that look like to you? And what do your clients really need from you? If you listen to last week’s episode, we talked about what clients are really looking for, what buyers are buying right now. And people love on demand. People love having resources and answers and quick results at their fingertips. And so, as you’re thinking about creating your online offers,
certainly consider what is it that my clients really want in addition to maybe seeing me face to face. And some of your clients probably have been telling you this already. And if you ask your clients, they will tell you they’ll say yes, I want to meet with you virtually or yes, I would love to be part of a mastermind. So if you ask your clients,
they will tell you, they are always your best place to do. Research is going to your perfect clients are ready. But right now I want to dive into the three most common types of services that offline companies are launching as online offers. And they are online courses, online coaching programs and online memberships. You might have actually thought about one of these types of options before.
And the reason why offline companies are going to these is because they’re really great ways to already package the expertise that you have within your company. There are great ways to utilize your assets. And we’re going to dive into that here in just a second. But step number one is choosing your online business model. Let me give you a quick definition of what each one of these three most popular types are type.
Number one is by launching an online course. So an online course is a great way to take your established content, your things that you’ve already done. You know, in most cases with offline businesses and the established companies we work with, we don’t want to reinvent the wheel. We want to take your expertise and your assets and things you’ve already created within your business and just reframe them,
repackage them, reprogram them. If you will, to offer as an online course. And online courses are most commonly offered two different ways. The first one is called evergreen. Evergreen is where you would take your information. You would turn it into videos in that your clients could purchase it and buy it and absorb the information any time. So they’re prerecorded videos that people can go through any time.
And then the second type of online course is literally it live taught online course where you’re still taking the content. You’re still taking the information and you may teach this in a combination of zoom, live coaching and some PowerPoint presentations, maybe some videos as well. So the two most common types of online courses that offline businesses are launching as online services are evergreen again,
which is pre creating videos that people can watch on demand whenever they want. We already know people are buying those types of things. And number two, launching live coaching as an online course, I will say that for established business owners, I would caution you against launching really cumbersome, huge live online courses. If you’re still running your local business, unless you have a team to help you do that.
So just a little caution there. It can be really time consuming. The second type of online business model that many offline companies are adopting is live coaching. And this is where you take a group of people. Maybe you’ve served them one-on-one before and you start coaching them live online through zoom. You can provide phone consulting, you can provide FaceTime consulting, the medium and how you deliver.
It really doesn’t matter. It’s what you’re delivering. So this is actually providing live coaching without being face to face. And you can provide this one-on-one or you can create a group and provide live consulting to a group, either on a onetime basis for a specialty topic or on an ongoing basis. And the third type of business model that offline company are most commonly launching as online offers our memberships memberships are really amazing.
It’s where you take your expert content and you deliver it on a monthly and a quarterly basis to people in a community that you have created. Memberships are a great way. And we’ve especially in 2020, been working with established businesses who have community already around your business. Maybe it’s a brick and mortar store in creating a membership amongst all your customers. It is an amazing way to connect with them,
and it’s an amazing way to connect them with each other. And memberships is a great thing to consider. If you have content, if you have coaching, maybe there’s some sweet deal or discount that you want to deliver to your customers. And it’s also a great way to create a program for those customers of yours that want to access you on an ongoing basis for a longer period of time.
So they can achieve better results with the services that you deliver. A membership community is a great way to do that. So your first job and choosing, gosh, you know, how am I going to bring my offline business online is to consider what business model do you want to launch? And we just talked about the three most popular ones, courses,
coaching or memberships, but don’t forget to download the ultimate guide to online business models. So you can see all of that. And again, you can grab that by going to April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide. Okay. Step number two is to develop your actual offer program or service. So you’ve already chosen the business model of how you want to deliver it.
Now we need to organize your assets and we need to take your ideas, and we need to take your expertise out of your head out of other places in your business and bring it in to creating your new online offer. So here’s some tips to do that. Number one is to sit down and extract your expertise. What are you known for? What are you great at?
What things have you already created in your business? We don’t want to recreate the wheel here with your first online offer in order to keep your current customers coming back to you. We want to give them more results in a different way within your established area of expertise. And it’s also going to save you literally months, if not years, to create something brand new from scratch,
right? So let’s take what you already do, and let’s scale it online with an online offer for you. So extract your expertise and start with what you already have. Go through your archives, go through things that you’ve created. Content you’ve already created in your business in the past and give yourself an opportunity to take an assessment and an inventory of all the great things you’ve already created.
I guarantee you, if you’re an established business owner, you’ve created some amazing things and some excellent content in your business, and that’s why people love you, right? So go back and see what you’ve already done to help you realize your potential. So for what you can deliver to people through an online program and service, and then also consider what people love the most from you.
If you are a brick and mortar retailer, and you have every single Monday, it’s a new shirt that you may feature on social media and it’s a new item drop, right? Well, people probably go crazy about that. So how can you take that and bring it into a new membership community? Or how can you create content around that to deliver into a coaching program?
Perhaps maybe you can launch an online course, helping people stylize themselves. For whatever reason, there are so many different opportunities that you can take your established expertise and just tweak it a little bit and create your online offer instead of starting from scratch. And then the last tip is what are the most common questions people ask you the easiest way to create an online course or coaching program or membership community is by going through in writing down,
if you haven’t, before you should be in documenting the questions that people most commonly ask you in your business and then taking those questions and the answers to those and turning it into your first online offer. Whether again, you choose a business model and how you deliver that, whether it’s coaching or a course or a membership community, maybe even a podcast, but go through and figure out what are the most common questions that people me all the time.
And that is a great place for you to scale what you’ve already done, extract your expertise and explode it into more sales and an exponential reach. So step number two is to actually go through and develop the content that’s going into your offer program or online service. And then step number three is to develop your first marketing funnel. So first you have to pick the business model.
Second, you have to organize your assets and your material and actually create your program. And third is to go through the process of creating your first marketing funnel. So your marketing funnel is where you’re going to attract more people than just your local faithful and your it’s, where you’re going to convert your local faithful to start connecting with you online. So your first marketing funnel is usually developed in a very simple way where you would create something free to give away that solves a problem,
but not just any problem, your something free you’re giving away online should solve a problem that you discuss and also solve within your new online offer. So create something free. It could be a short video and tips could be a checklist. It could be a strategy sheet, a tip sheet. If you’re a nutrition coach, it could be creating a sample menu for the week,
whatever it is, create something of value that solves a problem for your customers that relates to the service that you’re going to be launching online. And then step number two is to create one page on your website. That includes a form where people can receive that free item. And then step number three is to create a marketing plan, to share your content and to share your message across social media.
You could do podcast guesting. You could go to networking events, both offline, and now we’re starting Kevin’s to see more local networking events happen again. And of course you can run ads. There are numerous ways where you can get eyes on your marketing funnel and grow your list through that. The reality is is this first marketing funnel is important because it shifts people who might be used to only connecting with you online.
Maybe the only way you have sold people into your services before is having them sign a contract face to face, or actually seeing them face to face. So your next step is to determine how are you going to funnel people in to your new online offers could be creating this new first marketing funnel for new people, or you might consider creating a new online experience with a welcome page for your established customers saying,
Hey, guess what? We love working with you in person. Now we’re excited to also work with you online. And so it can be handholding your established local one-on-one client and helping them to onboard and get comfortable with your new online offers. We want your established clients to be the first ones to interact with your new online offers because they’re the ones that love you.
They’re the ones that trust you. And they’re the ones that are going to really help your new online offers grow. They are your biggest cheerleaders. So three steps to take your offline business online. Number one, choose online business model. How are you going to deliver your online services? Number two, develop your offer service program, course membership, whatever it is,
develop the content and the curriculum in there. If you struggle to turn your ideas and your expertise into world-class programs, that’s where my company, the Sweetlife company comes in to help. You can always cruise over to Sweetlife co.com and we will teach you how to extract your expertise and turn it into a worldclass signature offers and programs. And then number three is build your first marketing funnel,
whether it’s a marketing funnel to move your established clients online, or it’s a new marketing funnel to generate new cold leads to your online services. I just can’t emphasize that enough, the importance of valuing the current clients you have and providing different ways for your current clients to absorb your established expertise before you go, and you create a brand new offer, that’s a cold offer to people who’ve never worked with you before.
We want you considering what business model your established clients want and need so that you can continue to pour into them and build those relationships. And we can create repeat customers to spend money again and again and again with you, once you nail your online business model with your current customers, then we talk about expanding to a cold audience and really expanding your reach and exploding your sales even more.
So just start with what you have, start with what you know, and start with the people you already know better than anybody else. Nobody knows your established clients better than you do. And again, start asking them questions. How did they want to work with you online? How can you better meet their needs through digital delivery of products, information, services,
and support. And those are your three steps to take your offline business online, choose your business model, develop your offer, build your first marketing funnel. All right. I hope you found this incredibly helpful. We really want to simplify things here for you. I know it can seem very overwhelming, especially when you’re new to the online space. If you’re in that place where you feel overwhelmed,
hit us up anytime, and we’re happy to jump on a business triaged call with you and get you started in the right direction. You can find us@sweetlifeco.com and all the show notes we talked about here on this episode, the ultimate guide to business models and how to learn, how to turn your ideas and expertise into your signature offer can all be found in the show notes for this episode by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one 93. All right, you guys have a fantastic week, so great to pour into you and talk to you soon.

Episode 192: How To Create Services That Sell Right Now – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 

Who This Episode is Great For:

 

Summary:

Does your company have a right-now offer that is selling? If not, this is the perfect episode for you. This show will help you choose the best service to sell right now and make sure that your offer fits into your longer term growth model. Offers are any service or program you deliver to your clients and can include coaching, hands-on services, virtual consulting, online courses, digital products, membership communities, programs, events and other services that help your company expand and scale. Get 7 questions to ask that will lead to clarity on what you should focus on selling right now?

Highlights:

  1. Decide if you can alter a current offer or if you should create a new one
  2. Know how your offer fits into your future scale plan
  3. Deliver a service that solves your customers’ problems right now

Resources Mentioned:

 
Request Invitation to Your Signature Offer Masterclass: Email april@sweetlifeco.com


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’ll listen To the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Welcome to episode number 192 Here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m April beach. I love chatting with you. Thanks so much for tuning in with me for another episode, only eight episodes away from show number 200.
So thanks for being a faithful listener. And if you’re new here, it’s great to connect with you on today’s show. We’re talking about how to make sure that what you’re offering is selling right now. So how to offer services that sell right now is the official name of today’s show. And this is who this episode is for. This is for those of you guys who are established businesses,
and maybe you’re struggling a little bit with what you’re offering, maybe it isn’t selling, or this is also for you who are established businesses, and you’re ready to take the leap. You’re ready to strategically scale your company by considering different online services in ways that you can streamline what you’ve already done and scale it into a way that is more efficient and more profitable for you.
And this episode is also for those that are new entrepreneurs. And we have a lot of new businesses to listen to this show as well. And this episode is going to help you determine what first services you might want to create in your business. So in the end of this episode, this is what you are going to have accomplished. I want to make sure that you always know what’s coming.
So, you know, whether or not this is a great show for you to continue to tune into. I know your time is incredibly valuable and I respect that. So the end of this episode, you will be able to decide if you can alter a current service, or if you should create a new one, you will know how your offer fits into your future scale plan.
And you’ll be able to deliver a service that solves your customer’s problems right now, or you will at least be able to identify what problem your customers need help solving right now. So this is a perfect episode for you, and it’s going to help you choose the best services to sell right now and to make sure your offer fits into your longterm business growth models,
offers, or any service or program that you deliver to your clients. And that can include coaching hands-on services, virtual consulting, online courses, digital products, membership, communities, programs, events, and other services that could be an extension of your primary business, or they could be the primary business itself. So in this show, I’m going to give you seven questions to ask yourself,
that’s going to lead to the clarity that you need to know what you should be selling right now. So if that’s in line with what you’re looking for, stick around and let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show<inaudible> All right, let’s go ahead and talk about how to offer services that are selling right now. First of all, I want to make sure that you have a very important and powerful tool at your fingertips.
This is for those of you that are looking to launch a portion of your business and taught online services, and you aren’t really sure how to choose them. You can go and download my ultimate guide to online business models. Right now it’s a 14 page guide. It’s very extensive and it talks about all the different types of online services and programs that companies offer and exactly how that affects your business and your lifestyle by offering each one of the services,
you can go grab that totally free ultimate guide by visiting April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide. And I’ll make sure that that link is in the show notes for you as well. So let’s go ahead and start really diving in here. So does your company have an offer that is selling right now? If you don’t, this is a perfect episode for you to be listening to.
So your suite of offers that you create in your business, you might have three different packages or two or a really high end package and an entry package. Every business is strategically designed differently. So you could have all these different things that you offer, but what’s equally important, especially right now in today’s business economy is making sure that you have a service or a program or an offer that people desperately need.
And that means they desperately need it right now. And here is why, this is what we know about are right now buyers. So people that are buying services, professional development, personal services, business services, marketing services, you know, design services, whatever it is that you do, healthcare services. This is what we know about are right now.
Buyers are right now, buyers are spending money. They’re definitely spending money. There are some people that are doing really well financially right now, despite the fact that sadly, there are a lot of people that aren’t, but the right now buyers are spending money, but they’re spending it much more wisely. So they aren’t not spending, but they’re choosing what they’re spending their money on much more carefully than they did 12 months ago.
We know that we also know that our right now buyers want to see a transformation. They want to make sure that they can see or feel or experience a transformation. And that transformation is much more important to them and their decision making to buy from you. Then it also was 1224, 36 months ago. So what do I mean by a transformation? That means that what you’re offering,
they need to be able to see a start to finish. They need to be able to identify. This is where I was before I worked with this company or purchase this service. And they need to be able to remember and identify how that felt, maybe some of the pain or frustration or even hope. And they need to be able to see, wow,
this is what it looks like in the end. This is what I paid for. This is what I got, and this is my injury result. So it’s incredibly important that what you’re offering is giving your customers the ability to see a transformation. There are a lot of great services that businesses offer out there. And I’m not saying that your company has to provide a huge transformation.
It could be really, really small, fast, quick result, or it could be something more comprehensive. But our buyers today, we know that they need, and they want to see a transformation with your services. And they need to understand what that transformation is before they buy from you. So if you are not clearly articulating what the end result will be from working with you,
they will probably not buy from you right now. You know? And a great example of this is my wonderful cleaning lady that come help me clean my house, frankly, because I’m a terrible housekeeper. I know what’s going to happen. I know what my house is going to look like. It is usually honestly a total disaster before they get here in three hours later,
when they leave, it is the best place ever to be in for me. Right. It feels good. And it smells good. And it’s organized. It’s not just clean. I mean, they pick up stuff and fold laundry. So I know what that end. Result’s going to look like. And I look forward to it and believe me, it’s worth every penny.
I pay for them to do that. So whatever your service is that you deliver, that’s the kind of feeling you want to give your people. And that’s what we know about are right now, buyers are right now. Buyers also want to make sure that every single service is all about them. It’s all around them. It’s around their time, their schedule it’s like TV on demand.
Okay? So you, as a business owner might be struggling to figure out how to do that within managing your own company and your own teams and your own families. I get that. And that is a struggle because so many customers want things right on demand. That’s also one of the benefits of launching online business models, because it helps to solve those problems.
So we know that our right now buyers want it all around them, their schedule, weekends nights, early mornings, whatever it is. And they honestly expect that from you. It doesn’t mean I’m telling you that your company has to meet those on demand needs. I’m just, that’s what they want. And that’s what they’re buying. And then the other thing we know is it right now,
buyers are digging online a year ago. They might not have been as comfortable receiving consulting or therapy or taking a yoga class online. But now this is a way of the world. In those of you who have already tapped into online business are in this gold mine. If you haven’t yet, make sure that you download my ultimate guide to choose the online business model.
That’s right for you. Again, I’ll put that in the show notes of this episode for you, because that’s going to really speed up the process to help you decide how to tap into the online business scaling market. It doesn’t matter if you’re a consultant or a professional, we need to be making sure that you are tapping into the way we know that buyers are buying now.
And the way we know that they will in the future. So in this episode, we’re talking about really how to create these services that are going to meet the needs of our right and our buyers. And so we want you to look at your current offers and determine which one is the perfect one right now for you to sell. Or maybe we need to add a new offer,
alter some offers, and here are seven questions that I’m guiding you through here. That’ll help you get clarity on what’s going on in your business and how to find the solution for your right now buyers. Okay. All right, here we go. And if you’re driving your car, you can always replay this. You can save this, you can stop this and listen to it later.
And of course you can visit the show notes for this episode, which are found@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one 92. It’s number of this episode. So here we go. Question number one. And you can just answer out loud. If you’re at the gym or driving your car, question, number one, what is your primary offer service program course or product right now?
What is the main thing you sell? What is like your number one, go to package or, you know, delivery or service. So answer that question right now. Number two, is that primary offer selling? Did it sell in the past and maybe it’s dropped off a bit or is it currently selling? If you have answered your primary offer in it’s still currently selling and you are experiencing business growth,
the way that we would normally expect for you to receive experienced business growth, then you can literally turn off this podcast right now. You don’t have to listen to anymore. You have a lot of things to do in your life, tune in with me next week and we’ll keep pouring into you. Okay? So if you have an offer in it’s selling right now,
stop listening to this podcast, turned me off, make me shut up if you don’t, if you have your offer, but maybe it’s been declining or maybe you haven’t really identified primary offer that you’re selling or your primary offer, isn’t selling. Let’s keep going. All right. Question number three. Does your primary offer solve an immediate problem for your clients?
Again? What do we know about right now, buyers? We know that they want to solve a problem and they want to see a transformation and a difference right now. So does your offer solve an immediate problem for your clients? Now media can be relative. I don’t mean you’re going to fix their world in an hour. Maybe you can. It could be a couple of months,
could be six weeks, but we want to make sure that you are delivering an offer that is giving a transformation that in your client’s mind, based on what it is that you do as an expert, that they can see that there will be an end result and that end result feels fast and good. And sure. So does this offer solve an immediate problem for your clients?
If you answer that you don’t even have a primary offer right now during this question, I want you to be thinking of what offer could you deliver to your customers that solves an immediate problem for them right now. Now here’s where we pivot a little bit, and this is equally as important as everything else we’ve talked about is your offer something that you want yourself or your company to become known for a lot of times,
businesses will create services just because that might be the type of service that you offer based on your industry, but they don’t necessarily want to be famous for that. Maybe you as a business owner have a bigger dream for your company or a bigger goal or a different impact that you would like to give your customers. So ask yourself the question. Does your offer create a reputation for yourself in your business that you want to be known for?
Now, if you’re putting out a big fire and we’re creating a new offer right now because nothing’s selling it’s okay. If the answer to that is no there’s more years ahead. Okay. If your offer is selling or you need to just ramp it up a little bit or make some edits to it, or maybe alter your offer a little bit, then ask yourself,
the question is all this hard work that I’m going into in my team or my company is going into creating these services. Are they leading to what we as a company really want to be known for? And so I want you doing good work, smart work that has exponential results for your business in the future. Not just work, we don’t ever want to just do work and create things and do services just to sell them.
We want them to be a greater part of your strategic business plan. With that being said, does this service allow you or your company to operate in your zone of genius, where you are just flowing, where things are just thriving and coming together, you love doing what you do. You love being within this element of creating this result for people. Does it operate in your zone of genius?
Again, that’s more of a ideal if your company is struggling, but if your company really isn’t struggling and you’re looking to scale, that’s a very important question for you to answer. And then of course, question number seven is, does your offer make you enough money is what you’re settling, equaling the profit that you planned to make right now. Now this is a very right now question.
There’s a lot of different things that have happened for businesses and companies right now. And so if you are creating a new offer, because that’s what we’re talking about in this show to sell right now, we want to make sure that the value of that offer is going to equal the dollar amount that you need your business to generate right now. So you might want to make some tweaks to your offer.
And then along those lines are making sure you’re asking yourself, does this service, does this offer deliver an immediate result? Does it solve an immediate problem for my people, for my clients? So these are the seven questions. And when you ask yourself these questions, it’s going to give you clarity on whether or not you need to edit an existing alter,
uh, offer or alter an existing offer or create a new one. You are going to know how that offer fits into your longterm business model in stop yourself. If it doesn’t stop yourself, if you really want to make sure that what you’re creating is going to fit into what you want your company to be known for. And let’s make sure that the offer you’re creating to sell right now.
So it was an immediate pain problem for people because that’s what we know about are right now buyers. So going back through this, I’ll just repeat these seven questions really quick for you, and we can move on. I’m going to give you some tips here to keep going. So the question number one is what is your primary offer service program? Coarser product question.
Number two, is, is it selling question number three, is, does this offer solve an immediate problem for your clients? Number four, what changes need to be made to alter or improve or update your offer to solve an immediate problem? Number five, is your offer something that you want yourself or your company to become known for? Number six, are you operating in your zone of genius and number seven,
does your offer make you enough money? When you answer those seven questions, you are going to know exactly how to offer services that are selling right now. And you’re going to be able to take an inventory of what you’ve already done. I don’t want you recreating the wheel. I want you taking your expertise, your experience, your current services, taking a peek at them and making some tweaks.
Unless you’re a new business, we’re going to start from scratch and answering those questions is going to give you incredible clarity on what you can and should be selling right now in your new market. And here’s some tips. If you feel like you’re a little stuck here, this is more advanced business tips. For those of you guys that are established businesses. The first thing is is you should highly consider creating a signature offer that you want to be known for.
If you haven’t done that yet, consider what that signature offer could be and how you want to be known in your space. Tip number two, if you’re not sure what to do here, you guys ask your clients, get on the phone with people, pick up the phone, call clients, call past clients, call friends who might know people that could use your services.
Literally get on the phone with people and ask them, what are you struggling with? What problem do you have right now? And how can I solve that for you? And listen, be a really good listener if you’re stuck and you aren’t sure where to start listening is the best market research you can ever, ever do. So listen, ask questions and create solutions and tip.
Number three is if you haven’t yet now certainly is the time to scale your business by offering online services, programs, coaching, digital products, communities, so on and so forth. The list is endless. As far as the business model, you can choose online. The question is is what are you doing? What end result are you giving? The answer is not I’m offering a course.
The answer is not I’m offering coaching or I’m having an event. The answer is I’m helping people solve this. So ask yourself, what problem are you solving? And then ask yourself what sort of method or business model is best for my business that I can move forward and deliver these results through an online business model scaling. And so again, I have that resource for you to give you the understanding of the different business models.
And you can go grab that by going to April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide, and you’ll receive the ultimate guide for choosing the business, my online business model. That’s right for you. All right, today, we talked about how to offer services that are selling right now. I give you seven strategic questions to ask yourself, to get clarity on how to choose a service or an offer.
That’s going to give your people results and they’re going to pay for it. And I gave you the link to download the ultimate guide, to choose the online business model. That is right for you. All of the information we chatted about can be found in our podcast. Show notes by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 92. Thank you so much for being a listener to this show.
I love that you’re here for only seven. Now episodes away from episode 200, and I really appreciate you sharing this show and trusting us to help you build your business. How do you guys next week.

Episode 191: 6 Key Areas To Reset and Refocus Your Business This Fall – Part 2 – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Free 3 day Reset & Refocus Challenge 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who feel fragmented and need a clear and strong plan to move forward for the rest of 2020.

Summary:

If you feel like your business needs a reset, you’re not alone. Fall is a natural time to reset and refocus, but this year these tasks are not idealistic, they’re imperative! In this episode, we’re continuing our talk on the 6 Core Areas of your business that may require your attention to reset and refocus, in order for your business to keep moving forward and be ready for 2021. 
 
In this show (part 2) we dive into core areas 4, 5, and 6; your mind, your network and your home or life. April guides you through strategic questions to determine if you need to reset, and gives you tips on how to reset each area if needed. This is another practical business strategy training that will give you immediate business results. 

Highlights:

  1. Know how to choose a mastermind 
  2. Know if you need a mindset shift
  3. Get tips to separate your work and life if you have a home office
  4. Have resources to connect with powerful affiliates to grow your business

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
Want to Be an Affiliate for My Products/Services? Email kelli@sweetlifeco.com


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi guys. And welcome back to part two of the reset and refocus your business. The fall challenge. This isn’t really a challenge, although we are running the live challenge this week. And so you are invited to join us.
If you are a subscriber to this podcast and listening to it real time, I’m hosting the fifth annual entrepreneur reset and refocus challenge. That really helps you make sure your business is on track for the last three and a half months of the year. I would love for you to join me in there. You can just cruise over to Sweetlife co.com forward slash reset to join me in this challenge.
And so what we’re talking about today is the second part of six really important areas that once we reset them, it’s going to help your business focus and move forward this fall. And we always host this challenge. This is something we all as business owners need to do. That’s why we have done this so many years in a row, but this particular year is a mess.
And so what we’re doing is even more than what we usually do. Not more work, more focused, more important. I think then what we usually want to do of feeling good to reset in the fall. It’s no longer feeling good to reset in the fall this year. It is. We have to make sure your business is reset and refocused this fall without a doubt,
it’s time to do it. So welcome to the show. I’m April beach, I’m your host. And of course you are tuned into this wait life entrepreneur and business podcast. I am so glad that you were here. All the show notes and everything that we’re talking about on this episode and last week’s episode can be found by visiting and sweet lives. podcast.com
forward slash one 91. As I said, this is a continuation. So this is part two. So if you missed last week’s episode, episode, number one 90, I highly recommend you pause this where you are and go back and listen to last week’s episode. First in these two shows, we are talking about your services and your offer and your marketing and your systems.
And then today’s show we’re really honing into your mindset, your network, and your home and your life, and how to reset these important areas so that your business is going to thrive this fall. And I invite you again to join me in the reset and refocus challenge, totally free, and to download the eight page cheat sheet workbook I have for you to create immediate action and results in your business by visiting Sweetlife co.com
forward slash reset. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s focus area.<inaudible> Last week on the show I gave you tips and strategies to know whether or not you need to reset your offer, your marketing and your lead generation systems and your internal business systems today on the show, we’re really diving into your mind, your mindset, where are you mentally as a business owner,
we’re going to dive into your network, who are you connecting with? Are they valuable to you? And are you valuable to them? And we’re going to dive into your home office and your life. All of these things are equally important to your business, who you are, what’s happening in your life. All these things affect your business. And so that’s why they’re important for us to talk about on this show.
So let’s go ahead and start with talking about resetting your mind. Tony Robbins says that business success is 83% mindset, 17% strategy. You hear that again and again, we know it to be true. You can have all the tools in the world. You can have all the blueprints, the perfect business plan, but if your mind isn’t set on being successful and working hard and being amazing at what you do,
you’re never going to do it. And so it’s really important that together, we talk about making sure our mind is where we want to be, and that we are mentally advancing as leaders and as entrepreneurs. So area number four of resetting. Again, we talked about one through three and last week show area. Number four, every setting is your mind.
And here are some questions that I want you to ask yourself. What do you want to learn? Are you growing? Are you currently challenging yourself in growing as a leader, as an entrepreneur, as a business owner, as a human being, when we stopped learning and we stopped growing that’s when everything else kind of comes to a screeching halt. I’ve learned that about myself.
When I stopped listening to audible books, when I stopped challenging myself to go to the gym, when I stopped doing things in my life or for my mind, then everything else slowly kind of comes to this screeching halt. And so it’s important as we reset this fall that we’re talking about what’s going on in your head because this year has been really hard,
mentally, more than ever on a lot of us and most of us and our kids, I can tell you that I get what it feels like to be exhausted simply from having your mind overworking. And so we’re going to reset that so that your mind is thriving and that you are firing on all cylinders. So ask yourself, what’s something new that you want to learn.